Home

2 - Audio Services Corporation (Canada) Ltd.

1. No Page Item Settings Default USER Description File setting menu page 03 SW STATUS GAMMA ON OFF ON Turns the gamma correction A function on or off MATRIX Turns the linear matrix correction function on or off KNEE Turns knee correction on or off WHITE CLIP Turns white clipping correction on or off DETAIL Turns detail correction on or off APERTURE Turns aperture correction on or off FLARE Turns flare correction on or off 04 BLACK MASTER BLACK 99 to 99 O Adjusts the master black level A FLARE R BLACK Adjusts the R black level B BLACK Adjusts the B black level MASTER FLARE Adjusts the master flare level R FLARE Adjusts the R flare level G FLARE Adjusts the G flare level B FLARE Adjusts the B flare level FLARE ON OFF ON Turns flare correction on or off 05 GAMMA GAMMA ON OFF ON Turns gamma correction on or off STEP GAMMA 0 35 to 0 90 0 45 Sets the step gamma correction curve MASTER GAMMA 99 to 99 0 Sets the master gamma correction curve R GAMMA Sets the R gamma correction curve G GAMMA Sets the G gamma correction curve B GAMMA Sets the B gamma correction curve GAMMA SELECT STD CINE1 STD Selects a master gamma CINE2 correction curve CINEA KNEE FIX CINE ON OFF ON When GAMMA SELECT is set to CINE1 CINE2 CINES or CINE4 turns fixed knee point on or off 06 DETAIL DETAIL ON OFF ON Turns detail correction on or off
2. 48 Write Protecting Discs eess 48 Loading and Unloading a Disc 49 Formatting DISC eise 49 Handling of Discs When Recording Does Not End Normally Salvage Function 50 Basic Procedure for Shooting 51 Recording Basic Operations 53 Selecting the Recording Format 53 Adjusting the Black Balance White Balance M S 54 Setting the Electronic Shutter 57 Adjusting the Iris aient 59 Adjusting the Audio Level 60 Setting the Time 61 Setting for Special Shooting Cases 63 Deleting 64 Recording Shot Marks 65 Setting the Thumbnail Image at Recording fiii e DU 65 Recording Advanced Operations 66 Time lapse Video Recording Interval Rec PUNCUON ionic t tac 66 Starting a Shoot with a Few Seconds of Pre Stored Picture Data Picture Cache FBUnCt ON ree reete 68 Assigning User Defined Clip Titles A utomiaticallyu cedet boues 69 Assigning User Defined Clip and Clip List 71 Recording with the Clip Continuous arai 74 75 Normal Playback eee tese 75
3. STANDARD File ID Carry out the procedure from step 2 in Saving a Scene File on page 149 The set file ID is saved together with the data To select the file information items to be displayed You can select the items of file information to be displayed on the SCENE STORE pages 1 to P20 or the SCENE RECALL pages 1 to P20 used for saving data to or loading data from a Memory Stick For details to select the item To select the file information items to be displayed on page 148 Loading Scene Files How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the desired item 1 Display the SCENE FILE page of the FILE menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic Menu Operations on page 129 2 To load the scene file stored in the camcorder select the desired file number and press the MENU knob on the left of the file number changes to W The camcorder is set up according to the loaded scene file FO40SCENE FILE SCENE 25 To cancel the selected scene file Turn the MENU knob to move to Bil and press the MENU knob again changes to 0 The camcorder returns to the settings before selecting this scene file To load a scene file saved in the Memory Stick Select SCENE RECALL and press the MENU knob The SCENE RECALL page appears Saving and Loading Scene Files eyeq
4. 139 1 Display the OUTPUT page of the OPERATION menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic Menu Operations on page 129 2 Select COMPONENT OUT and press the MENU knob select one of the following and press the MENU knob AUTO Switch between HD YPbPr and SD YPbPr according to the recording format This applies to both recording and playback HD YPbPr Regardless of the recording format output HD YPbPr when recording Output SD YPbPr only when playing back DVCAM format SD YPbPr Regardless of the recording format output SD YPbPr This applies to both recording and playback Setting the Color Temperature Manually You can manually adjust the value of the white balance by setting the color temperature How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the desired item 1 Display the WHITE page of the PAINT menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic Menu Operations on page 129 sBumes pue sAejdsiq nua 1 2 2 Select the desired setting item and press the MENU knob You can set the following items on the WHITE page Item Description A desired value Adjust the value while looking at the real image because error tends to be bigger for adjustment of high color temperature COLOR TEMP Sets the color temperature for the C TEMP BAL A Adjus
5. and then press the button or knob All clips are deleted Thumbnail Search xXoeqKe d pue e Jaydeyo 83 yoeqhe q pue Bulpiooay g 1e deuo 84 Locked clips cannot be deleted When all clips have been deleted you return to the normal screen Thumbnail Search Scene Selection Chapter Overview What is scene selection Scene selection is a function which allows you to select material clips from the material recorded on a disc and perform cut editing You can do this by operating on this unit only Scene selection is a convenient way to perform cut editing in the field and in other offline situations In scene selection you create a clip list editing data Since the material itself is not affected you can repeat this any number of times You can play back the edit list created by scene selection on this unit In the scene selection function you can add whole clips add parts of a clip add using chapters change the playback sequence amend or delete In and Out points and carry out all of these operations simply on this unit Clip lists edit data created with the scene selection function can be used on XPRI and other full feature nonlinear editing systems Overview uonoe esg eueogS y Jejdeuo 85 uonoe eg eueog p JeldeuD 86 Flow of scene selection editing Record material or insert disc containing recorded material into this unit
6. 32 Setting the Date and Time of the Internal 34 Preparing the Lens 35 Mounting the Lens eseeee 35 Adjusting the Flange Focal Length 35 Adjusting the Viewfinder 37 Table of Contents Detaching the Viewfinder 37 Adjusting the Viewfinder Position 37 Adjusting the Eyepiece Focus and the Screen Brightness Contrast and Outline Emphasis o etu 37 Attaching a 5 inch Electronic Viewfinder 38 Using the Shoulder Strap 39 Adjusting the Shoulder Pad Position 39 Mounting on a Tripod 40 Using a Video Light 40 Preparing the Audio Input System 41 Using the Supplied Microphone 41 Using an External Microphone 41 Attaching a UHF Synthesized 42 Connecting Line Input Audio Equipment 44 Connecting the Remote Control Unit 44 Connecting ordre prre cie 46 Connecting an External Video Monitor 46 Using an i LINK Connection 46 Connections for Using the PDZ 1 47 Chapter 3 Recording and Playback Handling Discs 48 Discs Used for Recording and Playback 48 Notes on Handling
7. Hold down the red button and pull the lever in the direction of the arrow After removing the camcorder if the tripod adaptor pin has not returned to its original position hold down the red button and move the lever in the direction of the arrow to return the pin to its original position It is not possible to mount a camcorder with the pin left out Mounting on a Tripod Using a Video Light Using a Video Light With this camcorder you can use the Anton Bauer Ultralight 2 or equivalent video light powered by 12 V with maximum power consumption of 50 W If you connect the video light to the LIGHT connector on the camcorder and set the LIGHT switch to AUTO you can turn the light on and off automatically as you start and stop the VDR operation The output of the LIGHT connector on the camcorder is controlled to 12 V even when the camcorder is supplied with 12 V or more power through the DC IN connector or battery pack The brightness or color temperature of the light will not change according to voltage increase Do not use a video light with power consumption of over 50 W The brightness or color temperature of the light will change when the voltage supplied through the DC IN connector or from the battery pack is under 12 V To attach the video light Fit the video light to the accessory fitting shoe on the camcorder grip and connect the video light cable to the LIGHT connector The accessory fitti
8. Menu Organization and Operation MAINTENANCE menu No Page Item Settings Default USER Description File menu page 10 LENS ZOOM SELECT 1 2 1 When a 1 2 inch lens is mounted A set this item according to the manufacturer of the lens some lenses do not require a setting 1 Select when you are using a Canon lens 2 Select when you are using a Fujinon lens ZOOM SPEED 0 to 99 20 Switches the zoom speed AF DETECT AREA FULL CENTER Selects the auto focus detection CENTER area 1 When TYPE DETECTION on the BATTERY 2 page is set to OTHER this follows the setting of BEFORE END 2 When TYPE DETECTION on the BATTERY 2 page is set to OTHER this follows the setting of END FILE menu FILE menu No Page Item Settings Default USER Description File menu page 01 USERFILE USER FILE LOAD Displays the EXEC See Saving and Loading User USER FILE SAVE USER FILE Files on page 145 selection Screen F ID Displays Blank character input mode up to 16 character USER PRESET After asking EXEC See Resetting USER Menu YES NO Settings to the Factory Default executes the Settings on page 134 CUSTOMIZE RESET fonction Returns the pages registered in the USER menu to the factory default state 02 ALL FILE ALL FILE LOAD Displays the EXEC Loads ALL file FILE ALL FILE SAVE selection Saves ALL file Screen F ID D
9. e Jaydeyo 77 xoeg e g pue 78 0002 CLIP MENU CLIP INFORMATION DATE TIME CODE DURATION TC 00 28 40 23 TC00 27 51 09 d TE 00 28 22 02 f TC 00 28 34 7 10 TC 00 26 06 09 30 NOV 2005 13 36 TC OQ 28 54 22 DUR 0 00 07 20 Use the SEL SET button or the MENU knob to select the information to display from among the following and then press the button or knob DATE Date of recording TIME CODE Start timecode DURATION Whole length of clip SEQUENCE NUMBER Thumbnail sequence number The information displayed on the lower side of thumbnails changes according to the item selected Example When SEQUENCE NUMBER is selected __ 00001 Thumbnail sequence number Some characters in clip names clip list names and titles may be converted to characters for display in the thumbnail screen and CLIP menu For details see page 72 Changing the Thumbnail Image Index Frame of a Clip In the thumbnail screen normally the first frame of a clip is displayed as the index frame To change this to show a different frame proceed as follows You can also select at 1 second intervals a frame within 10 seconds of the first frame as the thumbnail image of the clip at the time when you record a clip with this unit For details see page 65 1 with the thumbnail screen displayed hold
10. yoeqhe q pue g 58 SHUTTER switch The current shutter setting indication appears for about 3 seconds in the setting change and adjustment progress message display area of the viewfinder screen Examples SHUTTER 1 250 ECS 60 0 Hz SLS 1 15 2FRAME Before the shutter setting indication in step 2 disappears push the SHUTTER switch to SEL again Repeat this until the desired mode or speed appears The shutter speed display changes as in the following diagram Example of standard mode display of shutter speed in seconds in the case of i60 format 1 100 1 125 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 SLS mode ECS mode To set the shutter speed in ECS mode 1 2 1 Carry out the steps in To set the shutter mode and the standard mode shutter speed on page 57 to set the shutter mode to ECS Recording Basic Operations ECS 60 00Hz 2 Turm the MENU knob until the desired frequency appears The selectable frequency range varies depending on the recording format See the table under About the shutter modes on page 57 When the RM B150 Remote Control Unit is connected You can set the shutter speed in ECS mode with the rotary encoder of the RM B150 To set the shutter speed in SLS mode When EZ mode is selected SLS mode is forcibly deselected When you start recording under the following conditions with the camcorder in
11. DELETE CLIP 9 Delete a clip see page 83 LOCK UNLOCK CLIP Lock or unlock a clip see page 81 LOCK OR DELETE ALL CLIPS 9 Lock unlook or delete all clips see pages 78 and 81 TC PRESET 0 Change the start timecode for the current clip list to a desired value see page 94 ADD P Add sub clips to the current clip list see page 88 MOVE P Reorder sub clips see page 92 TRIM 9 Change the In point or Out point of a sub clip see page 92 DELETE 0 Delete unnecessary sub clips see page 93 DELETE SHOT MARK 9 Delete a shot mark see page 80 a Displayed only in operating the thumbnail screen Managing Clip Lists uonoe es eueog p Jejdeuo 95 uonoe eg eueog p jejdeuj 96 b Displayed only in operating the clip list screen c Displayed only in operating the chapter screen To exit the CLIP menu Carry out the same operation as when displaying the menu hold down the SHIFT button and press the SEL SET button down CLIP MENU Loading a Clip List from the Disc as the Current Clip List Proceed as follows 1 Display the CLIP menu See To display the CLIP menu on page 95 2 select LOAD CLIP LIST This displays the clip lists To switch the information displayed for clip lists Press the SEL SET button to the right side Each press switches the information displayed for clip lists in the following order Date and time of creation
12. 13 0V 12 0V 11 0V USER menu page Description AUTO Automatically detects battery type OTHER Determines battery type as always Others When Others is determined remaining battery capacity indicator segment 7 lights when below the set voltage Battery battery capacity indicator segment ESS 1234567 When Others is determined remaining battery capacity indicator segment 6 lights when below the set voltage When Others is determined remaining battery capacity indicator segment 5 lights when below the set voltage When Others is determined remaining battery capacity indicator segment 4 lights when below the set voltage When Others is determined remaining battery capacity indicator segment 3 lights when below the set voltage When Others is determined remaining battery capacity indicator segment 2 lights when below the set voltage When Others is determined remaining battery capacity indicatorsegment 1 lights when below the set voltage File 09 GENLOCK GL H PHASE 99 to 99 0 H ADVANCE OH 90H OH Sets horizontal phase for genlock Selects the output phase when an SD reference signal is input OH Make SD REF and HD OUT in phase 90H Make the HD OUT phase 90H with offset respect to the SD reference signal When an HD reference signal is input HD REF and HD OUT are in phase
13. How to select an item in the page screen Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the desired item 1 Display the FORMAT page of the USER or OPERATION menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic Menu Operations on page 129 2 Select ASPECT RATIO DV and press the MENU knob Tum the MENU knob to select the desired aspect ratio 16 9 4 3 and press the MENU knob Setting the aspect ratio in HD mode You can select the aspect ratio of video downconverted from HD for output as SD How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the desired item 1 Display the OUTPUT page of the OPERATION menu and press the MENU knob 2 Select HD 5D and press the MENU knob Tur the MENU knob to select the desired aspect ratio 16 9 4 3 and press the MENU knob The aspect ratio of HD analog composite output is always 16 9 To display a 16 9 aspect ratio of on the viewfinder screen When the recording format is DVCAM and the aspect ratio is 16 9 you can display the indication 16 9 on the viewfinder screen by setting DISP 16 9 on the VF DISP 1 page of the OPERATION menu to ON For details see Selecting the Display Items on page 135 About the CCD Scan Mode This unit allows you to record in progressive scan mode as well as in interlace scan mode You can select the scan mode from the following modes using the FORMAT page of t
14. br dr Q MONITOR switches SHIFT button Lithium battery compartment AUDIO LEVEL knobs AUDIO SELECT switches AUDIO IN switches VIDEO OUT CHARACTER switch F RUN SET R RUN switch FRONT MIC LOW CUT switch PRESET REGEN CLOCK switch Location and Function of Parts M9SIAJOAQ Je1deuj 19 M Q 491deuS 20 Q MONITOR audio monitor selection switches By means of combinations of the two switches you can select audio that you want to hear through the built in speaker or optional earphones Position of left Position of right Audio output side switch side switch CH 1 CH 3 CH 1 2 Channel 1 audio MIX Channels 1 and 2 mixed audio stereo CH 2 CH 4 Channel 2 audio CH 1 CH 3 CH 3 4 Channel 3 audio MIX Channels 3 and 4 mixed audio stereo CH 2 CH 4 Channel 4 audio a By connecting stereo headphones to the EARPHONE connector you can hear the audio in stereo On the AUDIO 2 page of the MAINTENANCE menu HEADPHONE OUT must be set to STEREO SHIFT button Use this in combination with other buttons Q Lithium battery compartment Attach the supplied CR2032 lithium battery Details on how to attach the lithium battery see Attaching and Replacing the Lithium Battery on page 30 THUMBNAIL indicator This lights when thumbnails are displayed Q THUMBNAIL button
15. To stop overwriting press the MENU knob leaving pointing to NO Tooverwrite select YES and press the MENU knob You can select the information displayed on each USER SAVE or USER LOAD page For details see To select the file information items to be displayed on page 148 About the USER menu settings to be saved in the Memory Stick Settings for items on all pages of the USER menu are saved in the Memory Stick as a user file If data cannot be saved If one of the following error messages appears during or after the save operation then the data was not saved 1 Display the USER FILE page of the FILE menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic Menu Operations on page 129 Select F ID and press the MENU knob A character table appears FO1OUSER F USER FILE USER FILE eF ID N 1H 8 amp 012345678 9 gt lt gt ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP BRSTUUUXYZIYlabcdefshiJk 1mnorarstuuuxsz INS DEL RET ESC END ILE LOAD SAVE Follow steps 3 and 4 described in Setting the Shot ID on page 137 to enter characters When you have finished entering the file ID turn the MENU knob to move to END and press the MENU knob The entered file ID is now displayed Saving and Loading User Files geq 1es Bulpeo7 pue Bunes 9 Jaydeyo 147 asn Buipeo pue Burnes 9 148 FO1OUSER F USER 2U
16. oc VTE 000007 TV 1 1 70700 0 o 0 L I E L Q ePR H x r N 2 Move the mark to the character you want to change and then press the MENU knob 3 Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the desired character in the list of selectable characters and then press the MENU knob 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to enter the remaining characters 5 When you have finished entering the prefix turn the MENU knob to move the W mark to END and then press the MENU knob The camcorder exits prefix input mode and the original CLIP TITLE page appears To set the initial value of the clip title serial number You can set the initial value of the clip title serial number to 00001 default or to any five digit value To return the initial value to 00001 Proceed as follows 1 Onthe CLIP TITLE page select CLEAR NUMERIC and then press the MENU knob The message CLEAR OK YES NO appears 2 Select YES and then press the MENU knob The value in the NUMERIC field returns to 00001 default To set the initial value to any number Proceed as follows 1 Onthe CLIP TITLE page select NUMERIC and then press the MENU knob A digit selection screen appears 2 Move the mark to the digit you want to change and then press the MENU knob Turm the MENU knob to move the Bil mark to the desired digit in the list of selectable digits and then press the ME
17. Memory Stick TITLES TXT is transferred to the internal memory of the unit The message COMPLETE appears when the transfer finishes The message FILE NOT FOUND appears if no list of title prefixes is found Check the location where the file is stored on the Memory Stick To select a prefix from the title prefix list Proceed as follows 1 On the CLIP TITLE page select SELECT PREFIX and then press the MENU knob A list of up to 20 title prefixes appears N ESC OtDOWNOXTSON O P Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q 0 1 Ooooooooooo 4 When no list of title prefixes has been transferred to the internal memory of this unit only the initial value TITLE appears elect the desired title prefix from the list and then 2 Select the desired title prefix from the list and th press the MENU knob The CLIP TITLE page appears again and the selected prefix appears in the PREFIX field Recording Advanced Operations xXoeqKe d pue e Jaydeyo 73 xoeg e g pue Bulpiooay g 74 Recording with the Clip Continuous Rec Function Normally a clip is generated as an independent file every time recording starts and stops The Clip Continuous Rec function allows you to continue recording to the same clip until the function is turned off regardless of how many times recording starts and stops This is convenient if you want to avoid generating a large
18. The FIND MODE item on the ESSENCE MARK page of the MAINTENANCE menu allows you to specify whether to enable jumps to essence marks or whether jumps are to clip starting frames only To specify shot marks to be recorded on the disc To select whether or not to record shot mark 1 and shot mark 2 use the following procedure With the factory default setting both are recorded How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the desired item 1 Display the ESSENCE MARK page of the MAINTENANCE menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic Menu Operations on page 129 MO40ESSENCE MARK SHOT MARK 1 SHOT MARK 2 INDEX PIC FIND MODE 2 Select SHOT MARK 1 or SHOT MARK 2 and press the MENU knob 3 Turn the MENU knob to select ON record the shot mark or OFF do not record the shot mark and press the MENU knob Recording a SHOT MARK 1 Press the RET button on the lens once ShotMark1 appears near the timecode display on the viewfinder screen for about one second If SHOT MARK 1 recording has been assigned to one of the ASSIGN switches you can also use that switch to record a SHOT MARK 1 See Assigning Functions to ASSIGN Switches on page 141 for more information about how to make assignments Recording a SHOT MARK 2 Press the RET button twice in quick succession during recording or playback ShotMark2 appears near the timecode dis
19. The unit may not operate properly if the pins of the battery terminal are bent or deformed by shock or vibrations or if they become corroded due to prolonged outdoor use If you notice bending deformation or surface corrosion contact your dealer or a Sony service representative as soon as possible to have the battery terminal replaced Periodic inspections are recommended to keep the unit working properly and to prolong its usable lifetime Contact your dealer or a Sony service representative for more information about inspections Operation Warnings When a problem occurs at power on or during operation a warning is given by one of the following Warning indicators in the status display on the LCD monitor ndicators on the viewfinder The volume of the audible warnings can be adjusted with position to suppress the sound WARNING indicators and audible warnings from the speaker and earphones the ALARM knob Set the ALARM knob to the minimum Status WARNING Warning Indicators in the Problem VDR operation Action to take display on indicator sound viewfinder the LCD monitor viewfinder screen Warning xt Continuous indication Continuous beep TALLY 1 flash s 3X 4 flashes s s AA 7 1 flash s 4 beeps s T e e e X 4 flashes s E 1 xt 5 Recording Recording stops Turn off the power
20. USER menu settings stored in the camcorder as user files can be saved to the Memory Stick You can save up to 100 user files to the Memory Stick Insert the Memory Stick into the Memory Stick slot then proceed as follows How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the desired item 1 Display the USER FILE page of the FILE menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic Menu Operations on page 129 FO1OUSER F USER USER F ID USER To set a file ID for the data to be saved Set the file ID before going to step 2 For details on setting the file ID see To set the file ID on page 147 2 Select USER FILE SAVE and press the MENU knob The USER SAVE page appears P00 USER SAVE DISPLAY Up to 20 pages from to P19 can be used to save user files to the Memory Stick Each page can hold up to five files MENU knob until the page which contains the desired file number appears and press the MENU knob POO USER SAVE 2DISPLAY 4 select the desired file number and press the MENU knob The message SAVE OK YES appears c m ESC If a file number is ALL followed by NEW FILE this means that the file is empty If data is stored in the file the file number is followed by the file name YES2NO OND
21. 2 3 pulldown in 23 98P mode 1 23 98 seconds i CCD output B O E O E O E A O E Video output signal SOS SS Tm 0 Frame 1 PM 1 29 97 seconds O Odd E Even EA Ads AE Li Frame 2 Frame 3 Li A 4 Frame 5 L After reading from the CCDs in 23 98 frames per second a pulldown conversion is carried out to the 30 frames 29 97 frames per second of the normal progressive scan mode Adjustments and Settings from Menus Saving and Loading User Setting Data Saving and Loading User Files The camcorder is equipped with a Memory Stick slot which enables you to save the settings in the USER menu as a user file onto the Memory Stick You can load these files from the Memory Stick for immediate recall of a particular setting configuration In addition to user files you can save scene files lens files and ALL files in a Memory Stick When a menu is displayed you can set up the camcorder so that inserting a Memory Stick automatically jumps to the appropriate file related menu page For details about scene files see Saving and Loading Scene Files on page 149 For details about lens files and ALL files refer to Menu List on page 107 Handling the Memory Stick The Memory Stick can be inserted to or removed from the camcorder with the power turned on or off Memory Stick usable with this camcorde
22. COUNTER CHAPTER button Timecode to 00 00 00 00 TC PRESET REGEN CLOCK switch PRESET F RUN SET R RUN switch SET COUNTER CHAPTER button U BIT PRESET REGEN CLOCK switch PRESET F RUN SET R RUN switch SET User bits data to 00 00 00 005 a Of the timecode bits for every frame recorded on the disc those bits which can be used to record useful information for the user such as scene number shooting place etc b Can only be reset when the display is set to STATUS When it is set to CHAR resetting is not possible For details see Setting the Time Data on page 61 If you press this button when thumbnails of frames with essence marks are displayed using the COUNTER CHAPTER button or when thumbnails of clip divisions are displayed using the DISPLAY EXPAND button then the display returns to the normal thumbnail display BRIGHT brightness button Sets the backlight brightness Each time you press this button the backlight brightness cycles through the following four levels H Select this to view the LCD monitor in outdoor daylight Brightness level between and L L Select this to view the LCD monitor indoors or outside at night OFF Turn the backlight off you can view video under normal lighting Select this in outdoor daylight when the LCD monitor screen is subjected to direct sunlight Status Display on the LCD Monitor The following display appears when the LCD monitor d
23. D VIDEO OUT Y PB PR connectors Q GENLOCK IN genlock signal input connector BNC type Input an SD or HD reference signal when applying a genlock to the camera or synchronizing timecode to an external source Use the GENLOCK page of the MAINTENANCE menu to carry out phase adjustment of the horizontal synchronization signal for genlock The subcarrier phase cannot be adjusted VIDEO OUT video output Y PB PR connectors BNC type Output component video signals Y PB PR for a video monitor Connect a video monitor with component video signal input connectors to check the video being shot by the camera You can also monitor VDR playback video You can select HD Y PB PR or SD Y PB PR signal output on the OUTPUT page of the OPERATION menu For details see Selecting the Output Signals on page 139 Video signals are not output if the connection destinations of these connectors are not terminated properly Rear TALLY indicator TALLY switch Battery attachment shoe WRR connector 1 Connector panel see page 23 Q TALLY back tally indicator red Lights up during recording It will not light if the TALLY switch is set to OFF This indicator also flashes to indicate warnings see page 18 in the same manner as the REC TALLY indicator in the viewfinder For details see Operation Warnings on page 165 TALLY switch Set to ON to activate the TA
24. IN OUT selector switch IN Q Audio channel display Shows the audio channel mode during recording or playback 2ch two channel mode only when the MPEG HD format is selected 4ch four channel mode Hold indicator Appears when the internal timecode generator is stopped Q Audio level indicators Indicates the audio recording or playback levels of channels 1 to 4 Lithium battery low voltage warning Appears when the voltage of the internal lithium backup battery CR2032 is low If this indication appears replace the lithium battery immediately see page 31 Remaining battery capacity indicator Indication Battery voltage BP L90A L60S Other L80S batteries BATT E MENEENN 15 5 17 0 V or more BATT E HEHHEE 15 110 15 5 V 16 0 to 17 0 V BATTE MNENENN F 14 6to 15 1 V 15 0 to 16 0 V BATT E F 13 8 to 14 6 V 14 0 to 15 0 V BATT E WEH F 12 9 to 13 8 V 13 0 to 14 0 V BATT E MN F 12 0 to 12 9 V 12 0 to 13 0 V BATT E F 10 8 to 12 0 V 11 0 to 12 0 V BATT E F 10 8 V or less 11 0 V or less Indication Battery voltage BP GL95 GL65 1L75 M100 Anton Bauer Battery System BATTE MNENENENB F 80 to 100 BATT E SE 70 BATTE MNEENEN 60 BATT E Sa 50 BATT E HEHE 40 BATT E 30 BATT E 20 BATT E 10 BATT E 0 Remaining disc capacity indic
25. Indicates the level of audio channel 1 and channel 2 The peak indication of the VDR level meter is related as follows to the audio level For example the level of the internal 1 KHz sine wave signal is 20 dB causing the six bars from the left to light Audio channel 1 level indicator L L L L a L Audio channel 2 level indicator p L b y gy 0 VDR level meter indicator 40 20 17 14 dB Remaining disc capacity Indicates the remaining recording time in minutes of the disc Examples of remaining recording time indication Indication Remaining recording time 90 More than 90 minutes 90 85 90 to 85 minutes 85 80 85 to 80 minutes 20 15 20 to 15 minutes 15 10 15 to 10 minutes 10 5 10 to 5 minutes 5 0 5 to 0 minutes No display 0 minute As shown below dual layer discs PFD50DLA allow longer recording times than those in the above table Indication Remaining recording time 250 More than 250 minutes 240 More than 240 minutes 230 More than 230 minutes D Remaining clips display Displays the remaining number of clips that can be recorded The display flashes once per second when the number of remaining clips is less than 10 Iris setting auto iris override Indicates the F value iris setting of the lens Also the auto iris override is displayed using two squares which appear in the upper and lower p
26. SEC Sets the seconds value YEAR Sets the year MONTH Sets the month DAY Sets the day 4 Turn the MENU knob to select the desired setting and press the MENU knob 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 until you have set all of the desired items 6 when you are finished making settings select OK and press the MENU knob The internal clock is set with the date and time set in steps 3 to 5 The TIME DATE page of the OPERATION menu appears again The time set in the TIME ADJUST screen is displayed Setting the Date and Time of the Internal Clock To cancel the setting Before executing step 6 select ESC and press the MENU knob All the settings so far made are discarded and the TIME DATE page appears again Preparing the Lens Mounting the Lens First power off the unit and then mount the lens using the following procedure To mount a 1 2 inch type lens carry out steps 1 to 3 For information about using the lens refer to the operating instructions for the lens Lens mount securing rubber AS K Ss 1 Push the lens locking lever up and remove the lens mount cap from the lens mount 2 Align the center pin on the lens with the center slot in the lens mount and insert the lens into the mount 3 Holding the lens in place push the lens locking lever down to lock the lens If the lens is not firmly locked it may come off while the camcorder is being used This could cause a serious acci
27. STOP ONCE The operation is not possible while MARK DOES NOT not exist REC mode the disc is being played or EXIST This appears in the essence mark recorded Stop the disc selection screen when the Disc Top The operation is not possible specified essence mark does not Disc End because the disc is at the top or exist on the disc end SUB CLIP IS INVALID The temporal relationship between Formatting The disc is being automatically SET APPROPRIATE the specified In and Out points in a formatted Wait until the format IN OUT POINTS TRIM operation see page 92 is ends not correct Reset so that the value of the Out Recording The unit is writing to the file point timecode is larger than the system Wait until writing finishes value of the In point timecode Operation Warnings xipueddy 167 xipueddy 168 Message Meaning and action to take Message Meaning and action to take DURATION OF ONE The total duration of the current ALL CLIPS ARE All clips are unlocked CLIP LIST MUST BE clip list is greater than 24 hours UNLOCKED This appears when an attempt is LESS THAN 24 HOURS This appears when the total duration of the current clip list exceeds the upper limit of 24 hours as the result of a sub clip ADD see page 88 operation or a TRIM operation see page 92 made to execute an UNLOCK ALL CLIPS operation when all clips
28. TIMECODE TC OUT AUTO GENE AUTO DF NDF DF NDF DF UBIT FIX TIME FIX Timecode output setting AUTO For recording the timecode generator value is output and for playback the value from timecode reader is output GENE The timecode generator value is output for both recording and playback DF NDF setting DF drop frame mode NDF non drop frame mode Selects the user bit contents 04 ESSENCE MARK SHOTMARK 1 SHOTMARK 2 ON OFF ON INDEX PIC POS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10SEC 0 FIND MODE R ST CLIP R ST See Recording Shot Marks on page 65 Sets the position of the index frame of a clip in seconds from the start of recording Specifies what to find when the NEXT or PREV button is pressed R ST Jump to the next or previous REC START essence mark CLIP Jump to the first frame of the next or current clip But jump to the first frame of the previous clip when the PREV button is pressed at the first frame of the current clip Menu Organization and Operation pejrejeq pue sfejdsiq nua 119 sBunjes pejreyeg pue sAejdsiq nua 2 120 MAINTENANCE menu No Page Item Settings Default USER Description File menu page 05 WHITE COLOR TEMP lt P gt Displays color 3200 Preset whi
29. Title Clip list name Date and time of creation select the desired clip list and press the SEL SET button or MENU knob This loads the selected clip list as the current clip list To display thumbnails of the read in current clip list 1 Press the THUMBNAIL button to turn the THUMBNAIL indicator on If the menu screen is displayed move the MENU switch to the OFF position and press the THUMBNAIL button If you move the MENU switch to ON while thumbnails are displayed the thumbnail display disappears and the menu appears 2 Hold down the SHIFT button and press the SEL SET button up to turn the SUB CLIP indicator on This displays thumbnails of the sub clips within the clip list Deleting a Clip List from the Disc Proceed as follows Managing Clip Lists 1 Display the CLIP menu See To display the CLIP menu on page 95 2 Select DELETE CLIP LIST This displays the clip lists To switch the information displayed for clip lists Press the SEL SET button to the right side Each press switches the information displayed for clip lists in the following order Date and time of creation Title Clip list name Date and time of creation gt Select the clip list you want to delete and press the SEL SET button or MENU knob A confirmation message appears 4 select and press the SEL SET button or MENU knob This deletes the selected clip list from th
30. 10 125 O Press the MENU knob The mark changes to a gt mark and the mark changes to a amp mark 10 end the menu operation set the MENU ON OFF switch to OFF The menu disappears and the display indicating the current status of the camcorder appears along the top and bottom of the screen Settings made in Picture Cache mode are maintained until changed You can turn Picture Cache mode on and off by assigning the Picture Cache ON OFF function to one of the assignable switches ASSIGN 1 2 3 4 and pressing the switch For details about assignable switches see Assigning Functions to ASSIGN Switches on page 141 You can change the Picture Cache mode menu settings while recording any changes that you make however do not take effect until after the recording operation is completed In Picture Cache mode the internal time code generator operating mode is always F RUN regardless of the setting of the F RUN SET R RUN switch The Interval Rec function is turned off automatically whenever you turn the Picture Cache function on Camcorder operations in Picture Cache mode The recording procedure in Picture Cache mode is basically the same as that for normal recording However note the following differences When you record in Picture Cache mode the picture you are shooting now is recorded to disc after the picture data stored in memory equal to the Picture Cache time is recorded to disc For this reason d
31. DOCUM E0001 E0002 2006 10 25 2006 19 45 2006 19 46 MORNI 2006 13 43 NIGHT 2006 10 25 NIGHT 01 DEC 2005 13 25 E0003 NEW FILE 13 JUN 2006 12 45 TOTAL If you selected DATE BY DATE Sort by date CLIP LIST 01 CLIP MENU DISP 0 LOAD CLIP LIST DATE BY DATE E0001 gt JUN 2006 MORNI JUN 2006 DOCUM 3 JUN 2006 DOCUM JUN 2006 2006 18 MAY 2006 01 DEC 2005 NEW FILE TOTAL DOCUM F NIGHT NIGHT E0003 13 JUN 2006 12 45 Some characters in clip names clip list names and titles may be converted to LT characters for display in the thumbnail screen and CLIP menu For details see page 72 Using the PDZ 1 Proxy Browsing Software When a computer with the PDZ 1 Proxy Browsing Software installed is connected to this unit you can transfer the proxy AV data and metadata files recorded on a disc to the computer On the computer side PDZ 1 enables you to browse the proxy AV data add or modify metadata titles comments essence marks etc or create a clip list The modified metadata and the created clip list can then be written back to the disc loaded in this unit System requirements to use the PDZ 1 The following are required to use the PDZ 1 Computer PC with Intel Pentium III CPU at least 1 GHz installed memory at least 512 MB Operating system Microsoft Windows 2000 Service Pack 4 or higher or Microsoft Windows XP Professional Service Pack 1 or h
32. During high speed playback or forward jump to clips 49 During reverse high speed playback or reverse jump to clips Recording format Indicates the current recording format Q Timecode Indicates the elapsed recording playback time timecode user bits or other information selected by the DISPLAY switch see page 28 Zoom position Indicates the zoom position of the zoom lens in the range from 0 to 99 Q Focus Indicates the focusing distance corresponding to the focus ring when an auto focus lens is mounted and the focus adjustment mode is set to manual The displayed resolution is as shown below 10 mor less including the macro area 0 1 m e 10mto 100m 1 m 100 m to 200 m 10 m e 200 m to infinite distance 50 m Q Power source voltage battery remaining capacity When the unit is powered from a battery pack or AC adaptor attached to the battery attachment shoe indicates the remaining capacity of the power source voltage When the unit is powered from an external battery a battery connected to the DC IN connector indicates the power source voltage When the DISP BATT REMAIN item is set to INT on the VF DISP 1 page of the OPERATION menu the battery voltage is not indicated However when the Anton Bauer intelligent battery system or the BP GL95 GL65 Battery Pack is used the remaining battery capacity is automatically detected and indicated in steps of 10 Until the remaining battery capacity is reduc
33. HD or SD 60i9 sop D 59 941 30 frames 50i 25 50i 25 frames 23 98P 59 94i 9 24 frames More precisely 59 941 b More precisely 29 97P c External synchronization is not available for 23 97PsF This operation synchronizes the internal timecode generator with the external timecode After about 10 seconds you can disconnect the external timecode without losing the synchronization However there will be noise on the recorded image if you connect or disconnect the timecode signal during recording When the frame frequency of this unit is 23 98 a discrepancy of 1 frame with the externally locked timecode may arise When you finish the above procedure the internal timecode is immediately synchronized with the external timecode and the time counter display will show the value of the external timecode However wait for a few seconds until the sync generator stabilizes before recording If this unit cannot be genlocked to the reference video signal the internal timecode is not correctly synchronized with the external timecode Until this unit is genlocked to the input reference video signal the output video signal from this unit may break up When the internal timecode generator is set to F RUN mode the precision of the synchronization may be reduced if you turn the POWER switch off and on or keep the camcorder turned off for a long time xXoeqKe d pue e About user bi
34. I SPINDLE rst I LASER rst LOADING rst SEEK rst DISC STATUS USER ID TITLE REMAIN REWRITE SALVAGE FILE SYSTEM CLIP STATUS CLIP NO TITLE RECORD DEVICE SERIAL DATE TIME ROM VERSION AT PACKAGE LOW LIGHT LOW LIGHT LOW LIGHT LEVEL BATTERY AUTO IRIS IRIS OVER RIDE IRIS SPEED CLIP HIGH LIGHT IRIS LEVEL IRIS APL RATIO SW STATUS GAMMA MATRIX KNEE WHITE CLIP DETAIL APERTURE FLARE BLACK FLARE MASTER BLACK BLACK B BLACK MASTER FLARE FLARE G FLARE m B FLARE FLARE GAMMA GAMMA STEP GAMMA MASTER GAMMA GAMMA G GAMMA B GAMMA GAMMA SELECT KNEE FIX CINE DETAIL Continued DETAIL CRISPENING LEVEL DEPEND F DETAIL FREQUENCY APERTURE APERTURE LEVEL KNEE APT LEVEL DETAIL LIMIT Menu Organization and Operation o 9g o io o i o T o wn amp Q o 105 sBunjes pue sAejdsiq nua 2 106 Menu select
35. LENS connector 12 Lens file selecting 142 Lens locking lever 13 Lens mount 12 Lens mount cap 12 Lens mount securing rubber 12 LIGHT connector 22 LIGHT switch 14 Line input audio equipment connecting 44 Lithium battery attaching and replacing 30 service life 30 warning indicator 17 Lithium battery compartment 20 Lock ring 27 LOW KEY SAT page 116 Low Noise mode 141 M MACRO switch 25 Maintenance cleaning the viewfinder 164 MAINTENANCE menu 117 Marker display setting 136 MARKER page 111 MATRIX 2 page 116 MATRIX page 115 Memory Stick handling 145 inserting 145 overview 174 protecting saved data 146 removing 145 types 174 Memory Stick slot 23 145 Menu adjustments and settings 139 basic operations 129 DIAGNOSIS menu 125 displaying 129 ending 129 FILE menu 123 MAINTENANCE menu 117 organization 98 PAINT menu 113 USER menu 130 MENU knob 13 Menulist 107 MENU switch 15 MIC IN connector 22 Microphone attaching 41 MONITOR knob 14 MONITOR OUT CHARACTER switch 21 MONITOR switches 20 MPEG License 173 N ND filter selecting 12 NEXT button 19 Non drop frame mode indicator 17 OFFSET WHITE page 110 OPERATION menu 108 Operation warnings 165 Operation alarm message display area 29 Operation alarm messages 166 Optional components and accessories 180 OUTPUT page 110 Output signals selecting 139 OUTPUT DCC switch 15 Overview 8 P PAINT menu 113 PAINT page 113 PDZ 1 97 PE
36. MOVE 002 034 TC 00 00 43 24 og TC 60 00 00 00 pare Lo TC 00 06 03 03 13 JUN 2006 13 36 TOTAL Cursor showing position to which selected sub clip will be moved Use the SEL SET button or MENU knob to move the I bar cursor to the position to which you want to move and press the button or knob This changes the sequence of sub clips CLIP LIST E0002 007 034 A 00 00 00 00 TE 00 00 21 00 04 08 00 C 00 04 13 14 s Lo a E TC O00 06 03 03 TC 00 08 25 Ul TC 00 08 48 13 JUN 2006 13 36 TOTAL To continue moving sub clips If you hold the SHIFT down when you press the SEL SET button or MENU knob you return to step 3 instead of the CLIP menu after a clip is moved This allows you to continue moving sub clips Save the contents of the current clip list to disc See Saving the Current Clip List to Disc on page 93 Adjusting Sub Clip In Out Points Trimming Proceed as follows 1 2 Carry out step 1 of the procedure in Reordering Sub Clips on page 92 to display the CLIP menu Use the SEL SET button or MENU knob to select TRIM and press the button or knob This switches to the screen for selecting a thumbnail for trimming Use the SEL SET button four way arrow key or MENU knob to select the desired sub clip and press the button or knob The first frame of the selected sub clip is displayed In this state you can play back or
37. Press this button to carry out a thumbnail search or create a clip list When pressed the whole screen display changes to a thumbnail display Press once more to return to the whole screen display For a thumbnail search using essence marks hold down the SHIFT button and press this button Q SUB CLIP indicator This lights when using a clip list for playback SEL SET select set button four way arrow key Sets the timecode and user bits Push the button towards left or right so that the digit you want to change flashes Pushing the button upward increases the value of the flashing digit and pushing it downward decreases the value Hold down the SHIFT button and press upward in the direction of the SUB CLIP legend to display the clip lists when no clip list is loaded into the current clip list When a clip list is loaded that clip list can be played back Hold down the SHIFT button and press upward once more Location and Function of Parts to exit the display of the clip lists or to exit the clip list playback state Hold down the SHIFT button and press downward in the direction of the CLIP MENU legend to display the CLIP menu Hold down the SHIFT button and press downward once more to exit the CLIP menu When thumbnails index frames of clips are displayed on the LCD monitor you can use this button to select a thumbnail Push the button in four directions to move the cursor up down left and right After
38. RATE HD I AUDIO CH HD I ASPECT RATIO DV L COUNTRY SPECIAL EFFECTS CLIP CONT REC INTERVAL REC INTERVAL TIME NUMBER OF FRAME NUMBER OF TIMES PRE LIGHTING PICTURE CACHE CACHE REC TIME ASSIGNABLE ASSIGN SW 1 ASSIGN SW 2 ASSIGN SW 3 ASSIGN SW 4 DISC DELETE LAST CLIP DELETE ALL CLIPS QUICK FORMAT I OUTPUT COMPONENT OUT I HD SD PLAY BACK L i LINK MODE VF SETTING ZEBRA ZEBRA SELECT ZEBRA1 DET LEVEL PEAKING VOL LINK DETAIL LEVEL V DETAIL LEVEL DETAIL FREQ VF ASPECT Continued Continued o 9g o io o i o T o wn amp 2 Q o Menu Organization and Operation 99 sBumes pejreyeq pue sAejdsiq nuaw 1 2 100 2nd level 3rd level MARKER MARKER CENTER SAFETY ZONE SAFETY AREA ASPECT ASPECT SELECT SKIN DETAIL RESET SKIN DETAIL SKIN DETAIL LVL SKIN DETECT SKIN AREA IND SKIN DTL SAT SKIN DTL HUE SKIN DTL WIDTH ALL PRESET Menu selection 1st level I USER MENU CUSTOMIZE c ALL OPERATION Continued FORMAT SP
39. SHOT ID page 112 Shot ID setting 137 SHOT MARK 65 Shoulder pad 22 adjusting the position 39 Shoulder strap fitting 39 removing 39 Shoulder strap fitting 22 SHUTTER indicator 27 Shutter mode 57 Shutter speed 57 indicator 29 SHUTTER switch 13 Side control panel 19 protection cover 18 SKIN DETAIL page 115 Skin detail correcting 64 SLS 57 58 SPECIAL EFFECTS page 108 Specifications general 176 optical disc drive section 177 pin assignment of the connectors 178 related products 178 stereo microphone 177 supplied accessories 176 video camera section 176 Starting a Shoot with a Few Seconds 68 Status display 138 STOP button 19 Stopper 27 SUB CLIP indicator 20 Sub clips 87 editing 92 Superimposed text adding 21 SW STATUS page 114 T TALLY light 23 27 Tally light 28 TALLY switch 23 TALLY switch viewfinder 28 TC connector 24 TCG 18 TCR 18 Testing camera 162 preparating 162 VDR 163 THUMBNAIL button 20 Thumbnail image Changing index frame 78 Setting at recording time 65 Switching the information 77 94 THUMBNAIL indicator 20 Thumbnail search 76 TIME DATE page 113 Time counter display 18 Timecode indicator 28 making the time code consecutive 61 saving the actual time 61 setting 61 TIMECODE page 119 TLCS 109 142 TOP menu 106 Tripod mounting 40 removing 40 Troubleshooting 169 U UBG 18 UBR 18 UHF synthesizer tuner attaching WRR 855 43 WRR 861 862 43 MID Data 171 MID SET page 113 ser bits sett
40. Setting the PRESET REGEN CLOCK switch to CLOCK saves the actual time in the timecode When it is necessary to set the actual time use the TIME DATE page of the OPERATION menu For details see Setting the Date and Time of the Internal Clock on page 34 When the frame frequency of this unit is 23 98P the recorded timecode does not coincide with real time Recording Basic Operations xXoeqKe d pue e 61 yoeqhe q pue g 62 To set the user bits By setting the user bits up to 8 hexadecimal digits you can record user information such as the date time or scene number on the timecode track 8 o O0 a efe a8 880 898 5 9 SUB CLIP CLIP MENU 6 PRESET 4 F RUN REGEN 1 SET CLOCK R RUN Kr 1 Press the DISPLAY EXPAND button of the LCD monitor so that the status display appears 2 Press the COUNTER CHAPTER button on the LCD monitor to display UBG in the time counter display section Set the PRESET REGEN CLOCK switch to PRESET 4 Set the F RUN SET R RUN switch to SET The first leftmost digit flashes 5 Use the SEL SET button four way arrow key to set the timecode value including the last rightmost digit of timecode Hexadecimal digits A to F are displayed as
41. YPbPr For both recording and playback HD SD 16 9 4 3 16 9 Selects the aspect ratio for down PLAYBACK converted output to an SD monitor of playback of material recorded in HD format You can select 16 9 squeeze or 4 3 crop i LINK MODE AV C FAM AV C Selects the function of the i LINK connector Menu Organization and Operation OPERATION menu No Page Item Settings Default USER Description File menu page 11 VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT VFDISP ON OFF ON Selects whether or not the VF A DISP display signal is mixed to the output signal from the VIDEO OUT connector VIDEO OUT MENU Selects whether or not the menu display signal is mixed to the output signal from the VIDEO OUT connector VIDEO OUT TC Selects whether or not the timecode is mixed to the output signal from the VIDEO OUT connector VIDEO OUT ZEBRA OFF Selects whether or not the zebra mark display signal is mixed to the output signal from the VIDEO OUT connector When HD SD PLAYBACK on the OUTPUT page is set to 4 3 the zebra display does not appear in the output from the VIDEO OUT connector VIDEO OUT Selects whether or not the marker MARKER signal is mixed to the output signal from the VIDEO OUT connector When HD gt SD PLAYBACK on the OUTPUT page is set to 4 3 the marker does not appear in the output from the VI
42. dark section even more than CINE3 Contrasts in darker sections are weaker than STD and contrasts in brighter sections are stronger When you select CINE to CINEA the knee point is fixed at a preset value and cannot be adjusted even if you set KNEE on the SW STATUS page of the PAINT menu to ON DCC is also disabled Making Low Noise Settings Low noise mode allows you to obtain clear video with little noise under low light conditions 1 Select LOW NOISE MODE on the CAM CONFIG page of the MAINTENANCE menu and then press the MENU knob You can select gamma curves from among five preset patterns for times when you want to achieve film like gradations and color reproduction and other effects For details on menu operations see Basic Menu Operations on page 129 1 Display the GAMMA SELECT page of the PAINT menu and then press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic Menu Operations on page 129 Select the desired item and press the MENU knob The following settings are available Item STD Description Standard setting factory default setting CINE1 This smoothes the contrasts in darker sections and accentuates gradation changes in brighter sections for a calm and quiet effect CINE2 This gives almost the same results as CINE1 Select this when you want to obtain 100 video signals for editing or other purposes Select the
43. e g 25 23 98P Foreword 7 MSIAJGAQ 1 2 Overview Chapter Product Configurations The PDW F335 Professional Disc Camcorder series includes the models PDW F335L and PDW F335K with following figure different product configurations The components and VCL 719BXS Auto Focus Lens PDW F335L Stereo Microphone Test chart for flange focal length adjustment DXF 20W Viewfinder VCT U14 Tripod Adaptor Shoulder strap Lens mount cap PFD23A Professional Disc PDZ 1 Proxy Browsing Software Operating Instructions Japanese version English version and CD ROM manual Warranty Booklet Use a tripod adaptor with a suffix of or later on the model name For more details see Mounting on a Tripod page 40 8 Product Configurations accessories supplied of these models are as shown in the Features The PDW F335 is an XDCAM D HD 2 camcorder integrating an HD video camera using three HD CCDs of the 2 inch type with a total effective pixel count of 1 56 million and a Professional Disc D drive This unit provides a range of useful shooting functions for video production and allows shooting and recording in both progressive scan and interlace scan modes with an HD image having 1080 effective scan lines Since it also supports SD 3 DVCAM recording it can be used through a transition from SD to HD production The use of Profession
44. error and consult your Sony dealer MEM Full sex 2 e e e e 2 2 Shockproof Recording Protect the unit i continuous but may from shocks and overflow be substandard vibration ILL REC 2 2 2 Input sync Recording Turn off the power UC error continuous but may and contact your be substandard Sony dealer This indication may be given momentarily when a GENLOCK signal is connected or disconnected but this does not LM indicate a problem Disc Error 2 e e e e 2 ex 2 A disc defect Recording If defects are gt was detected continues avoiding detected a the defect but may repeatedly 3 be substandard exchange the disc x HUMID 3 2 e e e e 2 x 2 Condensation Recording playback Stop recording on the optical continues but stops playback turn off 9 pickup when an error the power then turn occurs on the drive iton again and wait until the HUMID indicator disappears Before Full 2 sy 2 oy 2 Disc almost Operation Be prepared to n ib full continues change the disc Near y 2 oy x only Nine or fewer Operation Be prepared to when clips remain continues change the disc recording until the upper the 300th limit of 300 in 4 recorded clips ele is reached Operation Warnings 1 65 xipueddy 166 Status WARNING Warning
45. expected depending on the settings relating to the viewfinder display function In this case set the desired items on the VF DISP 1 and VF DISP 2 pages of the OPERATION menu For details see Selecting the Display Items on page 135 Testing the iris and zoom functions 1 2 Set the zoom to automatic zoom mode and check that the power zoom operates correctly Set the zoom to manual zoom mode and check the zoom functions manually Turn the manual zoom lever from the telephoto position to the wide angle position to check that the picture changes depending on the lever position Set the IRIS switch on the lens to A auto and point the camera at objects of different brightness Check that the automatic iris adjustment operates correctly Set the IRIS switch on the lens to M manual and check that turning the iris ring manually adjusts the iris correctly Set the IRIS switch on the lens back to A auto and check the following points when the GAIN switch is moved from L to M to H For objects of the same brightness the iris is adjusted to correspond to the change in setting The gain indicator on the viewfinder screen changes to correspond to the change in setting When a lens with extender is mounted set the lens extender lever to the 2x position and check that auto iris functions correctly Testing the VDR Continuously carry out the procedures from 1 Testing the recording and playback functions to
46. press the MENU knob leaving pointing to NO Saving and Loading Scene Files You can select the file information items to be displayed on each page of SCENE STORE and SCENE RECALL For details see To select the file information items to be displayed on page 148 To save scene files stored in the camcorder memory to the Memory Stick The five scene files stored in the camcorder memory can be saved to the Memory Stick all in a single operation How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the desired item 1 Display the SCENE FILE page of the FILE menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic Menu Operations on page 129 2 Select SCENE STORE and press the MENU knob Select the desired SCENE STORE page and press the MENU knob PO1 SCENE STORE DISPLavY MODE select 5FILE SAVE 4 MEMI 5 and press the MENU knob The message STORE OK YES NO appears 5 To carry out the save select YES and press the MENU knob To cancel press the MENU knob leaving pointing to NO When the save is completed the message COMPLETE appears If files have been saved in the page selected in step those files are replaced with files loaded from the camcorder memory For example files from 001 to 005 are replaced by the above procedure To set the file ID Before the data is saved as a scene file it is useful to set a file I
47. suonejedejg z sajdeup 36 Flange focal length adjustment button ZOOM switch Auto focus indicator 1 Open the iris position the supplied flange focal length adjustment chart approximately 3 meters away from the camera and arrange the lighting to obtain a satisfactory video output Set the ZOOM switch to SERVO power zoom mode Hold down the flange focal length adjustment button for 3 seconds The auto focus indicator flashes orange and the flange focal length adjustment starts During adjustment The auto focus indicator flashes alternately orange and green The message AUTO FB EXECUTING appears on the viewfinder screen If the adjustment completes correctly The auto focus indicator goes off and the message on the viewfinder screen changes to FB If the flange focal length adjustment does not complete correctly The auto focus indicator lights red Check the subject and lighting conditions and repeat the adjustment When using a non auto focus lens Read the instruction manual for the lens in use as well Preparing the Lens Set the iris to manual Open the iris position the supplied flange focal length adjustment chart approximately 3 meters away from the camera and arrange the lighting to obtain a satisfactory video output Loosen the fixing screws on the F f or F B ring flange focal length adjustment ring Use manual o
48. 129 2 Select the desired setting item and press the MENU knob You can set the following items on the MARKER page Item Description MARKER If you want no markers to be displayed set to OFF CENTER To display the center marker set to ON SAFETY ZONE To display the safety zone set to ON SAFETY AREA Selects the safety zone area ASPECT To display the aspect marker set to ON ASPECT SELECT Selects the type of the aspect marker 14 9 13 9 4 3 Turm the MENU knob to select the desired setting and press the MENU knob 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set all of the desired items Setting the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen and the LCD Monitor Setting the Viewfinder Screen Display You can make settings for viewfinder screen display functions How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the desired item 1 Display the VF SETTING page of the USER OPERATION menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic Menu Operations on page 129 2 Select the desired setting item and press the MENU knob You can set the following items on the VF SETTING page Item Description ZEBRA Turns the zebra display ON or OFF 1 ZEBRA SELECT Selects ZEBRA 1 ZEBRA 2 or BOTH ZEBRA 1 DET LVL Adjusts the level of the ZEBRA 1 display 30 to 107 Factory default setting is 70
49. 1es Buipeo7 pue Bunes 9 Jaydeyo 151 Humes sn Buipeo pue 9 1e1deu 152 POOOSCENE RECALL DISPLAY MODE 2 Turn the MENU knob until the page which contains the desired file appears 3 Press the MENU knob then turn the MENU knob to move to the desired file number and press the MENU knob The message RECALL OK YES NO appears To carry out the recall select YES and press the MENU knob To cancel press the MENU knob leaving pointing to NO When the loading is completed the message COMPLETE appears The camcorder is set up according to the loaded scene file If no file is present with a particular file number this is shown as FILE To load scene files from the Memory Stick into the camcorder memory You can load up to five scene files stored in the Memory Stick into the camcorder memory all in a single operation How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the desired item 1 Display the SCENE FILE page of the FILE menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic Menu Operations on page 129 2 select SCENE RECALL and press the MENU knob The SCENE RECALL page appears Tum the MENU knob until the SCENE RECALL page which contains the desired scene files appears and press the MENU knob Saving and Loading Scene Files 4 Press the MENU knob Then select 5
50. 2 XLR type 3 pin female 60 dBu 50 dB 40 dBu 4 dBu 0 dBu 0 775 Vrms MIC IN XLR type 5 pin female 50 dBu GENLOCKIN BNC type 1 0 Vp p 75 unbalanced TC IN BNC type 0 5 V to 18 Vp p 10 KQ This can be switched to serve as TC OUT Signal outputs AUDIO OUT CH 1 CH 2 Phono jack 10 dBu 47 VIDEO OUT composite BNC type 1 0 Vp p 75 unbalanced VIDEO OUT component BNC type 1 set Y 1 0 Vp p 75 Q R Y B Y 0 7 Vp p 75 TC OUT BNC type 1 0 Vp p 75 O Specifications xipueddy 177 This can be switched to serve as TC IN EARPHONE mini jack 8 Q to 15 dBs variable Others DC IN XLR type 4 pin male 11 to 17 V DC DC OUT 4 pin 11 to 17 V DC maximum rated current 0 2 A LENS 12 pin REMOTE 8 pin LIGHT D 2 pin i LINK 6 pin complies with IEEE 1394 1 The accessory fitting shoe which you can use to attach a video light to this unit is of the 1 4 inch tapped hole type If you want to replace this with a slide type shoe contact your Sony dealer Pin assignment of the connectors DC IN connector 4 pin male 10 8 6O Pin number Signal Standard 1 EXT DC IN G GND 2 3 4 EXT DC IN X 411 to 17 V DC AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 connector 3 pin female gt 5 a Pin number Signal Standard 1 AUDIO IN G GND 2 AUDIO IN X 60 dBu 50 dBu 3 AUDIO IN Y 40 dBu When ZI is equal to
51. 4P to 50P without limitation Selects whether the SHUTTER indication is shown as a time indication or as an angle indication Turns on and off the function which changes the reference value for automatic iris adjustment Turns on and off the function which enables clear low noise video under low light conditions Menu Organization and Operation MAINTENANCE menu No 07 Page BATTERY 1 Item Info BEFORE END Settings 5 10 15 95 100 Default 5 Info END 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 Sony BEFORE END 11 5 to 17 0V in 0 1 V steps 11 5V Sony END 11 0 to 11 5V in 0 1 V steps 11 0V Other BEFORE END 11 5 to 17 0V in 0 1 V steps 11 8V Other END 11 0 to 14 0V in 0 1 V steps 11 0V DC IN BEFORE END 11 5 to 17 0V in 0 1 V steps 11 8V DC IN END 11 0 to 14 0V in 0 1 V steps 11 0V DETECTED BATTERY Info Sony Other DC IN display only USER menu page Description Used when a BP GL95 GL65 Battery Pack is used Sets the remaining power value of the battery at which the BEFORE END warning should be issued Used when a BP GL95 GL65 Battery Pack is used Sets the remaining power value of the battery at which the END warning should be issued 2 Used when a BP L60S L80S Battery Pack is used Sets the voltage level of the battery at which the
52. Appendix Important Notes on Operation 160 Table of Contents Phenomena Specific to CCD Image Sensors aaNe 161 Condensation a ao s 161 Maintenance 162 Testing the Camcorder Before Shooting 162 RCM MT EM 164 Note About the Battery Terminal 164 Operation Warnings 165 Troubleshooting 169 Using UMID Data 171 MPEG 4 License 173 About ELINK 173 About a Memory Stick 174 Specifications eiie 176 Chart of Optional Components and Accessorles 180 GIOSSOlY ETIN 181 i Cer E 184 Foreword Before Use After purchasing this unit before operating itis necessary to set the region of use and the frame frequency Unless these settings are made the unit will not operate For details of these settings see Setting the Area of Use and the Frame Frequency on page 32 Frame Frequency Indications for Interlaced Signals In the menus of this unit the frame frequency of an interlaced signal is shown as 601 or 501 with a capital letter but in this manual these are shown as 601 and 501 with a lower case letter For progressive signals both menus and manual use a capital letter
53. BEFORE END warning should be issued Used when a BP L60S L80S Battery Pack is used Sets the voltage level of the battery at which the END warning should be issued 2 Used when a battery pack other than a BP GL95 GL65 L60S L80S is used Sets the voltage level of the battery at which the BEFORE END warning should be issued Used when a battery pack other than a BP GL95 GL65 L60S L80S is used Sets the voltage level of the battery at which the END warning should be issued Used when an external power source is connected to the DC IN connector Sets the voltage level of the connected external power source at which the BEFORE END warning should be issued Used when an external power Source is connected to the DC IN connector Sets the voltage level of the connected external power source at which the END warning should be issued File Displays the type of automatically detected battery Menu Organization and Operation pue sfejdsiq nua 121 sBunjes pue sAejdsiq nua 2 122 MAINTENANCE menu No 08 Page BATTERY 2 Item TYPE DETECTION Settings AUTO OTHER Default AUTO SEGMENT NO 7 SEGMENT NO 6 SEGMENT NO 5 SEGMENT NO 4 SEGMENT NO 3 SEGMENT NO2 SEGMENT NO 1 11 0 to 17 0V in 0 1 V steps 17 0V 16 0V 15 0V 14 0V
54. Checking the Last Two Seconds of the Recording Recording Review 76 Checking the Recording on a Color Video cott 76 Thumbnail Search 76 Searching Using Thumbnails 76 Switching the Information Displayed in the Thumbnail Screen 77 Changing the Thumbnail Image Index Frame of a UT o 78 Cuing Up a Frame by Searching for an Essence Mark edet 79 Searching Using the Chapter Function 79 Searching Using the Expand Function 80 Clip List PlayDack 80 Locking Write Protecting Clips 81 Deleting 83 Chapter 4 Scene Selection ob dti iir 85 Creating Clip Lists 88 Including Sub Clips in the Current Clip List M 88 Adding Sub Clips Using the Expand Function E 90 Adding Sub Clips Using the Chapter Function a 91 Editing Clip Lists 92 Reordering Sub Clips 92 Adjusting Sub Clip In Out Points Trimming 92 Deleting Sub Clips sss 93 Saving the Current Clip List to Disc 93 Setting the Start Timecode for the Current Clip JE
55. For any service or guarantee matters please refer to the addresses given in separate service or guarantee documents 3 4 Table of Contents Foreword iiic ciekic nie ERG ra Fus Eu EVER 7 Before 056 7 Frame Frequency Indications for Interlaced 7 Chapter 1 Overview Product Configurations 8 FO AtUROS ec S 9 Camera Features eae ale 9 Features of the Optical Disc Drive VDR 9 Input Output Features esse 11 11 Location and Function of Parts 12 PRONG i 12 Right Side cocus ERR UN 14 Status Display on the LCD Monitor 16 Left Side and Upper Section 21 Re aise adicit iene ak aM er p 23 VCL 719BXS Auto Focus Lens Supplied with the PDW F335K 25 DXF 20W 27 Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen 28 Chapter 2 Preparations Attaching and Replacing the Lithium Battery amenan anunn 30 Preparing a Power Supply 31 Using a Battery Pack 5 eoe ei 31 Using an AC 31 Setting the Area of Use and the Frame FrequeriCy Een nud adus 32 Using the Unit for the First Time 32 Setting the Frame Frequency
56. IN switch for the channel on which you want to record the audio from this microphone to FRONT for CH 1 CH 2 or F for CH 3 CH 4 2 Attach the CAC 12 Microphone Holder Screws removed in step 1 Preparing the Audio Input System 41 suonejedejg Z 3 Open the CAC 12 and remove the microphone adaptor When attaching an ECM 673 674 678 use the microphone adaptor supplied with the ECM 673 674 678 suonejedejg 2 sajdeup 42 Microphone adaptor 4 Place an external microphone electret condenser microphone such as the ECM 673 674 678 in the CAC 12 ECM 673 674 678 or Tighten the screw similar microphone D Connect the microphone cable to the AUDIO IN CH 1 or CH 2 connector 6 Set the switches as follows Set the AUDIO IN input selection switch as indicated below depending on the type of microphone used When using a microphone with an internal power supply set it to MIC center When using a microphone with an external power supply set it to MIC 48 ON right Set the AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4 switch for the channel to which the microphone is connected to REAR for CH 1 CH 2 or R for CH 3 CH 4 Preparing the Audio Input System Monaural microphone AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 switches to AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 connector T Switch the input level to match the sensitivity of the microphone used Switch the input level by changing t
57. PEAKING For viewfinder image adjustments VOL LINK made with the PEAKING control switches between linkage ON and no linkage OFF of peaking adjustment and detail level adjustment H DETAIL LEVEL Adjusts the H detail of the viewfinder image V DETAIL LEVEL Adjusts the V detail of the viewfinder image DETAIL FREQ Turns the VF detail function on or off and adjusts the frequency NORM HIGH VF ASPECT Selects the viewfinder aspect ratio AUTO 4 3 2 1 When you use the viewfinder which is not equipped with a ZEBRA switch turns the display on or off using this item When you use the viewfinder with a ZEBRA switch the switch operation and the operation of this menu are both effective the most recent operation prevails 2 When the VF ASPECT item is set to AUTO this is linked to the setting of the ASPECT RATIO DV item on the FORMAT page Turn the MENU knob to select the desired setting and press the MENU knob 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set all of the desired items Recording Shot Data Superimposed on the Color Bars You can select which shot data is recorded superimposed on the color bars You can also select which of the shot IDs 1 to 4 set on the SHOT ID page is recorded superimposed on the picture How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the desired item 1 Display the SHOT DISP page of the OPERATION menu an
58. SAW PETE mmmmm 5 To carry out the save select YES and press the MENU knob To cancel press the MENU knob leaving pointing to NO The access indicator lights When the saving is Stick is set to the enable position write protect Error message Cause Action NO MEMORY No Memory Stick Insert or reinsert STICK flashing is inserted the Memory Stick MEMORY STICK The LOCK switch Set the LOCK LOCKED on the Memory switch to the write position MEMORY STICK Circuit or Memory Recheck and ERROR flashing Stick fault consult your Sony dealer To set the file ID Before data is saved to a Memory Stick it is useful to set a file ID for the Memory Stick to identify it When data is saved to a Memory Stick the file ID is saved to the Memory Stick together with the data Set the file ID before saving data in the Memory Stick Otherwise the file ID is not saved with the other data How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the desired item completed the message COMPLETE appears and the access indicator goes off If no Memory Stick has been inserted the message MEMORY STICK will appear Insert a Memory Stick and carry out the operation once again If you select a file number where data has already been saved The message OVERWRITE OK YES NO appears
59. SCENE FILE 1 5 STANDARD SCENE RECALL SCENE STORE FID MAINTENANCE AUDIO 1 AU REF LEVEL AU AGC SPEC I AU LIMITER MODE REAR MIC REF I FRONT MIC SELECT AU CH12 MODE AU CH34 AGC MODE AU SG 1KHz m AUDIO 2 T AU OUT LIMITER HEADPHONE OUT i LINK AUDIO OUT MIC CH1 LEVEL MIC CH2 LEVEL REAR1 WRR LEVEL REAR2 WRR LEVEL TIMECODE TC OUT DF NDF UBIT ESSENCE MARK SHOTMARK 1 SHOTMARK 2 INDEX PIC POS FIND MODE WHITE SETTING COLOR TEMP lt P gt TEMP BAL lt P gt WHITE SWITCH lt B gt ATW SPEED SHOCKLESS WHITE AWB FIXED AREA WHT FILTER INH F CAM CONFIG COLOR BAR SEL REC TALLY SLOW MOTION SHT DISP MODE IRIS OVER RIDE LOW NOISE MODE o 9g o io o i o T o wn amp a o BATTERY 1 Info BEFORE END Info END Sony BEFORE END Sony END I Other BEFORE END Other END DC IN BEFORE END DC IN END Continued Continued DETECTED BATTERY Menu Organization and Operation 1 03 sBumes pejreyeq pu
60. Select the desired ASSIGN switch ASSIGN SW 1 to lt 4 gt and press the MENU knob The corresponding ASSIGN SW 1 to 4 SEL window appears You can assign one of the following functions to the ASSIGN switch Function Description OFF Assign no function MARKER Turn the display of all markers on or off 9 RETAKE Delete the last recorded clip This function is disabled when the Clip Continuous Rec function is on ATW Turn ATW on or off LENS RET Use the recording review function REC SWITCH Start stop recording TURBO SWITCH Use the gain value set for GAIN TURBO see page 139 FREEZE MIX Output the freeze image and camera input alternately to allow frame alignment automatic switching SHOT MARK1 Use the shot mark1 function SHOT MARK2 Use the shot mark2 function EZ MODE D Turn EZ mode on or off EZ FOCUS D Turn the EZ focus function on or off SKIN DETAIL ON OFF P Turn the skin detail adjustment function on or off SPOT LIGHT P Use auto iris spotlight mode 9 BACK LIGHT P Use auto iris backlight mode TLCS P Enter or exit TLCS mode PICTURE CACHE Turn the Picture Cache function on or off AWB Execute the auto white balance function Adjustments and Settings from Menus Function Description SHUTTER SW Turn the shutter on or off SHUTTER MODE Execute shutter mode switching and shutter speed switchin
61. TIME ZONE 00 to xx 00 22 RESET ALL PRESET EXEC EXEC 11 Resets all settings at the USER level PAINT menu PAINT menu No Page Item Settings Default USER Description File menu page 01 PAINT A IRIS 1 0 0 5 0 01 0 0 5 1 0 DETAIL LEVEL 0 Detail level adjustment A Sc St MASTER BLACK Master black level adjustment GAMMA SELECT STD STD See Selecting Gamma Tables on CINE1 page 141 CINE2 CINEA MASTER GAMMA 99 to 99 0 Sets master gamma correction curve BLACK GAMMA Black gamma correction PRESET MTX SEL STD HISAT STD Matrix selection FL CINE Menu Organization and Operation pue sfejdsiq nua 113 PAINT menu No Page Item Settings Default USER Description File menu page 02 SW STATUS GAMMA ON OFF ON Turns the gamma correction on or A Sc St off MATRIX Turns the linear matrix correction on or off KNEE Turns the knee correction on or off WHITE CLIP Turns the white clipping correction on or off DETAIL Turns the detail signal on or off 03 WHITE COLOR TEMP lt A gt Display color 3200 Sets the color temperature of A temperature WHITE A converted from R B Gain C TEMP BAL lt A gt 99 to 99 O Adjusts the value more precisely when the color temperature a
62. a Sony service representative for more information about exchange parts To adjust contrast and brightness Carry out these adjustments with the color bars displayed 1 Set the OUTPUT DCC switch to the BARS position The color bars appear on the viewfinder screen 2 Watching the color bars turn the CONTRAST and BRIGHT controls to adjust the contrast and brightness Return the OUTPUT DCC switch to its original position To adjust the outline emphasis You can rotate the PEAKING control to adjust the peaking H detail and V detail of the image in the viewfinder These adjustments strengthen the outlines of the image in the viewfinder making it easier to focus the camera Menu settings allow you to adjust peaking only with the PEAKING control and to adjust H detail and V detail separately For details see Setting the Viewfinder Screen Display on page 136 Attaching a 5 inch Electronic Viewfinder You can attach an optional DXF 51 5 inch Electronic Viewfinder To attach it an Accessory Shoe Kit service part number A 8274 968 B is required For details contact your Sony dealer Remove the cover of the grip and attach the shoe and stopper screw of the Accessory Shoe Kit Adjusting the Viewfinder Guide plate VF Cable Fixing ring Shoe Stopper screw a Supplied with the Accessory Shoe Kit Using the Shoulder Strap 1 Fitone of the clips to a shoulder strap fitting Pu
63. age leading to deteriorating playback conditions Refer to the Maintenance Manual for an approximate guide to when it is time to replace optical heads To prevent playback conditions from deteriorating Pay attention to the following points when handling discs Do not open disc cartridges and touch discs directly with your hands Do not store for long periods in locations which are dusty or exposed to air circulated by fans Do not store for long periods under high temperatures or in locations exposed to direct sunlight If playback conditions have deteriorated Read errors occur when playback conditions continue to deteriorate When a read error occurs the message DISC DEFECT appears the video freezes and the audio output is suppressed If this happens check the following points Whether the disc displays the same playback condition on other XDCAM devices If so the surface of the disc may be dirty or scratched or the performance of the recording layers on the disc may have worsened due to age Do not use discs with these symptoms Whether every disc inserted into an XDCAM device displays the same playback conditions If so the performance of the laser diodes may have deteriorated Check the total optical output time Freezing a Picture during Playback Proceed as follows 1 Press the PLAY PAUSE button to start playback 2 Press the PLAY PAUSE button again at the instant when you want to freeze the pict
64. and Loading User Files on page 145 ALL file In the ALL file the setting data of all of the menus are saved Once a camcorder is set according to your preferences and you save its ALL file in a Memory Stick you can easily set other camcorders to the settings of the camcorder that you already set by loading the data from the Memory Stick Items included in the ALL file are marked with an A in the File column on the menu list Scene file In the scene file the setting values of event items adjusted to shoot a particular scene are saved You can save up to five scene files in the camcorder memory and up to 100 scene files in a Memory Stick For example first adjust the settings to shoot a particular scene at the rehearsal and then save them as a scene file Then load this file before the actual shooting so that you can quickly recreate setup conditions that are the same as those in rehearsal Items included in the scene file are marked with an Sc in the File column on the menu list Lens file In the lens file the setting data used to compensate for the characteristics of lenses such as flare white shading and auto iris gain is saved You can save up to 32 lens files in the camcorder memory and up to 100 lens files in a Memory Stick Items included in the lens file are marked with an L in the File column on the menu list DIAGNOSIS menu This menu shows the digital hours meter and disc and cli
65. and describes the procedure for selecting the shutter speed and shutter mode About the shutter modes The shutter modes that can be used with the electronic shutter and the shutter speeds that can be selected are listed below Shutter Frame Shutter speed Application mode frequency Standard 60i 1 100 1 125 For shooting 1 250 1 500 fast moving 1 1000 1 2000 subjects with sec little blurring 30P 1 40 1 60 1 120 1 125 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 sec 23 98P 1 32 1 48 1 96 1 125 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 sec 50i 1 60 1 125 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 sec 25P 1 33 1 50 1 100 1 125 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 sec ECS 60i 60 0Hz to For obtaining Extended 19000Hz images with Clear no horizontal Scan bands of noise when 23 98P 24 0Hz to shooting 21000Hz subjects such as monitor avi screens 25P 25 0Hz to 25000Hz SLS except 2108 16 32 64 For shooting Slow 23 98P frames subjects in Speed 1 15 to 1 3 8 low level Shutter 1 1 9 1 1 2 1 lighting sec conditions Whatever the operating mode of the electronic shutter the sensitivity of the CCD decreases with increasing shutter speed When the automatic iris is used the iris opens wider as the shutter speed increases thus reducing the depth of field Under artificial light particularly fluorescent or mercury lamps the light intensity may appe
66. audio output channels for the amp i LINK DV OUT S400 connector On the AUDIO 2 page of the MAINTENANCE menu set i LINK AUDIO OUT to one of the following The factory default setting is 2 2CH Output channels 1 and 2 16 bits 48 ksps 4CH Output channels 1 to 4 12 bits 32 ksps When the scan mode is 23 98P video audio or timecode output via the i LINK connection may not be continuous Using the camcorder as a feeder To copy digitally from the camcorder to the VTR without the editing function Using an i LINK cable DV cable to connect a digital video cassette recorder with an i LINK connector to the camcorder digital copy of video and audio can be carried out Example of connection PDW F335 F335P External VTR i LINK cable DV cable 20 DSR 1800A 1800AP 45 45P etc 1 wake the following settings to prepare the external VTR Set REC MODE to the same recording mode as that of the camcorder When the recording mode is set to DVCAM select either DF or NDF Set AUDIO MODE to either 4 channel or 2 channel mode according to the disc that is played on the camcorder 2 Pause recording on the external VTR 3 Play the disc on the camcorder Check the playback on the camcorder and when playback reaches the scene that you want to record start recording again on the external VTR The copy to the external VTR starts 5 When copy to the external VTR is
67. bit rate 25 minutes Mbps 2 channels More than 90 minutes LP mode 9 4 channels More than 112 Variable bit rate minutes upper limit 18 2 channels More than 122 Mbps minutes When PFDS50DLA discs are used Bit rate Audio channels Recording time used HQ mode 9 4 channnels More than 145 Variable bit rate minutes upper limit 35 2 channnels More than 150 Mbps minutes SP mode 4 channnels Approx 190 Fixed bit rate 25 minutes Mbps 2 channnels Approx 200 minutes LP mode 9 4 channnels More than 248 Variable bit rate minutes upper limit 18 2 channnels More than 265 Mbps minutes Item Description Settings SYSTEM Frame NTSC 601 30 23 9 frequency PAL 501 25P REC Recording MPEG HD DVCAM FORMAT format BIT RATE Bit rate for HD HQ SP LP For HD recording details see the following table titled HD recording bit rate settings and recording times AUDIO CH Number of 2ch 4ch HD audio channels for HD recording ASPECT Aspect ratio for 16 9 4 3 RATIO DVCAM recording COUNTRY Region of use NTSC PAL 2 Select the desired item and press the MENU knob Turm the MENU knob to select the desired setting and press the MENU knob a In HQ mode or LP mode as a result of MPEG2 compression the recording time varies depending on the volume of the generated compressed image data with the above figures as a minimum For example in material with little movement the recording time may be
68. delete only SHOT MARK1 and SHOT MARK2 CLIP IS LOCKED The clip is locked This appears when an attempt is made to delete a clip set the clip thumbnail or delete a shot mark when the clip is locked ALL CLIPS ARE LOCKED All clips are locked This appears when an attempt is made to execute a LOCK ALL CLIPS operation when all clips are already locked Operation Warnings Troubleshooting You can use this chart to establish possible causes of an apparent problem always double check before sending the camcorder for repair If a problem persists contact your Sony dealer Symptoms Cause Remedy The camcorder does not power on when you set the POWER switch to ON There is no battery pack attached Attach a battery pack see page 31 The battery pack is exhausted Replace the battery pack with a fully charged one see page 31 The AC adaptor is not connected Connect the AC adaptor see page 31 Recording does not start when you press the REC button The POWER switch is set to OFF Set the POWER switch to ON The disc has the Write Inhibit tab in the recording disabled position Set the Write Inhibit tab to allow recording see page 48 or change the disc The disc is full Replace the disc with one with sufficient free space or format the disc see page 49 The inserted disc requires salvage processing Carry out salvage pr
69. device connected to this unit can be used for direct HD video editing or simple Proxy AV data editing enabling a more efficient workflow 1 Audio Video Control 2 File Access Mode Other signal input output connectors HD SD analog component output connector During HD video recording and playback either an HD signal or down converted SD signal can be output The output signal selection is carried out in a menu Composite video output connector 50i 25P video is output as a PAL signal 601 30 video is output as an NTSC signal and 23 98P video is output as an NTSC signal which has undergone 2 3 pulldown processing Timecode input output connectors The unit is provided with a single input output connector controlled by a switch GENLOCK connector The SD or HD reference signal can be input to apply a genlock to the camera Video light connector There is an interface connector for a maximum 50 W video light and a control switch Depending on the switch setting the light can be turned on and off as recording starts and stops Remote control connector Connect the RM B150 B750 remote control unit supplied separately or other remote commander to allow remote operation of the shooting functions of this unit Audio output connectors The unit is provided with phono jacks allowing stereo output Earphone jack monaural stereo Audio channels to be monitored can be selected with the MONITOR switch on the side of the
70. finished sto Py p playback of the disc on the camcorder For details about external VTR operations see the instruction manual supplied with the external VTR To control the camcorder from a VTR with editing function By connecting a VTR with an i LINK connector to the jj i LINK DV OUT S400 connector of the camcorder using an i LINK cable DV cable you can control playback and recording on the camcorder and perform cut editing and digital copy Example of connection PDW F335 F335P External VTR i LINK cable DV cable DSR 2000A 2000AP etc When using the DSR 2000A 2000AP press the i LINK button on the remote control setting section of the VTR To use the automatic copying function of the DSR 2000A 2000AP it is necessary to set the recording format of the camcorder to DVCAM on the FORMAT page of the OPERATION menu For details on the external VTR see the instruction manual supplied with the external VTR To control the camcorder from a nonlinear editing system Using the i LINK cable DV cable you can transfer video and audio signals to a nonlinear editing system from the camcorder Editing software that supports the selected recording format DVCAM must be used Example of connection PDW F335 F335P Laptop computer i LINK cable DV cable z A computer in which editing software supporting t
71. functions exploiting the disc characteristics Thumbnail search Pressing the THUMBNAIL button on this unit displays a representative image for each clip as a thumbnail on the LCD liquid crystal display monitor in the viewfinder and on the external video monitor Selecting a thumbnail with the cursor and pressing the PLAY PAUSE button allows any clip to be checked easily Essence mark search During or after movie recording an essence mark can be recorded on any scene A list of frames with an essence mark recorded can be displayed on the LCD monitor in the viewfinder and on the external video monitor Essence marks can also be added after recording using the supplied PDZ 1 Proxy Browsing Software Expand function The expand function allows you to divide a selected clip into 12 blocks and to display thumbnails of the first frame in each block in the thumbnail list You can also divide the segment between a selected essence mark and the next essence mark in the same way The expansion can be repeated up to three times to display a total of 1728 thumbnails This function allows you to quickly review the selected clip or segment and to search efficiently for a target scene Scene selection You can select clips on the disc to create a clip list The clips in this list can be played back in any order A single disc can hold up to 99 clip lists Audio recording functions Audio is recorded as uncompressed data with 16 bit quant
72. in a clip list DELETE CLIP When the target clip is referenced in a clip list DELETE CLIP amp CLIP LIST clip lists that reference the deletion target clip will be deleted as well CLIP coo15 015 034 25 EC xz TC 00 29 44 07 30 NOV 2005 13 42 DUR 0 00 05 13 ON CLIP LIST To cancel the deletion and return to the thumbnail screen Use the SEL SET button or MENU knob to select CANCEL and then press the button or knob Alternatively press the RESET button on the right side of the LCD monitor 5 Use the SEL SET button or MENU knob to select OK and then press the button or knob The clip is deleted and you return to the thumbnail screen To delete clips with a simple operation The clip deletion screen appears directly you can delete clips without displaying the CLIP menu After step 2 press the RESET button on the right side of the LCD monitor with the SHIFT button held down shortcut operation To delete all clips 1 Carry out steps 1 and 3 of Locking Write Protecting Clips to display the CLIP menu 2 Use the SEL SET button or MENU knob to select LOCK OR DELETE ALL CLIPS and then press the button or knob A sub menu appears 3 Use the SEL SET button or MENU knob to select DELETE ALL CLIPS and then press the button or knob A deletion confirmation screen appears 4 To execute the deletion use the SEL SET button or MENU knob to select
73. in the camcorder memory or the Memory Stick F ID Displays Blank Sets the File ID Sc character input mode up to 16 characters Menu Organization and Operation MAINTENANCE menu MAINTENANCE menu No 01 Page AUDIO 1 Item Settings Default AU REF LEVEL 20 18 20 dB 16 12 dB AU AGC SPEC 6 9 12 6 dB 15 17 dB AU LIMITER MODE OFF 6 OFF 9 12 15 17 dB REAR MIC REF 60 50 60 dB 40 dB FRONT MIC SELECT MONO STEREO STEREO AU CH12 AGC MODE MONO AU CH34 MODE OFF MONO STEREO AU SG 1KHz OFF AUTO USER menu page Description Sets the output level of the 1 kHz test signal AGC characteristic saturation level setting During manual adjustment of audio input levels selects the limitter characteristics saturation level for large input signals Selects the reference input level when the AUDIO IN CH1 switch or AUDIO IN CH2 switch is set to MIC Input mode selection for front microphone Selects whether to carry out automatic adjustment of the input levels of analog audio signals recorded on channels 1 and 2 independently for the two channels or to carry it out in stereo mode Selects whether to carry out automatic adjustment of the input levels of analog audio signals recorded on channels 3 and 4 independent
74. is set to enable recording e When the E part of a E01 SMI is changed an E M01 XML file with the same name in the E part is also changed automatically f When an E E01 SMI file is created an E MOI XML file with the same name in the part is also generated automatically Sub directory g When an E E01 SMI file is deleted an E MOI XML file with the same name in the E part is also deleted automatically Directories cannot be created in the Edit directory File name Content Operations Read Partial read Write Partial write Rename Create Delete C S01 MXF 9 Proxy AV data MXF file Yes No No 0 No 9 No 2 generated automatically when a C MXF file is created 0001 to 4999 Other files Files other than the above No No a The C part can be changed to a user definded name b When the C part of a C MXF file name is changed a C S01 MXF file with the same name in the C part is generated automatically c When a C MXF file is created a C S01 XML file with the same name in the C part is generated automatically d When a C MXF file is deleted the C SOI XML file with the same name in the C part is also deleted automatically General directory Directories cannot be created in the Sub directory File name Content Operations Read Partial read Write Partial write Rename Create Delete Any file Yes Yes
75. knob to move the mark to the desired item 1 Display the DISC page of the USER or OPERATION menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic Menu Operations on page 129 2 Select DELETE LAST CLIP and press the MENU knob The message DELETE OK YES NO appears 3 To execute the deletion select YES and press the MENU knob again The last recorded clip is deleted 4 By repeating steps 2 and 3 you can delete any number of clips in sequence from the last recorded clip Clip 1 Clip 2 Clip 3 Clips can be deleted in the sequence 3 2 1 To delete all clips within the disc The following procedure deletes all unlocked clips Proceed as follows How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the desired item 1 Display the DISC page of the USER or OPERATION menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic Menu Operations on page 129 2 Select DELETE ALL CLIPS and press the MENU knob The message DELETE OK YES NO appears 3 To execute the deletion select YES and press the MENU knob This deletes all clips within the disc Recording Shot Marks With this unit you can record two types of shot mark shot mark 1 and shot mark 2 on the disc Recording shot marks for scenes containing important images and sounds enables quick access to the marked points This increases editing efficiency
76. manual Note on using the battery pack A warm battery pack may not be able to be fully recharged To attach the battery pack 1 Press the battery pack against the back of the camcorder aligning the line on the side of the battery pack with the matching line on the camcorder BP GL95 GL65 L60S L80S Align these lines 2 Slide the battery pack down until its LOCK arrow yp points at the matching line on the camcorder LOCK arrow Matching line on the camcorder If the battery pack is not attached correctly the terminal may be damaged To detach the battery pack Holding this button in pull the battery pack up During recording and playback while the ACCESS indicator is lit be careful never to remove the battery pack Make sure to power the camcorder off before replacing the battery pack Using an AC Adaptor When using the AC DN10 AC adaptor Mount an AC DN10 on the camcorder in the same way as a battery pack then connect to the AC power supply The AC DN10 can supply up to 100 W of power o oo 8 e e sa 6 to an AC power source gt Preparing a Power Supply suonejedejg Z jajdeup suonejedejg 2 sajdeup 32 Setting the Area of Use and the Frame Frequency Using the Unit for the First Time The area of use and the frame frequency are not factory preset Before using this unit you need to set these items You c
77. of channel A using the color temperature Adjust the value while looking at the real image because error tends to be bigger for adjustment of high color temperature COLOR FINE lt A gt Adjusts the value more precisely if the adjustment by WARM COOL A is not satisfactory OFFSET WHITE When this item is set to ON the lt B gt offset adjusted on this page is added to the white balance for channel B Item WARM COOL B Description When OFFSET WHITE B is ON sets the offset for the white balance of channel B using the color temperature Adjust the value while looking at the real image because error tends to be bigger for adjustment of high color temperature COLOR FINE lt B gt Adjusts the value more precisely if the adjustment by WARM COOL B is not satisfactory Set the WHITE BAL switch to the channel A or B that you want to set If the WHITE BAL switch is not set to A or B the adjusted value is not reflected in the video output even though you carry out the following operation Turn the MENU knob to perform the settings for each item and press the MENU knob If you want to set the other channel go back to step 2 Selecting Gamma Tables Item CINES Description This emphasizes the contrast between light and dark more than CINE1 and CINE2 and also accentuates gradation changes on the black side CINE4 This emphasizes the contrast in
78. of device on which current clip was recorded In CLIP LIST MODE shows DATE In NORMAL MODE date current clip was recorded In CLIP LIST MODE date clip list was created TIME In NORMAL MODE time current clip was recorded In CLIP LIST MODE time clip list was created 04 ROM AT Display only Displays the ROM version VERSION PACKAGE ADVANCED menu ADVANCED menu No Page Item Settings Default USER Description File setting menu page 01 LOW LIGHT LOW LIGHT ON OFF ON Turns the LOW LIGHT indication on or off This indication indicates that the average video level has fallen below a specified threshold LOW LIGHT LEVEL 99 to 99 0 Sets the threshold for the LOW LIGHT indication BATTERY 10 20 10 Specifies the remaining battery level that triggers a flashing display in the viewfinder 02 AUTOIRIS IRIS OVER RIDE ON OFF ON Turns the auto iris override function A on or off IRIS SPEED 99 to 99 O Sets the auto iris speed CLIP HIGH LIGHT ON OFF OFF Turns on and off the function which when auto iris is on dampens the reaction to high luminance by detecting and clipping high luminance areas IRIS LEVEL 99 to 99 0 Adjusts the auto iris target level IRIS APL RATIO Adjusts the mix ratio between auto Menu Organization and Operation ADVANCED menu
79. on the WHITE SETTING page ofthe MAINTENANCE menu ATW LCD monitor operating buttons is activated When this switch is adjusted the new setting appears on the setting change adjustment progress message display area of the viewfinder screen for about 3 seconds You can assign the ATW function to an ASSIGN switch on the ASSIGNABLE page of the OPERATION menu For details about how to assign the function to an ASSIGN switch see Assigning Functions to ASSIGN Switches on page 141 1 ATW Auto Tracing White Balance The white balance of the picture being shot is adjusted automatically for varying lighting conditions OUTPUT DCC output signal dynamic contrast control switch Switches the video signal which is output to the video disc drive referred to as VDR viewfinder and video monitor from the camera section between the following two BARS Outputs the color bar signal CAM Outputs the video signal from the camera When this is selected you can switch DCC 1 on and off 1 DCC Dynamic Contrast Control Against a very bright background with the iris opening adjusted to the subject objects in the background will be lost in the glare The DCC function will suppress the high intensity and restore much of the lost detail and is particularly effective in the following cases Shooting people in the shade on a sunny day Shooting a subject indoors against a background through a window Any high contrast scene O
80. or automatic selectable Focusing range 5 cm to Filter attaching thread M82 mm 0 75 mm pitch Sony 2 inch bayonet mount Approx 1 34 kg 2 lb 15 oz including lens hood Iris control Mount Mass External dimensions w h d Unit mm inches D S 211 83 8 gt 174 67 8 2o d 215 81 2 DXF 20W Viewfinder Picture tube 2 inch aspect ratio 16 9 monochrome Indicators REC x2 TALLY BATT SHUTTER GAIN UP Resolution 600 lines Power voltage 12 DC Power consumption 3W Mass Approx 620 g 11b 5 oz Maximum dimensions 239 x 76 x 215 mm 9 1 2 x 3x 8 1 2 inches w h d Stereo microphone Type Back electret condenser microphone Directivity Super cardioid Frequency response 100 Hz to 20 kHz Output impedance 100 Power voltage 48 V DC Mass Approx 120 g 4 oz Dimensions 162x21 mm 6 1 2 x 27 32 inches length X diameter excluding cable Optical Disc Drive Section Video characteristics Sampling frequency Y 74 25 MHz 37 125 MHz Quantization 8 bits sample Compression MPEG 2 MP HL DVCAM Audio characteristics Sampling frequency 48 kHz Quantization 16 bit 2 channel 16 bit 4 channel Headroom 20 18 16 12 dB selectable Frequency response 20 Hz to 20 kHz 0 5 dB 1 0 dB 0 dB 1 kHz Dynamic range More than 85 dB Distortion Max 0 08 1 kHz Input output connectors Signal inputs AUDIO IN CH 1 CH
81. or more than 3 4 dBu 10 balanced Related products There is a range of Sony products available to meet every conceivable video shooting requirement For details consult your Sony sales dealer 1 78 Specifications Power supply and related equipment BP GL95 GL65 L60S L80S Battery Pack BC L70 M150 L500 Battery Charger AC DN2B DN10 AC Adaptor Equipment for remote control RM B150 B750 Remote Control Unit Audio equipment ECM 673 674 678 Microphone CAC 12 Microphone Holder CA WR855 Camera Adaptor WRR 855 UHF Synthesized Tuner WRR 861 862 UHF Synthesized Tuner WRT 822 824 UHF Synthesized Transmitter WRR Tuner Fitting service part number A 8278 057 B DMX P01 Portable Digital Mixer For Audio equipment described above confirm whether the connector is male or female and the number of pins on the connector The audio input connectors of the camcorder are female and 3 pin A converting adaptor may be required Viewfinder DXF 51 51CE 5 inch Viewfinder monochrome Accessory Shoe Kit for DXF 51 51CE service part number A 8274 968 B Cables and miscellaneous i LINK cable DV connecting cable CCFD 3L 6 pin 4 pin 3 5 m CCF 3L 6 pin 6 pin 3 5 m LC H300 Hard Carrying Case LC DS300SFT Soft Carrying Case LCR 1 Rain Cover Design and specifications are subject to change without notice Notes Always make a test recording and verify that it was recorded successfully SONY WILL NOT BE LIABL
82. or turn off the unit while it is reading or writing data You use the Memory Stick in a location subject to the effects of static electricity or electric noise We recommend that you make a backup copy of important data that you record on the Memory Stick Do not attach anything other than the supplied label to the Memory Stick labelling position Attach the label so that it does not stick out beyond the labelling position Carry and store the Memory Stick in its case Do not touch the connector of the Memory Stick with anything including your finger or metallic objects Do not strike bend or drop the Memory Stick Do not disassemble or modify the Memory Stick Do not allow the Memory Stick to get wet Do not use or store the Memory Stick in a location that is Extremely hot such as in a car parked in the sun Under direct sunlight Very humid or subject to corrosive substances Memory Stick access indicator If the access indicator is turned on or is flashing data is being read from or written to the Memory Stick At this time do not shake the computer or product or subject them to shock Do not turn off the power of the computer and product or remove the Memory Stick This may damage the data Precautions To prevent data loss make backups of data frequently In no event will Sony be liable for any loss of data Unauthorized recording may be contrary to the provisions
83. page appears again and a blank line is inserted above the specified item You cannot insert a blank line on a page where 10 items have already been registered To add delete replace pages You can add a new page to the USER menu delete a page from the USER menu or replace pages using the EDIT PAGE of the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu To add a page How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the desired item 1 Display the TOP menu see page 129 2 Select USER MENU CUSTOMIZE and press the MENU knob If this is the first time the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu has been displayed the CONTENTS page appears If the menu has been used before the last accessed page appears Ifthe CONTENTS page is displayed press the MENU knob Then select EDIT PAGE and press the MENU knob If a different page is displayed turn the MENU knob until the EDIT PAGE screen appears The EDIT PAGE appears ED O MANNCUWDOTIU e E Q Q Q Q Q Q e 4 Press the MENU knob Then select the position where you want to add the page and press the MENU knob The EDIT FUNCTION page appears D select INSERT and press the MENU knob The CONTENTS page appears 6 select the desired page and press the MENU knob The number and name of the page selected in step 6 is added above the item selected in step 4 To cancel adding a page Before pressing the MENU knob in s
84. preset white balance on the PRESET WHT page of the MAINTENANCE menu Effect This prevents the picture from reddening To correct skin detail You can specify a color other than a skin tone to adjust the color 1 Set SKIN AREA IND to ON on the SKIN DETAIL page of the PAINT menu For details on menu operations see Basic Menu Operations on page 129 2 Set SKIN DETECT on the SKIN DETAIL page of the PAINT menu This causes the area detect cursor to be shown in the viewfinder screen Place the area detect cursor on the target then execute SKIN DETECT This designates the correction area which is indicated by a zebra pattern 4 Change the value of SKIN DTL WIDTH 0 to 359 on the SKIN DETAIL page so that the zebra pattern may be displayed in the target area Set the correction level beforehand using the SKIN DETAIL LVL item on the SKIN DETAIL page D When the setting is finished set SKIN AREA IND to OFF on the SKIN DETAIL page Deleting Clips With this camcorder you can delete clips one at a time in sequence from the last recorded clip or you can delete all clips in a single operation You can use the THUMBNAIL menu to delete the selected clip or all clips For details see Deleting Clips on page 83 Recording Basic Operations Locked clips cannot be deleted To delete the last recorded clip Proceed as follows How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU
85. put one picture or character over another so that both can be seen at the same time Thumbnail image A reduced still picture of video for display on a GUI screen XDCAM creates thumbnail images from proxy video and displays them as index pictures on GUI screens Timecode A digitally encoded signal which is recorded with video data to identify each frame of the video by hour minute second and frame number SMPTE timecode is applied to NTSC system and EBU timecode to PAL and SECAM systems Timecode synchronization To synchronize the built in timecode generator of video equipment to an external timecode Time data Time information that is generated by a timecode generator or read by a timecode reader Turbo gain Video amplifier gain increased from 30 dB by 6 to 18 dB by combining adjacent pixels of the CCD UMID Unique Material Identifier A standard SMPTE 330M for video and audio metadata The Basic section of a UMID contains a globally unique number and a material number for the identification of recorded material An optional section called the Source Pack contains information such as the time and location of recording A UMID with the Basic section only is called a Basic UMID A UMID with the Source Pack is called an Extended UMID User s bits Abbreviation for Total Level Control System A function to operate the automatic gain control AGC and electronic shutter AE to adapt to varying lig
86. requires MagicGate copyright protection technology cannot be written to Memory Stick R Memory Stick Stores any type of data except copyright protected data that requires the MagicGate copyright protection technology MagicGate Memory Stick Equipped with the MagicGate copyright protection technology Memory Stick ROM Stores pre recorded read only data You cannot record on Memory Stick ROM or erase the pre recorded data Memory Stick PRO Equipped with the MagicGate copyright protection technology designed for use only with equipment compatible with Memory Stick PRO Available types of Memory Stick With this product you can use a Sony Memory Stick whose capacity does not exceed 128 MB and a Sony Memory Stick PRO whose capacity does not exceed 2 GB To use Memory Stick Duo or Memory Stick PRO Duo with your product an adaptor needs to be attached Note on data read write speed Data read write speed may vary depending on the combination of the Memory Stick and Memory Stick compliant product you use What is MagicGate MagicGate is copyright protection technology that uses encryption technology Before using a Memory Stick Terminal Write protect tab Labelling position When you set the Memory Stick write protect tab to LOCK data cannot be recorded edited or erased Data may be damaged if You remove the Memory Stick
87. significantly longer than shown above Note about recording times An average of 1 second up to a maximum of 2 seconds of additional information is recorded whenever Clip Continuous Rec recording starts The recording times listed above will be shorter if Clip Continuous Rec recording is done repeatedly The recording and playback times listed above are approximate Maximum recording times may vary depending on recording conditions Recording Basic Operations xoeqKe d pue Bulpiovey e Jaydeyo 53 xoeg e g pue Bulpiooay g 54 Combining recording formats on a single disc If any of the following items is set differently recordings cannot be combined on a single disc SYSTEM REC FORMAT AUDIO CH COUNTRY Adjusting the Black Balance White Balance To ensure excellent image quality when using this camcorder conditions may require that both the black balance and the white balance be adjusted If the black balance or white balance adjustment is started messages that report on the progress and results are displayed on the viewfinder screen Black balance and white balance adjustment values that are automatically set by the camcorder and the various settings are stored in the camcorder memory and retained even when the power is turned off To adjust the black balance The black balance will require adjustment in the following cases When the camcorder is used for the first ti
88. to appear The filter selection has been FILTER n changed where n 1 2 3 4 The gain setting has been GAIN n changed where n 3dB OdB 9dB 12dB 18 24dB 30dB 36dB 42dB 48dB The setting of the WHITE BAL switch has been WHITE n where n A CH B CH changed PRESET or ATW RUN The OUTPUT DCC switches DCC ON or OFF has been set to DCC ON or OFF Setting the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen and the LCD Monitor pue s e dsiq nua 135 sBunmes pejreyeq pue sAejdsiq nua JaydeyD 136 Situation Message to appear The shutter speed and mode SHUTTER 1 100 or 1 125 setting has been changed 1 1 250 1 500 1 1000 1 2000 ECS SLS The black or white balance E g WHITE OK has been adjusted 1 The corresponding message is also displayed for about 3 seconds when the SHUTTER switch is set to ON Setting the Marker Display You can switch the display of the center and safety zone markers on or off and select whether the area indicated by the safety zone marker is 80 90 92 5 or 95 of the Screen area How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the desired item 1 Display the MARKER page of the USER or OPERATION menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic Menu Operations on page
89. to the SMPTE registration office When no organization code has been acquired it is forbidden to enter an arbitrary string As a rule the code 00 must be entered Freelance operators who do not belong to an origination should enter TE USER CODE When you select this item the USER CODE window appears Enter the 4 byte alphanumeric strings for user identification The user code is registered with each ORGANIZATION locally It is usually not centrally registered When the user code is less than 4 bytes enter the user code from the beginning of the 4 bytes and enter the space character 20h in the remaining strings This user code is determined by the organization The methods used depend on the organization User bits cannot be entered when no organization code has been entered TIME ZONE When you select this item the TIME ZONE window appears The UTC is calculated based on the local time using the time zone If the time zone is not set the UTC is not recorded correctly Set the time difference from UTC When setting the summer time or daylight saving time change the code to one which will advance the time by 1 hour When you change the time zone adjust the built in clock to local time and turn the power of the camcorder off and then the power on again MPEG 4 License This product is licensed under the MPEG 4 Visual Patent Portfolio License For the personal and non commercial use of a consumer for 1
90. 0 BC M150 BC L500 Tripod Adaptor Battery Pack Battery Battery Battery Charger Charger Charger Tripod AC Adaptor LC DS300SFT Soft Carrying Case Aly Chart of Optional Components and Accessories _ E d AC DN2B DN10 CA WR855 9 WRR 855 Camera Adaptor UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit a Optional accessory shoe kit service part number A 8274 968 B is required for fitting For details consult your Sony dealer b The cables to use for connection differ according to the application For details see Connecting page 46 c Use a tripod adaptor with a suffix of E or later on the model name For more details see Mounting on a Tripod page 40 d Use this in combination with Sony lithium ion battery packs Glossary AES EBU A standard established jointly by the AES Audio Engineering Society and EBU European Broadcasting Union for serial transmission of digital audio Two channels of audio can be transmitted via a single connector Aliasing Distortion which occurs during sampling to convert analog signals to digital ATW Auto Tracing White balance The white balance is automatically adjusted for the lighting conditions during shooting Bayonet type A type of lens mount The lens can be inserted into the lens mount and fixed in place by rotating a ring Black balance To balance the black level of the R G and B signals so that black has no color Blac
91. 0000000000 k 012345678 lt gt ABCDEFGH I JKLMNOP GRSTU UXYZ X labcdefshisk 1mnoprarstuuuxsSz INS DEL RET ESC END 2 Turn the MENU knob until W moves to the character position that you want to select then press the MENU knob s yo Example When entering the letter 13OSHOT ID D 1 D 2 D 3 000000000000 D 4 000000000000 f Z amp 012345678 9 lt gt ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP GRSTUUUXYZIXlabcdefshiJk 1mnorarstuuuxsSsz INS DEL RET ESC END el I I I 1 4 Repeat step 3 for each of the remaining characters D When you have finished character inputting turn the MENU knob to move over END then press the MENU knob This exits the character input mode and returns to the SHOT ID page To insert a space In step above move over INS and press the MENU knob To cancel inserting a space move to RET and press the MENU knob SOSHOT ID eID 1 CMM 15 10 2 QOOOO0000000 I 3 OOOOOOOOO00o0 4 000000000000 H amp xkt 012345678 9 lt gt ABCDEFGH I JKLMNOP GRSTUUUXYZ X TabcdefshiJk mnorarstuvwxyz R Move over INS e a 00000 Bt O x 012345678 BRSTUUUXYZIYlabcdefshiJk Space inserted I I 000000 I 00000 I gt ABCDEFGH I JKLMNOP lmnorarstuvuxyz DEL RET ESC END Setting the Status Display on the Viewfin
92. 143 5600 indicator 29 5600K button 14 5 inch electronic viewfinder attaching 38 A About data transfer speed of i LINK 173 AC adaptor 31 ACCESS indicator 18 Accessory fitting shoe 22 ADVANCED menu 126 ALARM knob 15 Alarm messages 166 Area of use setting 32 Aspect Ratio selecting 142 ASSIGN 1 2 switches 13 ASSIGN 3 4 switches 21 ASSIGNABLE page 108 Assigning functions to ASSIGN switches 141 ATW 15 56 Audio channel display 17 selecting 20 AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 connectors 24 AUDIO IN input selection switches 24 AUDIO IN switches 20 Audio input external microphone 41 supplied microphone 41 Audio input signal selection 20 Audio level adjusting 60 indicator 17 29 Audio level adjustment method selection 20 AUDIO LEVEL knob front 13 AUDIO LEVEL knobs 20 AUDIO LEVEL knobs side 20 AUDIO OUT CH 1 CH 2 connectors 24 AUDIO SELECT switches 20 AUDIO 1 page 117 AUDIO 2 page 118 Auto focus button 25 Auto focus indicator 25 Auto focus lens 25 Index Auto focus ranging sensor 12 AUTO W B BAL switch 12 Automatic iris setting 59 BATT indicator 27 Battery attachment shoe 23 Battery capacity indicator 17 Battery pack attaching 31 detaching 31 operation time 31 Black balance automatic adjustment 12 54 BRIGHT button 16 BRIGHT control 28 Built in speaker 18 C CAM CONFIG page 120 Camera person TALLY indicator 27 Camera scan mode indicator 17 Change confirmation adjustment progress messages 135 Chapter funct
93. 2 are overwritten by those on the remote control unit after the remote control unit is connected When the remote control unit is disconnected from the camcorder the independent data region becomes effective Thus the camcorder will return to the settings that were in effect before the remote control unit was connected 1 Absolute value rotational controls The data corresponding to the angular position of controls is output Rotational controls for which the data corresponding to the amount of their rotation is output are called relative value controls 2 Absolute value switches Like toggle switches or slide switches except momentary switches the switches or knobs whose positions must coincide with their functions are called absolute value switches Connecting the Remote Control Unit 45 suonejedejg Z jajdeup suonejedejg z sajdeup 46 Connecting Production of some of the peripherals and related devices described in this chapter has been discontinued For advice about choosing devices please contact your Sony dealer or a Sony sales representative Connecting an External Video Monitor When using a Sony liquid crystal display monitor make the connections as follows PDW F335 F335P to VIDEO connector J to VIDEO OUT Y PB Pr connector 750 coaxial Q Component video cable cable to RGB COMPONENT input connector to LINE input connector H LM
94. 6 Checking the user bit and timecode functions described below 1 Testing the recording and playback functions 1 Using the following buttons in the LCD monitor display the text information DISPLAY EXPAND button CHAR COUNTER CHAPTER button COUNTER BRIGHT button adjustment of backlight brightness Set the PRESET REGEN CLOCK switch to PRESET and set the F RUN SET R RUN to R RUN Press the REC button and check the following points The time counter indication in the LCD monitor changes The REC indicator in the viewfinder is on 2 3 Press the REC button again Check that recording stops and that the REC indicator in the viewfinder goes off Repeat the checks of steps 3 and 4 this time using the REC button on the lens Press the RESET button and check that the indication in the time counter display section of the LCD monitor is reset to 00 00 00 00 Press the F REV button and check that fast reverse playback is performed Next press the PLAY PAUSE button and check that normal playback is performed Press the STOP button and check that playback stops Next press the F FWD button and check that fast forward playback is performed Press the STOP button again then press the PREV button Check that the image of the beginning of the current or previous clip is displayed Press the NEXT button and check that the image of the beginning of the next clip is displayed Testi
95. 94 Switching the Information Displayed on THUMB At Scone eeu eb ROM 94 Managing Clip Lists 95 Loading a Clip List from the Disc as the Current Clip Lists sepe rer epi 96 Deleting a Clip List from the Disc 96 Sorting the List of Clip Lists 96 Using the PDZ 1 Proxy Browsing Software MP NR 97 Chapter 5 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings Menu Organization and Operation 98 TOP MB aep Ede pet pags 106 Menu TEES ess cesta coat 107 Displaying 129 Basic Menu Operations 129 Using the USER Menu Example Menu 130 Editing USER 131 Resetting USER Menu Settings to the Standard Settings 133 Resetting USER Menu Settings to the Factory Default Settings icd eee etes 134 Setting the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen and the LCD Monitor H rr rer 135 Selecting the Display Items 135 Change Confirmation Adjustment Progress MESSAGES E 135 Setting the Marker Display 136 Setting the Viewfinder Screen Display 136 Recording Shot Data Superimposed on the Color Bars dopo itis 137 Setting the Shot ID arietes 137 Showing the Status Display 138 Table o
96. A CRISPENING 99 to 99 O Sets the crispening level LEVEL DEPEND ON OFF ON Turns the level depend function on or off DETAIL 99 to 99 0 Sets the H detail signal frequency FREQUENCY APERTURE ON OFF ON Turns aperture correction on or off APERTURE LEVEL 99 to 99 O Sets the aperture level KNEE APT LEVEL Sets the knee aperture level DETAIL LIMIT Sets the detail limiter level Menu Organization and Operation pue sfejdsiq nu 127 sBunmes pejreyeq pue sAejdsiq nua 1 2 128 ADVANCED menu No Page Item Settings Default USER Description File setting menu page 07 SDDETAIL SD DETAIL ON OFF ON Turn SD detail correction on or off A SD DETAIL LEVEL 99 to 99 O Sets the SD detail level SD CRISPENING Sets the SD crispening level SD DTL LIMIT Sets the SD detail limiter level SD LEVEL DEPEND Sets the SD level depend level SD DTL Sets the SD H detail signal FREQUENCY frequency level SD DTL H V RATIO Sets the SD V detail ratio SD CROSS COLOR Sets the amount of SD cross color suppression 08 WHITE WHITE SHADING CH R G B R Selects the channel adjusted with A SHADING SEL this menu If TEST is selected with the output signal selector switch button of a rem
97. A to F in capital letters To reset the timecode value to 00 00 00 00 press the RESET button on the right side of the LCD monitor 6 Set the F RUN SET R RUN switch to the desired operating mode for the timecode generator F RUN Free run The timecode generator keeps running R RUN Recording run The timecode generator runs only while recording To lock the timecode to an external source You can synchronize the internal timecode generator of this camcorder with an external generator for the regeneration of an external timecode You can also synchronize the timecode generators of other camcorders VTRs with the internal generator of this camcorder Recording Basic Operations Input the timecode to the TC connector on the rear connector panel and set the IN OUT selector switch to IN When using this unit as the reference device set the IN OUT selector switch to OUT to output timecode from the TC connector Connections for timecode synchronization Connect both the reference video signal and the external timecode as illustrated below Example 1 Synchronizing with an external timecode TC IN External timecode GENLOCK IN Reference video signal SD or HD Example 2 Connecting two units and using one as the reference When making the following connections set the frame frequency to the same value on both units Wait until the reference camcorder becomes stable a state where a normal pictur
98. AKING control 27 Picture Cache Function 68 PLAY PAUSE button 19 Playback 75 clip list 80 indicator 17 Power source voltage battery remaining capacity 28 Power supply preparing 31 POWER switch 14 Power zoom lever 26 Pre lighting function 66 Index 185 xepu 186 PRESET REGEN CLOCK switch 21 PREV button 19 Product configurations 8 PUSH AF button 25 R REC button 12 26 REC TALLY indicators 27 Recording advanced operation 66 basic operation 53 checking on a color video monitor 76 Clip Continuous Rec 74 review 76 shot data superimposed on the color bars 137 Starting a Shoot with a Few Seconds 68 Recording format indicator 17 28 selecting 53 Recording level adjustment 20 Remaining disc capacity indicator 17 REMOTE connector 24 Remote control unit camcorder switch functions when connected 44 connecting 44 paint adjustment when connected 44 structure of the paint adjustment data 45 RESET button 16 RESET page 113 RET button 26 S S400 connector 24 Scan mode 143 indicator 17 Scene file loading 151 saving 149 setting the fileID 151 SCENE FILE page 116 Scene selection creating clip list 88 editing sub clips 92 flow of editing 86 managing clip lists 95 overview 85 Searching chapter function 79 expand function 80 thumbnail 76 Index SEL SET button 20 Setting change and adjustment progress message display area 29 SHIFT button 20 Shooting 51 SHOT DISP page 112
99. D 16 bits 48 kHz 4 2 channels DVCAM 16 bits 48 kHz 4 channels A law 8 bits 8 kHz 4 channels Proxy video Audio Proxy audio Continuous operating time Mass Dimensions Approx 160 min with BP GL95 Approx 3 8 kg 8 Ib 6 oz main body only Approx 5 45 kg 12 Ib with DXF 20W Viewfinder stereo microphone disc and BP GL95 Battery Pack Approx 6 8 kg 14 Ib 15 oz with DXF 20W Viewfinder stereo microphone disc BP GL95 Battery Pack and VCL 719BXS Auto Focus Lens 268 105 g Unit mm inches Supplied accessories 1 MPEG 4 CODEC is a product of Ingenient Technologies Inc Recording playback time PFD23 PFD23A discs Recording Mode 4 channel 2 channel format audio audio MPEG HD HQ mode 65 minutes 68 minutes or more or more SP mode Approx 85 Approx 90 minutes minutes LP mode 112 minutes 122 minutes or more or more DVCAM Approx 85 minutes 5 PFD50DLA discs a Recording Mode 4 channel 2 channel format audio audio MPEG HD HQ mode 145 minutes 150 minutes or more or more SP mode Approx 190 Approx 200 minutes minutes LP mode 248 minutes 265 minutes or more or more DVCAM Approx 185 minutes The recording and playback times listed above are approximate Maximum recording times may vary depending on recording conditions 1 76 Sp
100. D 9030 liquid crystal display monitor To check an analog HD SD NTSC PAL signal Connect the VIDEO OUT Y Pp Pr connectors of this unit and the RGB COMPONENT input connectors of the LMD 9030 liquid crystal display monitor with a component video cable not supplied The signal output from the VIDEO OUT Y PB PR connectors can be switched with COMPONENT OUT on the OUTPUT page of the OPERATION menu For more details see page 110 It is not possible to add text information or markers to the HDSDI output To check an SD NTSC PAL signal Connect the VIDEO OUT connector of this unit and the LINE A or LINE B input connector of the LMD 9030 Connecting liquid crystal display monitor with a 75Q coaxial cable not supplied Using an i LINK Connection Using the f i LINK DV OUT S400 connector you can connect external equipment to the camcorder Video recorded in the MPEG HD format is down converted to the DVCAM format and output from i LINK DV OUT S400 connector For connections using FAM file access mode see File Operation page 154 Settings required for an i LINK connection i LINK MODE setting Set the method of connection between this unit and an external device On the OUTPUT page of the OPERATION menu set i LINK MODE to AV C Audio Video Control The factory default setting is AV C Make the i LINK AUDIO OUT setting depending on the connected device i LINK AUDIO OUT setting Set the
101. D to identify it The set file ID is saved together with the data How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the desired item 1 Display the SCENE FILE page of the FILE menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic Menu Operations on page 129 2 select F ID and press the MENU knob A character table appears FO40SCENE FILE TOP H 7 amp k 012345678 9 lt gt ABCDEFGHI JKLMNOP GRSTU UXYZ Y labcdefshisk 1mnobrarstuuuxsSz INS DEL RET sSTANDARD SCENE RECALL SCENE STORE eF ID STANDARD ESC END EXEC EXEC Press MENU knob Then turn MENU knob until Bl moves to the character position that you want to select and press the MENU knob Example When entering the letter FO40SCENE FILE TOP IHSZ amp O 7012345678 9 lt gt ABCDEFGHI JKLMNOP ARSTUUWXYZE Tabcdefshijk lmnorparstuvuxyz INS DEL RET ESC END sSTANDARD SCENE SEE EXEC SCENE ORE HTANDARD 4 Repeat step 3 for each of the remaining characters Set the file ID before saving the scene file Otherwise the file ID is not saved with the other data D When you have finished character inputting turn the MENU knob to move W over END and press the MENU knob The file ID is set and the SCENE FILE page appears again O40SCENE FILE STANDARD STANDARD STANDARD STANDARD
102. DEO OUT connector 12 VF ZEBRA ON OFF ON 08 See Setting the Viewfinder Screen SETTING ZEBRA SELECT 1 2 BOTH 1 Display on page 136 ZEBRA1 DET LEVEL 30 to 107 75 in 1 steps PEAKING VOL LINK ON OFF ON H DETAIL LEVEL 99 to 99 0 V DETAIL LEVEL DETAIL FREQ NORM HIGH HIGH VF ASPECT AUTO 4 3 AUTO 13 MARKER MARKER ON OFF OFF 09 See Setting the Marker Display CENTER ON on page 136 SAFETY ZONE SAFETY AREA 80 90 90 92 95 ASPECT ON OFF OFF ASPECT SELECT 14 9 13 9 4 3 4 3 Menu Organization and Operation poejrejeq pue shejdsiq nua 111 sBunjes pue sAejdsiq nua 2 112 OPERATION menu No Page Item Settings Default USER Description File menu page 14 VF DISP 1 DISP REC FORMAT ON OFF ON See Selecting the Display Items DISP BIT RATE on page 135 DISP SYSTEM DISP FRAME RATE DISP 16 9 DISP ZOOM DISP FOCUS DISP BATT REMAIN INT VOLT AUTO AUTO DISP REC PLAY ON OFF ON DISP TIME CODE OFF 15 VFDISP2 DISP 5600K ON OFF ON See Selecting the Display Items DISP FILTER on page 135 DISP WHITE DISP GAIN DISP SHUTTER DISP AUDIO DISP DISC DISP IRIS DISP LOW LIGHT DISP INTERVAL 16 LCD LCD COLOR 137 to 62 0 Adjusts the LCD color A LCD MARKER
103. DETAIL Sets the frequency of the H detail FREQUENCY signal APERTURE LEVEL Sets the aperture level KNEE APT LEVEL Sets the knee aperture level SD DETAIL LOW MID MID Detail setting for down converted HIGH SD CROSS COLOR ON OFF ON Turns the cross color component on or off 06 SKIN SKIN DETAIL ON OFF OFF 10 Sets the skin detail on or off A Sc St DETAIL SKIN DETAILLVL 0 Sets the detail level of detected color SKIN DETECT Moves to EXEC Detects the color for skin detail color detection SKIN AREA IND ON OFF OFF Turns the indicator of detected St color on or off SKIN DTL SAT 99 to 99 0 Adjusts the saturation level for skin A Sc St B detail 9 SKIN DTL HUE 0 to 359 Adjusts the center phase for skin z detail S SKIN DTL WIDTH 0 to 90 40 Adjusts the width for skin detail e 07 MATRIX 1 MATRIX ON OFF ON Turns the linear matrix correction A Sc St E and user matrix correction functions on or off 8 USER MATRIX OFF Turns the user matrix correction F function on or off T USER MATRIX SAT 99 to 99 0 Adjusts the saturation level affected by the user matrix 5 correction function 8 USER MATRIX HUE Adjusts the color phase affected by the user matrix correction function PRESET MTX ON OFF ON Turns the preset matrix correction function on and off PRESET MTX SEL STD HISAT STD When PRESET MTX is set to ON FL CINE selects the matrix adjustment value STD settings for st
104. E FOR DAMAGES OF ANY KIND INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO COMPENSATION OR REIMBURSEMENT ON ACCOUNT OF FAILURE OF THIS UNIT OR ITS RECORDING MEDIA EXTERNAL STORAGE SYSTEMS OR ANY OTHER MEDIA OR STORAGE SYSTEMS TO RECORD CONTENT OF ANY TYPE Always verify that the unit is operating properly before use SONY WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES OF ANY KIND INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO COMPENSATION OR REIMBURSEMENT ON ACCOUNT OF THE LOSS OF PRESENT OR PROSPECTIVE PROFITS DUE TO FAILURE OF THIS UNIT EITHER DURING THE WARRANTY PERIOD OR AFTER EXPIRATION OF THE WARRANTY OR FOR ANY OTHER REASON WHATSOEVER Specifications xipueddy 179 xipueddy 180 Chart of Optional Components and Accessories mmh 673 674 678 Microphone 12 oO Microphone Holder LA DXF 51 51CE a 5 Viewfinder 7 Connection cables not supplied b PDW F335 F335P RM B150 B750 Remote Control Unit LMD series LCD Monitor DSR 50 50P Digital Videocassette Recorder DSR 1500A 1500AP 1600A 1600AP 1800A 1800AP 2000A 2000AP Digital Videocassette Recorder HDW 2000 series HD Digital Videocassette Recorder ES PFD23 PFD23A PFD50DLA Professional disc SS f x SS E VCT U14 BP GL95 GL65 L60S L80S BC L7
105. E TOP USER FILE LOAD EXEC FILE SQUE EXEC EXEC oooo00000000000000 E RESET EXEC 2 Press the MENU knob then select USER PRESET 3 Select YES and press the MENU knob The settings for all items in the USER menu reset The message PRESET OK YES NO appears to the factory default settings LOAD SAVE Select YES and press the MENU knob The settings for all items in the USER Menu are reset to the standard settings Resetting USER Menu Settings to the Factory Default Settings You can return all settings in the USER menu to the factory default settings How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the desired item 1 Display the USER FILE page of the FILE menu and press the MENU knob sBunmes pejreyeq pue sAejdsiq 2 For details on menu operations see Basic Menu Operations on page 129 FOIOUSER FILE TOP USER FILE LOAD EXEC SER FILE SQUE EXEC I o0o000000000000000 SER _ PRESET EXEC USTOMIZE RESET EXEC R B 5 R N 2 Press the MENU knob then select CUSTOMIZE RESET and press the MENU knob The message RESET DATA OK YES NO appears 1 34 Menu Organization and Operation Setting the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen and the LCD Monitor This section explains the menu settings for the display of the viewfinder screen These settings are also u
106. ECIAL EFFECTS SYSTEM I REC FORMAT BIT RATE HD I AUDIO CH HD ASPECT RATIO DV COUNTRY CLIP CONT REC INTERVAL REC INTERVAL TIME NUMBER OF FRAME NUMBER OF TIMES PRE LIGHTING PICTURE CACHE CACHE REC TIME ASSIGNABLE ASSIGN SW 1 ASSIGN SW 2 ASSIGN SW 3 ASSIGN SW 4 DELETE LAST CLIP DISC DELETE ALL CLIPS QUICK FORMAT CLIP TITLE CLIP TITLE TITLE SELECT PREFIX CLEAR NUMERIC LOAD PREFIX DATA PREFIX NUMERIC FILE NAMING NAMING FORM AUTO NAMING GAIN LOW GAIN SW I GAIN MID GAIN HIGH GAIN TURBO EZ MODE TLCS OFFSET WHITE TLCS MODE AGC LIMIT AGC CHANGE POINT AE LIMIT AE CHANGE POINT OFFSET WHITE A Continued WARM COOL lt A gt COLOR FINE lt A gt OF FSET WHITE lt B gt t WARM COOL lt B gt COLOR FINE lt B gt Menu Organization and Operation Menu selection 1st level 2nd level 3rd level OUTPUT COMPONENT OUT HD SD PLAY BACK i LINK MODE VIDEO OUT VIDEO OUT VFDISP VIDEO OUT MENU VIDEO OUT TC VIDEO OUT ZEBRA VIDEO OUT MARKER I VF SETTING ZEBRA I ZEBRA SELECT ZEBRA1 DET LEVEL I PEAKING VOL
107. ENT QUT HD SD PLAY BACK oooooooooe CWUDNOVIBWN OOITITIOODUY M Setting item selection mode 1000UTPUT TOP COMPONENT QUT AUTO HD SD PLAY BACK 16 9 y Setting value selection mode eCOMPONENT QUT HD SD PLAY BACKS If the TOP menu has not been displayed since the camcorder is powered on TOP does not appear at the upper right on the above screen and you cannot go to the Menu Organization and Operation TOP menu In this case follow the procedure in display the TOP menu on page 129 To display the TOP menu when another menu is displayed Move to TOP displayed at the top right of each page of the menu and press the MENU knob Or flick the MENU switch repeatedly to ON until the TOP menu is displayed Using the USER Menu Example Menu Operation This section explains menu operations using the USER menu as an example The operations are the same for the ALL OPERATION PAINT MAINTENANCE FILE DIAGNOSIS and ADVANCED menus For details about how to operate the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu see Editing the USER Menu on page 131 1 Flick the MENU switch to ON Normally the USER menu appears If it does not turn the MENU knob to move to USER in the TOP menu and press the MENU knob If the USER menu has been used before the last accessed page appears In this case go to step 2 If this is the first time the USER menu has been displayed the CONTENTS pa
108. ESET REGEN CLOCK switch to PRESET 4 Set the F RUN SET R RUN switch to SET The first leftmost digit of timecode flashes D Use the SEL SET button four way arrow key to set the timecode value including the last rightmost digit of the timecode To reset the timecode value to 00 00 00 00 press the RESET button on the right side of the LCD monitor When the frame frequency of this unit is 23 98P a timecode frame count can only be set to a multiple of 4 0 4 8 12 16 or 20 6 Set the FRUN SET R RUN switch to the desired operating mode for the timecode generator F RUN Free run The timecode generator keeps running R RUN Recording run The timecode generator runs only while recording To set the DF drop frame NDF non drop frame mode You can select the drop frame DF mode or non drop frame NDF mode on the TIME CODE page of the MAINTENANCE menu When the frame frequency of this unit is 23 98P recorded timecode is always non drop frame NDF To make the timecode consecutive When the F RUN SET R RUN switch is set to R RUN recording a number of scenes to the disc normally produces consecutive timecode However once you remove the disc and record to another disc the timecode will no longer be contiguous even when you use again the original disc for recording In this case by setting the PRESET REGEN CLOCK switch to REGEN the timecode can be made continuous To save the actual time in the timecode
109. FILE LOAD gt MEM 1 5 and press the MENU knob The message RECALL OK YES NO appears Y P S C D L 001 5 002 5 003 004 5 005 5 5 carry the recall select YES and press the MENU knob To cancel press the MENU knob leaving pointing to NO When loading is complete the message COMPLETE appears and the access indicator goes off The scene files loaded from the Memory Stick overwrite data saved in the camcorder memory To load the scene file saved in the camcorder memory when the Memory Stick is inserted return to the POO SCENE RECALL page and load the desired scene file in the camcorder memory When there is no file to be loaded shown as NO FILE an existing file of the same number is unaffected In the example shown in step 4 MEM 3 is not overwritten Resetting the Settings of the Camcorder to the Standard Settings You can reset the settings of the camcorder to the standard settings How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the desired item 1 Display the SCENE FILE page of the FILE menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic Menu Operations on page 129 2 Select STANDARD and press the MENU knob FO40SCENE FILE 05 ESTANDARD L1 displayed on the left of STANDARD changes to Bl When W changes to O once again the settings of the camcorder are reset to the setting
110. FT button and press this button to step back through the division process For details of the expand function see page 80 COUNTER CHAPTER counter display toggle chapter button Each time this button is pressed the counter display section changes as follows This setting is activated only when the LCD monitor display is set to STATUS with the DISPLAY EXPAND button COUNTER Displays the elapsed recording playback time TC Displays timecode U BIT Displays user bits data If you press this button when the thumbnail screen is displayed those frames on which essence marks are recorded appear in a list chapter function Press the button once more to return to the normal thumbnail display By displaying thumbnails with essence marks attached in place of index frames you can check the contents of clips more easily and more quickly This is also useful for cueing up long clips For details of the chapter function see page 79 Q RESET button Resets the display of the time data when the LCD monitor display is set to STATUS or CHAR with the DISPLA Y EXPAND button According to the settings of the PRESET REGEN CLOCK switch see page 21 and the F RUN SET R RUN switch see page 21 this button resets the display as follows Settings of buttons and To reset switches COUNTER CHAPTER button Counter to 0 00 00 00 COUNTER Location and Function of Parts Settings of buttons and To reset switches
111. G The color temperature is too low Use COLOR TEMP the 5600K button for proper setting LOW AWB NG Adjustment could not be completed TIME LIMIT within the standard number of attempts Try to adjust again If adjustment fails a few times contact your Sony dealer AWB NG The white area could not be checked POOR WHITE AREA AWB NG The white video level is too high Either OVER LEVEL stop down the lens iris or change the ND filter If any of the above error messages is displayed retry the white balance adjustment If the error message occurs repeatedly contact your Sony dealer If you have no time to adjust the white balance Set the WHITE BAL switch to PRST The white balance is automatically set as follows depending on the state of the 5600K button e 5600K button lit 5600K e 5600K button not lit 3200K About the white balance memory Values stored in memory are held until the white balance is next adjusted Recording Basic Operations There are two sets of white balance memories A and B which you can switch between with the WHITE BAL switch PRST A B On the WHITE SETTING page of the MAINTENANCE menu when WHT FILTER INH is set to OFF there are two memories A and B for each position of the ND filter of this unit CLEAR 4 ND 1 16 ND and 4 ND In this case the memory is switched as you change the ND filter position for a total of eight 4x2 memories If a memory error occurs If the e
112. ION USER CODE TIME ZONE 00 RESET PAINT ALL PRESET A IRIS DETAIL LEVEL MASTER BLACK GAMMA SELECT MASTER GAMMA BLACK GAMMA PRESET MTX SEL SW STATUS GAMMA MATRIX KNEE WHITE CLIP DETAIL WHITE COLOR TEMP A C TEMP BAL A R GAIN lt A gt B GAIN lt A gt D5600K lt A gt COLOR TEMP B C TEMP BAL B R GAIN lt B gt B GAIN lt B gt D5600K lt B gt KNEE KNEE POINT KNEE SLOPE KNEE SAT LEVEL WHITE CLIP LEVEL DETAIL DETAIL LEVEL DTL H V RATIO DETAIL FREQUENCY APERTURE LEVEL APT LEVEL SD DETAIL CROSS COLOR SKIN DETAIL SKIN DETAIL _ SKIN DETAIL LVL SKIN DETECT SKIN AREA IND F SKIN DTL SAT SKIN DTL HUE SKIN DTL WIDTH MATRIX 1 Continued MATRIX USER MATRIX USER MATRIX SAT USER MATRIX HUE PRESET MTX PRESET MTX SEL Menu Organization and Operation Menu selection 1st level 2nd level 3rd level MATRIX 2 _ USER MATRIX R G USER MATRIX R B USER MATRIX G R USER MATRIX G B USER MATRIX B R USER MATRIX B G LOW KEY SAT L KEY SAT LEVEL
113. Indicators in the Problem VDR operation Action to take display on indicator sound viewfinder the LCD monitor viewfinder screen Warning 3f Conti Continuous REC BATT indication 7 5 beep TALLY 1 flash s ey 0 m 1 beep s 2 Continuous 4flashes s inp 1 flash s 4 beeps s um e e X 4 flashes s DISC xk 4 9 c 4 Disc full Recording stops Change the disc FULL 4 MAX Clips ye 4 e 9 xc 4 The upper Cannot record Change the disc limit of 300 recorded clips has been reached LOW BATT 9 sy 5 Battery almost Operation Change the battery 2 exhausted continues BATT xc 25005 p yt Battery Operation stops Change the battery EMPTY i i exhausted High TEMP Internal Operation Power the unit off i temperature continues and move it to a high cool place ACC Sensor x 9 Internal drive Operation Protect the unit u sensorerror continues from shock and RN sengor vibrations turn off the power and contact your Sony dealer 1 Asterisks are replaced by digits in the display 2 During recording 3 During playback fast forward fast reverse or stop 4 During recording pause 5 During recording or pause A message for VDR operation is displayed in the setting change and adjustment progress message display area of the viewfinder screen see page 29 Disc Meaning and action to tak
114. LINK I DETAIL LEVEL I V DETAIL LEVEL I DETAIL FREQ L VF ASPECT l MARKER MARKER I CENTER I SAFETY ZONE I SAFETY AREA I ASPECT ASPECT SELECT VF DISP 1 DISP REC FORMAT DISP BIT RATE I DISP SYSTEM I DISP FRAME RATE I DISP 16 9 I DISP ZOOM I DISP FOCUS I DISP BATT REMAIN I DISP REC PLAY L DISP TIME CODE VF DISP 2 DISP 5600K m DISP FILTER I DISP WHITE I DISP GAIN I DISP SHUTTER I DISP AUDIO I DISP DISC I DISP IRIS I DISP LOW LIGHT DISP INTERVAL LCD LCD COLOR LCD MARKER amp ZEBRA SHOT ID ID 1 ID 2 ID 3 L ID 4 o 9g o io o i o T o wn amp a o SHOT DISP SHOT DATE I DATE MODE SHOT TIME I TIME MODE SHOT ID SEL LENS FILE SEL LENS FILE SELECT m F ID m L ID L MF Continued Continued Menu Organization and Operation 1 01 sBumes pejreyeq pue s ejdsigq nua 2 102 Menu selection Continued PAINT 1st level 2nd level 3rd level TIME DATE ADJUST HOUR MIN SEC YEAR MONTH DAY UMID SET COUNTRY CODE ORGANIZAT
115. LLY indicator function Battery attachment shoe Attach a BP GL95 GL65 L60S L80S Battery Pack Alternatively you can attach an AC DN2B DN10 AC Adaptor to operate the camcorder on AC power supply For details about how to attach the battery or AC adaptor see Preparing a Power Supply on page 31 For information about attaching a synthesized tuner see Attaching a UHF Synthesized Tuner on page 42 For your safety and to ensure proper operation of the camcorder Sony recommends the use of the following battery packs BP GL95 BP GL65 BP L60S and BP 180 WRR connector 7 pin Connect a CA WR855 Camera Adaptor with attached WRR 855 UHF Synthesized Tuner For details see Attaching a UHF Synthesized Tuner on page 42 1 Connector panel Q Memory Stick slot DC IN connector AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 connectors and input selection switches BDV OUT S400 connector M9SIAJOAQ J8 deUD DC OUT 12V D AUDIO OUT CH 1 CH 2 connector connectors REMOTE VIDEO OUT connector connector DD TC connector and IN OUT selector switch Q Memory Stick slot Memory Stick access indicator Memory Stick Insert a Memory Stick The Memory Stick access indicator lights up when the Memory Stick is being accessed for reading or writing For details about how to insert a Memory Stick see To insert a Memory Stick on page 145 For details about the types of Memory S
116. Loosen this knob to adjust the front to back position of the viewfinder see page 37 Lid of the disc compartment This opens when the EJECT button on the top panel is pressed Press the side of the lid to close Accessory fitting shoe Attach an optional accessory such as a video light see page 40 Q Shoulder strap fitting Attach the supplied shoulder strap see page 39 Viewfinder left to right positioning ring Loosen this ring to adjust the left to right position of the viewfinder see page 37 Viewfinder fitting shoe Attach the supplied viewfinder Fitting for optional microphone holder Fit an optional CAC 12 Microphone Holder see page 41 LIGHT video light connector 2 pin female A video light with a maximum power consumption of 50 W such as the Anton Bauer Ultralight 2 or equivalent can be connected see page 40 MIC IN microphone input 48 V connector XLR type 5 pin female Connect the supplied stereo microphone to this connector The power 48 V is supplied via this connector D Shoulder pad Raise the shoulder pad fixing lever to adjust the position in the front to rear direction Adjust the position for maximum convenience when operating the unit on your shoulder For details of the adjustment see Adjusting the Shoulder Pad Position on page 39 Location and Function of Parts 1 Video output and timecode connectors GENLOCK IN connector GENLOCK IN
117. MBNAIL button turning the THUMBNAIL indicator off At any point in the procedure you can return to the previous screen with this operation The factory default setting is to use the first frame of a clip as its thumbnail image At recording time you can change this to another frame within 10 frames of the start of the clip page 65 You can also change it to any frame at playback time page 78 However the thumbnail search function always cues up the first frame in a clip even if the thumbnail image has been changed Switching the Information Displayed in the Thumbnail Screen You can switch the clip information displayed at the bottom of thumbnails You can also switch the display of thumbnail sequence numbers The factory default setting is TIME CODE Proceed as follows 1 with the thumbnail screen displayed hold down the SHIFT button and press the SEL SET button to the bottom side the CLIP MENU side The CLIP menu appears See page 95 for more information about the CLIP menu CLIP CO0002 CLIP MENU 002 034 LOAD CLIP LIST DELETE CLIP LIST SORT CLIP LIST BY SET INDEX PICTURE DELETE CLIP SHIFT RESET LOCK UNLOCK CLIP SHIFT STOP LOCK OR DELETE ALL CLIPS 00 28 22 02 fd TC 00 28 34 10 30 NOV 2005 13 36 DUR 0 00 07 20 2 Use the SEL SET button or MENU knob to select CLIP INFORMATION and then press the button or knob A sub menu appears Thumbnail Search xXoeqKe d pue
118. NITOR connector When the remote control unit is disconnected from the camcorder The camcorder settings return to the settings in effect before the remote control unit was connected Structure of the paint adjustment data The non volatile memory of the camcorder used for storing paint adjustment data consists of two regions as shown below one is the independent data region that is used when a remote control unit is not connected and the other is the remote control data region that is used when aremote control unit is connected Paint adjustment data is automatically selected and output to the camera section depending on whether or not a remote control unit such as the RM B150 is connected Non volatile memory Independent data region MASTER BLACK MASTER GAMMA d KNEE POINT 2 ihe DETAIL LEVEL camcorder R B GAIN Hardware L s R B BLACK of the E esee camera Remote control Section PINGBISU data region e MASTER BLACK MASTER GAMMA KNEE POINT o o RM B150 connected POR o o RM B150 not R B BLACK connected Thus when a remote control unit is connected to the camcorder the effective data region is switched to the remote control data region and the settings of the paint adjustment that were in effect the last time the remote control unit was used are recalled The settings of the absolute value rotational controls 1 and absolute value switches
119. NK cable for example by re plugging the i LINK cable Turn the power off and connect the cable again Change the i LINK cable The camera is not recognized by the computer connected via i LINK interface The camera cannot be controlled by the computer connected via i LINK interface There is a problem with the software for example it does not support the MPEG HD DVCAM format etc Install software that supports the MPEG HD DVCAM format To eject the disc when there is no power supply When the battery is exhausted for example pressing the EJECT button does not operate the disc ejection mechanism In such cases as an emergency measure you can remove the disc manually using the following procedure 1 Tum off the power supply to the unit 2 Carry out the following operations Open the rubber cap to reveal an access hole 2 With a screwdriver or similar instrument slide the black metal plate in the access hole toward the rear of the unit The lid of the disc compartment opens The red colored cross recessed head screw can be seen in the access xipueddy hole 3 Use a Phillip type screwdriver to turn the red Screw counterclockwise in the direction shown on the rubber cap This ejects the disc Replace the rubber cap firmly in position After removing the disc it is not necessary to return the screw to its original position When the power supply is re
120. NOSIS menu and then press the MENU knob The current settings for each item are displayed on the right side To create a list of title prefix strings Prepare the data beforehand according to the following rules File name Assign the name TITLES TXT to the file Input format Enter title prefixes one at time separated by newline CRLF characters Prefixes can be up to 10 characters long A prefix file can contain up to 20 prefixes Allowable characters e Digits 0 to 9 e Alphabetic characters a to z A to Z The following symbols 90 amp 5 semicolon comma period _ underscore Space Title prefix list example Tennis lt CRLF gt Basketball lt CRLF gt Skiing_1 lt CRLF gt Skiing_2 lt CRLF gt To transfer a title prefix list to the unit s internal memory Proceed as follows 1 Copy the title prefix file TITLES TXT to the following folder on the Memory Stick MSSON Y PRO XDCAM GENERAL VAL_LIST This folder is created when you insert a Memory Stick into the camcorder Do not create this folder yourself on a computer nsert a Memory Stick with the title prefix file 21 Memory Stick with the title prefix fil TITLES TXT into the Memory Stick slot of the camcorder On the CLIP TITLE page select LOAD PREFIX DATA and then press the MENU knob MEMORY STICK ACCESS appears and the file on the
121. NU knob 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to enter the remaining digits D When you have finished entering the value turn the y MENU knob to move the Bl mark to END and then press the MENU knob The camcorder exits numeric input mode and the original CLIP TITLE page appears To check the titles of recorded clips Press the THUMBNAIL button to display the thumbnail screen and then select the clip whose title you want to check The title of the selected clip appears in the upper left of the screen See Cuing up with sub clip thumbnails page 81 for more information about the thumbnail screen It is not possible to specify 00000 as the initial value Even if you enter 00000 the value is reset to 00001 when the camcorder exits numeric input mode The value of the serial number is incremented by 1 every time a title is generated When the value reaches 99999 the next number restarts from 00001 Duplicate clip titles can be generated if you reset the serial number after recording several clips or the same is true depending on the value setting Care should be taken when setting the serial number Assigning User Defined Clip and Clip List Names The following standard format names are assigned automatically to clips and clip lists that are created or recorded by XDCAM devices Clips C0001 to C0300 Clip lists E0001E01 to E0099E01 You can use the supplied PDZ 1 Proxy Browsing Software to assign user defined names instead of th
122. OUT selector switch IN To apply an external lock to the timecode input the reference timecode IN OUT selector switch OUT To lock the timecode of an external VTR to the timecode of this unit connect this connector to the external VTR s timecode input connector Q VIDEO OUT video output connector BNC type Outputs a video signal for a video monitor When the output signal is composite setting menus timecode or shot data can be superimposed on the camera output video depending on the menu settings and you can view them on the monitor screen To lock the timecode of an external device to the timecode of this unit connect the genlock signal input connector of the external device to this connector The subcarrier phsase cannot be adjusted Video signals are not output if the connection destinations of these connectors are not terminated properly Q AUDIO OUT CH 1 CH 2 audio output channel 1 2 connectors phono jacks Output the audio singnals being recorded or played back Connect to a stereo amplifier or video monitor s audio input connectors VCL 719BXS Auto Focus Lens Supplied with the PDW F335K Auto focus indicator Iris ring Q Zoom ring Q Focus ring Q Flange focal length adjustment button Q Focus control connector Zoom control connector ZOOM switch 1 control 14 1 2 IRIS button QD IRIS switch Power zoom lever RET
123. OWER switch Insert the WRR 855 into the CA WRS55 Fasten the screws supplied with the WRR 855 Engage the V shaped plate on the back of the CA WR855 with the V groove on the battery attachment shoe and then slide the CA WR855 down until it connects to the WRR connector Set the AUDIO IN switch to WIRELESS for CH 1 CH 2 or W for CH 3 CH 4 To attach a WRR 861 862 When using a BP GL95 GL65 L60S L80S Battery Pack 1 Attach a WRR tuner fitting not supplied service part number A 8278 057 B to the back of the camcorder 2 4 5 Use a Phillips type screwdriver to tighten the four screws placed in the tuner fitting as illustrated below Check that the four screws are firmly tightened 2 Loosen the adjustment screws of the tuner fitting 3 Adjust the tuner fitting position for a BP GL95 GL65 L60S L80S Battery Pack to be attached and tighten the adjustment screws to fix its position 2 Attach the mount plate supplied with the WRR 861 862 BP GL95 GL65 L60S L80S Mount plate supplied Adjustment with WRR 861 862 Screws Back of the camcorder Attach the battery pack For details about attaching the battery pack see Using a Battery Pack on page 31 Mount the tuner on the WRR tuner fitting WRR 861 862 For details about the WRR tuner fitting service part number A 8278 057 B contact your Sony dealer Connect the tuner power cord to the DC OUT connector o
124. Operations on page 129 2 Select IRIS OVERRIDE and press the MENU knob Turn the MENU knob to select ON and press the MENU knob This enables the function that adjusts the reference value during shooting You can adjust the value by simply turning the MENU knob Recording Basic Operations xoeqKe d pue e Jaydeyo 59 xoeg e g pue 60 Leaving MENU knob in the current position for few seconds sets the reference value When the RM B150 B750 Remote Control Unit is connected The IRIS control knob of the RM B150 B750 can be used for lens iris setting In this case the bar display 0 does not appear To adjust the iris sensitivity When you use the VCL 719BXS lens supplied with PDW F335K you usually need not adjust the iris sensitivity because lenses are equipped with iris sensitivity adjustment function In auto iris mode if hunting or response delay happens adjust the iris sensitivity using the iris sensitivity trimmer Example For the lens VCL 719BXS supplied with the PDW F335K Iris sensitivity trimmer labeled S IRIS GAIN etc Remove the rubber cap on the front of the lens drive unit to reveal the iris sensitivity trimmer Use a mini screwdriver to turn the trimmer Turn it clockwise to increase the sensitivity and turn it counterclockwise to decrease the sensitivity It is recommended that you check the iris sensiti
125. PEAKING controls to give the best color bar display Check the following points in the listed order The menu is displayed on the viewfinder screen Turn the MENU knob and check that the menu page changes to the next page Press the MENU knob and check that settings of each item of the selected page are displayed Turn the MENU knob and check that the mark moves within the page Press the MENU knob and check that the mark placed before the item changes to a mark and the Q mark placed before the setting of the item changes to a mark Turn the MENU knob and check that the setting of the selected item changes Set the OUTPUT DCC switch to CAM and change the FILTER selector position in the sequence of 1 2 3 4 Check that the FILTER indicator on the viewfinder screen displays the correct numbers Move the SHUTTER switch from ON to SEL repeatedly and check that the shutter setting changes on the viewfinder screen Pointing the camera at a suitable subject focus the camera and check the picture on the viewfinder screen Set both of the AUDIO IN switches to FRONT and check that when sound is input to a microphone connected to the MIC IN connector on the front of the camcorder the audio level indicators appear on the viewfinder screen Check that setting the ZEBRA button to ON and OFF makes the zebra pattern appear and disappear on the viewfinder screen The results of checking in steps 3 to 8 may not be as
126. SER F ID USER File ID that has been set appears After setting the file ID carry out the procedure from step 2 in Saving USER Menu Data User File to the Memory Stick on page 146 The set file ID is saved in the Memory Stick with the data To select the file information items to be displayed You can select the file information items to be displayed on the USER FILE SAVE page and USER FILE LOAD page to P19 that are the pages used to save and call up the data to and from Memory Stick How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the desired item 1 Display a USER FILE LOAD page or USER FILE SAVE page of the USER FILE menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic Menu Operations on page 129 2 Press the MENU knob then select the DISPLAY MODE and press the MENU knob Select the desired type of file information see the following table and press the MENU knob Display type Description ALL File ID 10 characters and date year month day EID File ID 16 characters DATE Date saved year month day hours minutes seconds MODEL Information on the model Loading Saved Data from a Memory Stick The data loaded from the Memory Stick overwrites the data saved in the camcorder Saving and Loading User Files How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move th
127. SLS mode a certain number of black frames are recorded at the top of the recorded clip The number of black frames depends on the SLS setting During disc playback During thumbnail display page 76 1 Carry out the steps in To set the shutter mode and the standard mode shutter speed on page 57 to set the shutter mode to SLS SLS 1 15 2FRAME 2 Turn the MENU knob until the desired number of frames appears The number of frames can be set to values in the range 2 to 8 16 32 and 64 1 frame nearly equals to Man second Adjusting the Iris Turning the auto iris function on and off When the lens IRIS switch is in the A position the auto iris function is on when in the M position the function is off When this unit is operating in EZ mode the auto iris is forced ON To set the automatic iris The reference value for automatic iris adjustment can be changed to aid the shooting of clear pictures of back lit subjects or to prevent blown out highlights To change the reference value How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the desired item 1 Display the PAINT age of the PAINT menu and play press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic Menu Operations on page 129 2 Select A IRIS and press the MENU knob P B D M G M B P UoUoooo 3 Turn the MENU knob to select the reference value from the following and press th
128. SONY 3 271 548 11 1 Professional Disc Camcorder Operating Instructions ing t nit please read this manua thoroughly and retain it for future reference Professio t DL DVCAM b oos CINEALTA PDW F335L PDW F335K 2007 Sony Corporation 2 Owner s Record The model and serial numbers are located on the top Record these numbers in the spaces provided below Refer to them whenever you call upon your Sony dealer regarding this product Model No Serial No To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock do not expose this apparatus to rain or moisture To avoid electrical shock do not open the cabinet Refer servicing to qualified personnel only CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT LASER KLASSE 1 PRODUKT LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE KLASS 1 LASERAPPARAT This Professional Disc Camcorder is classified as a CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT Laser diode properties Wavelength 400 to 410 nm Emission duration Continuous Laser output power 135 mW max of pulse peak 65 mW max of CW Tekniska data f r laserdiod Vaglangd 400 till 410 nm Emissionsl ngd Kontinuerlig Laseruteffekt 135 mW max f r pulstopp 65 mW max f r kontinuerlig v g Spesifikasjoner laserdiode B lgelengde 400 til 410 nm Str lingens varighet Kontinuerlig Laserens effekt 135 mW maks str letoppunkt 65 mW maks ved kontinuerlig str ling Laserdiodin ominaisuudet Aallon pituus 400 410 nm V lityksen kesto Jatku
129. SPECIAL EFFECTS page of the OPERATION menu Notes on Interval Rec mode Audio In Interval Rec mode audio recording is not possible Playback control buttons While recording in Interval Rec mode you cannot use the playback control buttons EJECT F REV PLAY PAUSE F FWD PREV STOP and NEXT To use these buttons stop recording by pressing the REC button on the camcorder or the REC button on the lens Menu operation While recording in the Interval Rec mode the INTERVAL TIME and other settings cannot be changed To change the settings stop recording by pressing the REC button on the camcorder or the REC button on the lens Timecode In Interval Rec mode the internal timecode generator operates in R RUN mode Recording Advanced Operations xXoeqKe d pue Bulpiovey e 67 yoeqhe q pue g 68 Starting a Shoot with a Few Seconds of Pre Stored Picture Data Picture Cache Function The camcorder has a large capacity internal memory in which you can cache the last few seconds maximum 12 seconds of captured video and audio so that recording starts from a point just before you press the REC START button or VTR button on the lens The Picture Cache function is enabled only with the camcorder s recording mode is set to MPEG HD When you switch to DVCAM recording mode the Picture Cache function is forcibly turned off and you cannot turn it on Setting the Pictur
130. TMIC VIDEO OUT AUDIO IN LOWCUT CHARACTER 6 H H o 20 ERE t gt 1 With the SUB CLIP indicator off hold down the SHIFT button and press the THUMBNAIL button The essence mark selection screen appears CLIP COO08 005 037 ESSENCE MARK SELECT SHOT MARK1 SHOT MARK2 REC START 7 30 NOV 2005 13 38 DUR 0 00 10 23 Essence marks not recorded on the disc appear in gray To escape from the essence mark selection screen to the previous screen Press the RESET button on the right side of the LCD monitor Use the SEL SET button or the MENU knob to select the desired essence mark Press the SEL SET button or the MENU knob Thumbnails of the frames including the selected essence mark appear The example shows the case where SHOT MARKI is selected as the essence mark This indicates that the thumbnail Sixth frame is selected images are the frames including the from a total of 36 SHOT essence mark SHOT MARK1 MARK 1 Frame information date and time of creation timecode recording time SHOT MARKi ENNEC 3 TE 00 24 45 25 TC 00 27 19 25 TC O00 20 08 17 C 00 28 22 15 ml 3 TC 00 26 95 00 EC TC 00 28 55 02 C 00 29 10 0f TC 00 29 20 03 30 NOV 2005 13 40 mui 0 00 05 16 Currently selected SHOT MARK1 frame Time from the Recording date and time of the clip selected short mark to that contains the selected frame the next shot mark Searching Us
131. To edit a clip list on the disc Create and edit a clip list Including sub clips in the current clip list see page 88 Reordering sub clips see page 92 Adjusting the sub clip In Out points trimming see page 92 Deleting sub clips see page 93 Save the clip list to disc see page 93 Play back the clip list see page 80 Disc Load clip lists see page 96 Clip 1 Clip 3 Clip 4 gt Sub clip 1 Sub clip 2 Sub clip 3 Recorded material Select clips Clip list 1 Clip 1 Clip list 1 Clip 2 lt Clp3 Disc Sub clip 1 Sub clip 2 Sub clip 3 Play back clip list Overview Clip Material recorded with this unit is managed in units called clips A clip contains the material between a recording start point and a recording end point Clips have numbers beginning with C for example C0001 Recording start point of Recording end clip 2 point of clip 2 l l Clip 1 Clip 2 Clip 3 Clip 4 C0001 C0002 C0003 C0004 Clip number 0067034 E 7 M TC 00 24 49 11 TC DG 4 TC 00 27 10 04 amisi TC 00 28 22 02 I TC 00 20 34 109 TC DO 28 54 22 30 NOV 2005 13 38 DUR 0 00 10 23 Instead of using clip numbers you can manage clips by assigning clip titles or names For details see To assign user defined titles automatically when clips are recorded on page 70 and Assigning User Def
132. USER menu page 03 Description See Selecting the Recording Format on page 53 File 02 SPECIAL EFFECTS CLIP CONT REC INTERVAL REC ON OFF OFF INTERVAL TIME 1SEC to 10SEC 15SEC 20SEC 30SEC 40SEC 50SEC 1MIN to 10MIN 15MIN 20MIN 30MIN 40MIN 50MIN 1H to 6H 12H 24H 1SEC NUMBER OF FRAME 1F S3F 6F 1F NUMBER OF TIMES CONT 50 100 200 300 500 800 1000 CONT PRE LIGHTING OFF 2SEC 5SEC 10SEC PICTURE CACHE ON OFF OFF CACHE REC TIME 0 2s 2 45 4 65 6 85 8 10s 10 12s 0 2s 04 See Recording with the Clip Continuous Rec Function on page 74 See Time lapse Video Recording Interval Rec Function on page 66 See Starting a Shoot with a Few Seconds of Pre Stored Picture Data Picture Cache Function on page 68 03 ASSIGNABLE ASSIGN SW 1 ASSIGN SW 2 ASSIGN SW 3 ASSIGN SW 4 OFF MARKER ATW LENS RET REC SWITCH TURBO SWITCH etc EZMOD OFF 05 See Assigning Functions to ASSIGN Switches on page 141 Menu Organization and Operation OPERATION menu No Page Item Settings Default USER Description File menu page 04 DISC DELETE LAST CLIP EXEC EXEC 06 De
133. UTPUT BARS DCC OFF A color bar signal is output and the DCC circuit does not operate Use this setting to adjust the video monitor to record the color bar signal etc OUTPUT CAM DCC OFF The video signal from the camera is output and the DCC circuit does not operate OUTPUT CAM DCC ON The video signal from the camera is output and the DCC circuit operates DISPLAY EXPAND button COUNTER CHAPTER button RESET button BRIGHT button DISPLAY EXPAND button Each time pressing this button the display in the LCD monitor changes as follows Location and Function of Parts Ja deUD 15 Display indication Meaning Video with When the MENU switch is flicked superimposed toward STATUS the principal settings information of this unit appear as on the viewfinder screen M Q 491deuoS 16 Video without superimposed information The video only appears Counter indications warnings audio levels and similar information Status display appears No video image appears If you press this button when the thumbnail screen is displayed the duration of the selected clip is divided into 12 and the first frame of each of the divisions is shown in a further thumbnail display expand function Each time you press the button the division is repeated to a maximum of three times with 1728 divisions Hold down the SHI
134. Y PAUSE button you can review any length of recording on the viewfinder screen in black and white or in color on the LCD monitor There are two other ways to review the recording Recording review You can view the last two seconds of the recording on the viewfinder screen in black and white or in color on the LCD monitor Using an external color video monitor You can see the recording in color on a color video monitor without the need for any external adaptor You may also view the picture during a fast forward or fast reverse search See Side control panel inside the protection cover on page 19 for details about the switches and controls used to select the audio output signal and to adjust the audio level Deteriorating playback conditions Deteriorating playback may be due to the following causes Scratches and dust on the disc surface This includes fingerprints dust from the air tar from cigarette smoke and so on Scratches and soiling which occur before recording are not a problem because they are registered in advance as defects and recording avoids them However scratches and soiling which occur after recording can lead to deteriorating playback conditions Aging of disc recording layers Over several decades the recording layers of optical discs can age and cause deteriorating playback conditions Deteriorating laser diodes performance The performance of the laser diodes used in optical heads can worsen with
135. Yes 9 Yes Yes 0 a UTF 8 file names can be up to 63 bytes in length Depending on the character type file names including extension may be limited to 21 characters b Only when the Write Inhibit tab on the disc is set to enable recording Overview The following directory operations are possible in the General directory Directory creation up to 64 levels including the General directory Deletion and renaming of directories The maximum number of files that can be created on one disc including directories is 5000 File names and directory names can use letters numbers and symbols U from the Unicode 2 0 UTF 8 character set However the following control characters and symbols cannot be used Control characters U 0000 to U 001F U 007F Symbols lt gt 1 The following character codes cannot be used by FAM connections U 010000 U 020000 U 030000 U 040000 U 050000 U 060000 0U 70000 U 080000 U 090000 U 0A0000 U 0B0000 U 0C0000 U 0D0000 U 0E0000 U 0F0000 U 100000 To create a new directory in the General directory first create a directory on the desktop and rename it using only characters that can be used on this unit Then drag it from the desktop and drop it in the General directory File Access Mode File Operations File access mode operating environment Operating system requirements for file operations by file access mode call
136. Z Ja deup 157 uonejedo aji4 Ja deup 158 File data Transfer of files O Laptop computer etc PDW F335 F335P i LINK cable not supplied Windows recognizes this unit as aremovable disc and displays one of the following icons on the remote computer s task bar Windows 2000 E Windows XP ees The remote computer is now able to perform file operations when a disc is inserted into this unit Operation limitations during FAM connections With the exception of the EJECT button recording buttons and playback control buttons are disabled The VDR of this unit cannot be controlled from devices connected to the REMOTE connector 8 pin and DV IN OUT S400 connector There is no signal output from this unit while video is being input to this unit from external equipment Operating on files Proceed as follows 1 Start Explorer Check that a drive letter has been assigned to this unit The drive letter will differ depending on the number of other peripherals connected to the remote computer 2 Use Explorer to perform file operations on the disc loaded in this unit You can operate in the same way that you operate on local drives and files on network computers f you power this unit off during an FAM connection the data transferred thus far is discarded All file operations are not possible for some types of files For details see Fil
137. ab Slide in the direction Write Inhibit tab settings of the arrow SAVE gt SAVE gt Recording enabled Recording disabled You can also write protect individual clips For details see Locking Write Protecting Clips page 81 Loading and Unloading a Disc Loading a disc Proceed as follows 1 Turn on the POWER switch POWER switch HUMID indicator If there is condensation inside the VDR section the message HUMID appears in the status display on the LCD monitor If this happens wait until the indicator goes off before going on to step 2 2 Press the EJECT button This opens the lid of the disc compartment EJECT button Lid of the disc compartment 3 Insert the disc in the V direction and close the disc compartment lid manually Insert the disc The disc is loaded To insert the disc correctly make sure that the camcorder is in the upright position the grip upside the bottom downside xoeqKe d pue e Unloading a disc With the power supply on press the EJECT button to open the disc compartment lid and eject the disc then remove the disc If you are not going to insert another disc close the disc compartment lid Formatting a Disc Using a new disc An unused disc requires no formatting operation The disc is automatically formatted so that it is ready to use when loaded into this unit Using a disc on which materi
138. age 93 f the contents of the current clip list is not saved to disc then ejecting the disc or powering off will destroy the data After creating a clip list be sure to save it to disc An asterisk appears after the date and time of creation when a clip list has not been saved to disc 2 Press the DISPLAY EXPAND button on the right of the LCD monitor The upper part of the screen shows thumbnails for the clip in eight divisions F 002 008 CLIP LISTCADD EXPAND 002 000 Tir 90 Creating Clip Lists To vary the expansion ratio Each time you press the DISPLAY EXPAND button changes the ratio through the sequence x8 x64 x512 To return to the previous setting hold down the SHIFT button and press the DISPLAY EXPAND button to step back one level The maximum number of divisions may be 512 or greater when you expand clips with short recording times In this case the interval between the expanded thumbnail frames is fixed at 1 frame which allows you to view expanded thumbnails at a constant interval Use the SEL SET button or MENU knob to select the thumbnail for the part you want to include in the clip list To select two or more thumbnails hold down the SHIFT button and operate the MENU knob Even if more than one thumbnail is selected the addition to the current clip list is linked to a single sub clip 4 Press the SEL SET button or MENU knob The clip selected in the upper part i
139. al Disc adds high reliability to recording and playback and the unit also includes many playback and editing functions exploiting the possibilities of random access 1 XDCAM and Professional Disc are trademarks of Sony Corporation 2 HD High Definition 3 SD Standard Definition Camera Features 1 2 inch HD CCD The use of three interline transfer CCD with an effective pixel count of approximately 1 56 million 1440 x1080 enables high sensitivity high picture quality and high fineness video shooting Camera signal processing for high quality video A specially developed ASIC application specific integrated circuit for signal processing provides the following functions A 12 bit A D converter ensures recording of pictures stable at high quality Both progressive and interlace scan modes are supported You can select from five HD shooting recording modes 23 98 1 25 29 97P 2 501 and 59 941 3 for ideal support of various applications including digital cinema production program production and event video production For recording and playback in the DVCAM format SD the aspect ratio 16 9 4 3 and standard broadcasting system NTSC PAL can be freely selected Further when NTSC is selected video shot at 23 98P can also be subjected to 2 3 pulldown and recorded The recording format is then 59 941 1 In this system shown as 23 9P or 23 98P 2 In this system shown as 30P 3 In this system sh
140. al is recorded To format a recorded disc load the disc into the unit then do as follows When a recorded disc is formatted all the data on the disc is erased Locked clips see page 81 are also erased Handling Discs 49 yoeqhe q pue 50 How to select an item the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the desired item 1 Display the DISC page of the USER or OPERATION menu and press the MENU knob For details of menu operations see page 129 O04eDISC DELETE LAST CLIP DELETE ALL CLIPS BUICK FORMAT 2 Select QUICK FORMAT and press the MENU knob The message QUICK FORMAT OK YES NO appears 3 To carry out the formatting select YES and press the MENU knob To cancel press the MENU knob leaving NO selected When formatting is completed the message COMPLETED appears Handling of Discs When Recording Does Not End Normally Salvage Function Recording processing does not end normally if for example the battery pack is removed during recording or if the power cord is disconnected during recording Because the file system is not updated video and audio data recorded in real time is not recognized as files and clip contents recorded up to that point are lost However this unit has a salvage function which can hold losses to the minimum by reconstructing clips on such discs Note that no recorded clip contents are los
141. allows a laptop computer to be used for editing D allows content management on an inexpensive and compact server and makes many other applications easy to implement 1 Using the supplied PDZ 1 Proxy Browsing Software a simple EDL edit decision list can be created Saving general purpose files The Professional Disc has an area of approximately 500 MB provided for storing general purpose computer files Long recording times When dual layer Professional Discs are used this unit can record about 190 minutes in SP mode and about 185 minutes in DVCAM mode Recording and playback in clip units A clip is created each time recording is started and stopped Recording always writes to an empty area of the disc Therefore even if playback is carried out between shooting sessions there is no danger of the next shot inadvertently overwriting previous material During playback the next recorded can always be started immediately Since unwanted clips can be deleted on this unit immediately after they are recorded the disc capacity can be used effectively It is also possible to keep recording to the same clip even when recording stops and starts again In this manual this feature is called the Clip Continuous Rec function The Clip Continuous Rec function can be turned on and off from the menu system For details see Recording with the Clip Continuous Rec Function page 74 Features Convenient playback and search
142. ame for the IEEE1394 1995 standards and their revisions On devices from other manufacturers the amp i LINK DV OUT S400 connector may be called a FireWire port or indicated as IEEE 1394 or DV IN OUT XDCAM HD uses the i LINK interface to transfer DV streams by the AV C protocol and toread and write MPEG IMX and DVCAM data files by FAM File Access Mode Interlaced scan mode A scanning method in which odd rows fields are read alternately with even rows Odd row fields and even row fields contain images from different times IRE scale International Radio Engineers scale A scale of values that defines the brightness level of a video signal The IRE is now the IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers Metadata Information about the properties of video and audio content XDCAM records metadata such as UMIDs and Glossary essence marks and the supplied PDZ 1 Proxy Browsing Software can be used to record information such as titles and comments MXF Material eXchange Format A file exchange format developed by the Pro MPEG Forum Equipment from different manufacturers can exchange files in this format ND filter ND is an abbreviation of Neutral Density An optical filter that reduces the incident light uniformly across the whole wavelength range without affecting the color rendering of the subject Non drop frame mode A mode of advancing timecode which ignores the difference in fram
143. amp ON OFF ON Selects whether to add the marker ZEBRA and zebra to the LCD display in the same way as in the viewfinder 17 SHOTID ID 1 Displays Blank See Setting the Shot ID on page ID 2 character 137 input mode ID 3 up to 12 ID 4 characters 18 SHOT DISP SHOT DATE ON OFF OFF See Recording Shot Data A DATE MODE Y MID Y M D Superimposed on the Color Bars M D Y on page 137 D M Y SHOT TIME ON OFF OFF TIME MODE 12H 24H 24 SHOT ID SEL OFF ID 1 OFF ID 2 ID 3 ID 4 Menu Organization and Operation OPERATION menu No Page Item Settings Default USER Description File menu page 19 LENS FILE LENS FILE SELECT 1 to 32 Selects a lens file Up to 32 files L SEL can be registered F ID Indicates the name of the selected lens file L ID Indicates the name of the lens file corresponding to the connected serial lens L MF Indicates the fabricator of the connected serial lens 20 TIME DATE ADJUST Displays the EXEC See Setting the Date and Time of TIME the Internal Clock on page 34 ADJUST selection Screen HOUR 00 to 23 Internal MIN 00 to 59 clock SEC YEAR 00 to 99 MONTH 01 to 12 DAY 01 to 31 21 UMID SET COUNTRY CODE 4 byte See Using Data on page alphanumeric 171 ORGANIZATION strings USER CODE
144. ancel the trim Press the SEL SET button to the lower side CLIP MENU side Save the contents of the current clip list to disc See Saving the Current Clip List to Disc on page 93 Deleting Sub Clips Proceed as follows 1 2 Carry out step 1 of the procedure in Editing Clip Lists on page 92 to display the CLIP menu Use the SEL SET button or MENU knob to select DELETE and press the button or knob This switches to the screen for selecting a sub clip to be deleted Use the SEL SET button four way arrow key or MENU knob to select the sub clip to be deleted and press the button or knob To make a multiple selection hold down the SHIFT button and turn the MENU knob A confirmation message appears Select OK and press the button or knob This carries out the deletion To continue deleting sub clips With the SHIFT button held down press the SEL SET button or the MENU knob After the deletion is executed you return to the screen of step 3 instead of the CLIP menu This allows you to continue deleting Save the contents of the current clip list to disc Saving the Current Clip List to Disc Proceed as follows 1 Display the CLIP menu See To display the CLIP menu on page 95 Use the SEL SET button or MENU knob to select SAVE CLIP LIST with the cursor in the CLIP menu and press the button or knob This displays the list of clip lists For a clip list in which n
145. andard shooting conditions HISAT settings for high saturation shooting FL settings for fluorescent illumination CINE settings to evoke the impression of film camera shooting Menu Organization and Operation 115 sBumes pejreyeq pue sAejdsiq nua 1 2 116 PAINT menu No Page Item Settings Default USER Description File menu page 08 MATRIX 2 USER MATRIX R G 99t0 99 0 Sets the arbitrary R G user set A Sc St matrix coefficients USER MATRIX R B Sets the arbitrary R B user set matrix coefficients USER MATRIX G R Sets the arbitrary G R user set matrix coefficients USER MATRIX G B Sets the arbitrary G B user set matrix coefficients USER MATRIX B R Sets the arbitrary B R user set matrix coefficients USER MATRIX B G Sets the arbitrary B G user set matrix coefficients 09 LOW KEY L KEY SAT LEVEL 99 to 99 O Sets the saturation level of the low A Sc St SAT luminance part 10 SCENE FILE 01 STANDARD 02 Recalls a scene file saved in the camcorder memory 12 03 04 05 LISTANDARD Clears all current detail adjusted settings and switch settings and returns the settings to the standard settings saved in the reference file SCENE RECALL Displays the EXEC Recalls a scene file from the SCENE FILE camcorder memory or the selection Memory Stick SCENE STORE Sorgen Stores a scene file
146. annot use the unit without setting these items POWER switch MENU knob 1 Set the POWER switch to the ON position The screen for setting the area of use appears in the viewfinder FORMAT SETTING 32COUNTRY eNOT SELECTED E PLEASE SET COUNTRY E AND TURN OFF ONCE SREREEEEEEREEEEEEREEEER 2 Press the MENU knob The mark on the left of NOT SELECTED changes to a mark and you can now select the area of use FORMAT SETTING COUNTRY NOT SELECTED ET H PLEASE SET COUNTRY H AND TURN OFF ONCE H Setting the Area of Use and the Frame Frequency 3 Turn the MENU knob to display the desired area of use Setting Area of use NTSC J AREA NTSC area Japan NTSC AREA NTSC area for areas other than Japan b PAL AREA PAL area c a The composite signal output from this unitis an NTSC signal with no Setup The frame frequency can be selected as any of 60I 30P or 23 98P b The composite signal output from this unit is an NTSC signal with Setup 7 5 IRE The frame frequency can be selected as any of 601 or 23 98P c The composite signal output from this unit is a PAL signal The frame frequency can be selected as either 501 or 25 Setthe POWER switch to OFF then once again to ON The unit is now ready for use Proceed to the next operation setting the frame frequency Setting the Frame Frequency 1 3 Hold down t
147. ar this unit be powered off Note on laser beams Laser beams may damage the CCDs If you shoot a scene that includes a laser beam be careful not to let the laser beam be directed into the lens of the camera Use at a high temperature If the unit is used at a high temperature white flecks may appear on the screen Fitting the zoom lens It is important to fit the lens correctly as otherwise damage may result Be sure to refer to the section Mounting the Lens on page 35 Viewfinder Do not leave the unit with the eyepiece pointing directly at the sun The eyepiece lens can concentrate the sun s rays and melt the interior of the viewfinder Do not use the viewfinder close to strong magnetic fields This can cause picture distortion About the LCD panels LCD panels are manufactured with extremely high precision technology that yields effective pixel rates of 99 99 or higher However very rarely one or more pixels may be permanently dark or permanently lit in white red blue or green This phenomenon is not a malfunction Such pixels have no effect on the recorded data and the unit may be used with confidence even if they are present Phenomena Specific to CCD Image Sensors The following phenomena that may appear in images are specific to CCD Charge Coupled Device image sensors They do not indicate malfunctions White flecks Although the CCD image sensors are produced with high precision techn
148. ar to be constant but the red green and blue intensities are actually changing in synchronization with the frequency of the power supply causing flicker Using an electronic shutter under such lighting could make the flicker even worse Color flicker is particularly likely to happen when the power supply frequency is 60 Hz However if the power frequency is 50 Hz setting the shutter speed to 1 100 can reduce this flicker When a bright object is shot in ECS mode in such a manner that it fills the screen the upper edge of the picture may have poor quality because of an inherent characteristic of CCDs Before using ECS mode check the shooting conditions In SLS mode CCD white dot noise becomes more prominent as the number of frames increases For details see Phenomena Specific to CCD Image Sensors on page 161 To select the shutter mode and shutter speed Use the SHUTTER switch to select a shutter mode or a standard mode shutter speed To set the shutter speed in ECS or SLS mode with the SHUTTER switch set to ON and the ECS or SLS mode selected use the MENU knob for adjustment To set the shutter mode and the standard mode shutter speed Once the shutter speed is selected it is retained even when the camcorder is turned off 1 Make sure that neither menu nor status display is shown 2 Push the SHUTTER switch from ON to SEL Recording Basic Operations xXoegKe d pue e 57
149. are already unlocked NO MORE SUB CLIPS CAN BE ADDED TO THE CLIP LIST The upper limit of sub clips in the current clip list has been exceeded This appears when the total duration of the current clip list exceeds the upper limit of 24 hours as the result of a sub clip ADD see page 88 operation or a TRIM operation see page 92 SUB CLIP DOES NOT EXIST There are no sub clips in the current clip list This appears when an attempt is made to execute a MOVE see page 92 TRIM see page 92 DELETE see page 93 or TC PRESET operation see page 94 with no sub clips in the current clip list CLIP LIST DOES NOT EXIST There are no clip lists on the disc This appears when an attempt is made to execute a DELETE CLIP LIST operation see page 96 when there are no clip lists on the disc MOVE IS INVALID The sub clip cannot be moved This appear hen an attempt is made to execute a MOVE operation see page 92 when there are no sub clip in the current clip list or when there is only 1 SHOT MARK DOES NOT EXIST The specified shot mark has not been recorded This appears when an attempt is made to execute a DELETE SHOT MARK operation on a clip when the specified shot mark has not been recorded for that clip REC START CANNOT BE DELETED REC START cannot be deleted This appears when an attempt is made to delete a REC START with a DELETE SHOT MARK operation DELETE SHOT MARK can
150. arts respectively For details see Adjusting the Iris on page 59 D Setting change and adjustment progress message display area For details see Change Confirmation Adjustment Progress Messages on page 135 Location and Function of Parts M9IAJOAQ Je1deuo 29 suonejedejg z sajdeup 30 Preparations Attaching and Replacing the Lithium Battery This camcorder uses a lithium battery to retain stored data When using the camcorder for the first time be sure to attach the supplied lithium battery CR2032 The camcorder will not operate correctly without this lithium battery After attaching the lithium battery set the date and time of the internal clock see Setting the Date and Time of the Internal Clock on page 34 Use 2032 lithium batteries only Other types of lithium battery may come loose when the camcorder is subjected to vibrations If you have difficulty finding CR2032 lithium batteries contact your Sony dealer Press down and pull forward 1 Set the POWER switch to OFF 2 Press down the catch at the top of the battery cover and open the cover Attaching and Replacing the Lithium Battery Chapter Take out the lithium battery Press down and pull out toward you 4 Reverse step 3 to insert a replacement lithium battery Make sure that the symbol on the battery is facing you D Close the battery cover Battery may explode if mistreated D
151. ator Indication Remaining recording time DISC E MEBNENENB B More than 30 minutes DISC E HEHHEHE B 25 to 30 minutes DISC E HEHHEHE B 20 to 25 minutes DISC E HEHHE B 15 to 20 minutes DISC E MEN B 10 to 15 minutes DISC E NN B 5 to 10 minutes DISC E B 2 to 5 minutes DISC E E B flashing O to 2 minutes DISC E B flashing 0 minutes Remaining clips display Displays the remaining number of clips that can be recorded The display flashes once per second when the number of remaining clips is less than 10 It flashes 4 times per second when the number of remaining clips is 0 Location and Function of Parts MBIAJOAC Je1deuo 17 MSIAJOAQ 1e1deuo 18 D Warning indicator area Displays warnings when trouble with recording or moisture condensation occurs For details see Operation Warnings on page 165 Time counter display Each press of the COUNTER CHAPTER button cycles through displays of timecode user bits and counter information You can display the date or time using the four way arrow key on the side control panel TCG Value of timecode generator Near the rear TCR Value of timecode reader UBG Value of user bits generator UBR Value of user bits reader CNT Counter information CLK Time by the internal clock TCG and UBG can be displayed when the disc is stopped and during recording and TCR and UBR are displ
152. ayed during playback CLK appears when the COUNTER CHAPTER button has been pressed to display TC and the PRESET REGEN CLOCK switch is set to CLOCK WARNING indicator A A 2 ACCESS indicator J J A Built in speaker Protection cover of the side control panel Gz D EARPHONE jack EJECT button and indicator D F REV button and indicator PLAY PAUSE button and indicator B D FFWD button and indicator NEXT button STOP button D PREV button Q WARNING indicator Lights up or flashes when an abnormality occurs in the VDR section For details about the meaning of the states of the WARNING indicator see Operation Warnings on page 165 ACCESS indicator This lights when data is written to or read from the disc Built in speaker The speaker can be used to monitor E E 1 sound during recording and playback sound during playback The speaker also sounds alarms to reinforce visual warnings Location and Function of Parts If you connect earphones to the EARPHONE jack the speaker output is suppressed automatically 1 E E Abbreviation of Electric to Electric In E E mode video and audio signals input to the camcorder are output after passing through internal electric circuits only This can be used to check input signals For details about alarms see Operation Warnings on page 165 Protection cover of the side control panel Open to access the side control pane
153. button REC button PUSH AF auto focus button When the focus adjustment is in the manual mode by pressing this button you can use the auto focus for an instantaneous adjustment to the subject When the button is pressed the auto focus operates until the image is in focus then disengages Even when the FOCUS switch is set to A auto by pressing this button you can restart the auto focus FOCUS switch Select the method of focusing A auto The auto focus function is constantly active While the auto focus is operating the auto focus indicator lights green Even with the switch in the A position you can manually adjust the focus by operating the focus ring M manual The manual mode allows focusing adjustment with the focus ring In manual mode auto focus adjustment is also possible by pressing the PUSH AF button MACRO switch When this switch is in the ON position the macro mode is enabled allowing focusing over the whole range 5 cm 1 to eo including the macro range from 5 cm D to 90 cm from the front of the lens This operation is independent of whether the focus adjustment mode is auto or manual In the macro range the auto focusing speed is lower 1 At the wide angle setting Auto focus indicator This lights green while the auto focus function is operating During flange focal length adjustment it flashes orange or green If an error occurs it lights red For details of
154. ce marks cannot be done on the disc To record on the EM Full inserted For details see disc eject the disc insert it again Recording Shot Marks on and execute salvage processing page 65 Salvage NG Salvage processing failed For SB CLP mode Press the SEL SET button four details see Handling of Discs way arrow key up to clear the When Recording Does Not End SUB CLIP indicator before Normally Salvage Function on carrying out the operation 50 No SEL List No clip list is selected Create REC INHI The Write Inhibit tab of the disc is new clip list or load a clip list from in the recording disabled position the disc or salvage processing needs to be rel m done on thedoadad disc Setiha No List M add is no clip list Create a clip tab to the recording enabled position Or eject the disc insert it No SUB Clip There are no sub clips in the clip again and perform salvage list Register a sub clip or load processing another clip list HD 501 25P The loaded disc has a different SUB Clip NG The In and Out point positions are HD 601 30P recording format Exchange the invalid Set correct In and Out HD 23P Disc disc or change the recording points 25800 format SB CLP The total number of sub clips is 2CHx16 Clip over the upper limit 300 4CHx16 Clip CL OVER DUR The total duration of sub clips in the current clip list is over the Index File There is an unsupported index file x on the disc
155. ch lias fl 3 T m Peel IE GO MONITOR knob ALARM knob LCD monitor MENU switch WHITE BAL switch OUTPUT DCC switch 5600K button Press to light the button and switch the standard color temperature for shooting to 5600K Use this button for outdoor shooting in daytime or shooting under lighting with higher temperature This button is effective only when the WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST LIGHT switch Determines how a video light connected to the LIGHT connector see page 22 is turned on and off AUTO When the POWER switch of the video light is in the on position the video light is turned on automatically while the camcorder is recording MAN You can turn the video light on or off manually using its own switch When this switch is set to AUTO at the beginning of the recording the picture is recorded even though the lighting may fluctuate until the video light comes on If the beginning of the recording is important you should set this switch to MAN However when using the interval recording mode the video light is automatically turned on immediately before recording starts To ensure proper operation of the video light Sony recommends the use of the BP GL95 Battery Pack with the camcorder GAIN switch Switches the gain of the video amplifier to match the lighting conditions during shooting The gains corresponding to the L M and H settings can be selected in t
156. cified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure VAROITUS LAITTEEN KAYTTAMINEN MUULLA KUIN TASSA KAYTTOOHJEESSA MAINITULLA TAVALLA SAATTAA ALTISTAA KAYTTAJAN TURVALLISUUSLUOKAN 1 YLITTAVALLE NAKYMATTOMALLE LASERSATEILYLLE VARNING OM APPARATEN ANVANDS PA ANNAT SATT AN DENNA BRUKSANVISNING SPECIFICERATS KAN ANVANDAREN UTSATTAS FOR OSYNLIG LASERSTRALNING SOM OVERSKRIDER GRANSEN FOR LASERKLASS 1 For the customers in the U S A For the customers in Taiwan only This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable RA protection against harmful interference when the equipment is wI operated in a commercial environment This equipment i i Ss generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and ESSES seul if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense You are cautioned that any changes or modifications not expressly approved in this manual could void your authority to operate this equipment All interface cables used to connect peripherals must be shielded in order to comply with the limits for a digital device pursuant to Subpart B
157. ct a color video monitor see Connecting an External Video Monitor on page 46 Thumbnail Search Thumbnail Search Searching Using Thumbnails To display the thumbnail images of all clips on the disc and cue up a desired clip proceed as follows SUB CLIP indicator THUMBNAIL indicator 2 MONITOR THUMBNAIL SUBICLIP AUDIO LEVEL 9 ESSENCE SHIFT 9x9 2 FRONT MIC VIDEO QUT LOWCUL CHARACTER button 1 With the SUB CLIP indicator Off press the THUMBNAIL button to turn the THUMBNAIL indicator on If the SUB CLIP indicator is lit you can turn it off by pressing the SEL SET button to the upper side the SUB CLIP side with the SHIFT button held down If the menu screen is displayed move the MENU switch to the OFF position and press the THUMBNAIL button If you set the MENU switch to ON while thumbnails are displayed thumbnail display is replaced with menu display The thumbnails of all clips on the disc appear In the following descriptions this is referred to as the thumbnail screen Name of currently Sixth clip is selected selected clip 9 from a total of 34 clips Thumbnail of currently selected clip first frame or specified P frame CLIP CO006 I zm TC 00 25 00 14 TC 00 27 19 04 TCOU 27 51 08 Recording date and time of selected clip Duration of selected clip Clip information When a title has been assigned to a cli
158. ctor W WIRELESS Audio input signals from the CA WR855 camera adaptor supplied separately if a WRR 855 series UHF synthesized tuner supplied separately is installed using the CA WR855 R REAR Audio input signals from an audio device connected to the AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 connectors The signal input to the AUDIO IN CH 1 connector is recorded on channel 3 and the signal input to the AUDIO IN CH 2 connector on channel 4 For audio channels 3 and 4 level adjustment can only be performed in AUTO automatic mode The audio level of these channels cannot be adjusted in MANUAL manual mode VIDEO OUT video output CHARACTER switch Selects whether or not ON OFF to superimpose text information on the VIDEO OUT connector output F RUN SET R RUN free run set recording run switch Selects the operating mode of the internal timecode generator The operating mode is set as explained below depending on the position of the switch F RUN Timecode keeps advancing regardless of the operating state of the VDR Use this setting when synchronizing the timecode with an external timecode SET Sets the timecode or user bits R RUN Timecode advances only during recording Use this setting to have a consecutive timecode on the disc For details see To set the timecode on page 61 and To set the user bits on page 62 B FRONT MIC LOW CUT switch Set to ON to insert a high pass filter in the microphone circuit reducin
159. current clip list 4 006 007 CLIP ie A l bar cursor shows insertion position of next sub clip Thumbnails of the sub clips already added to the current clip list 0037010 CLIP LIST E0006 vs 00 00 TC 00 00 07 20 00 23 48 06 1 TC 00 24 09 10 a d 5 Asterisk appears when clip list has not been saved to disc Even when clips whose thumbnail image index frame is not the first frame are added to a clip list it is always the first frame that is displayed on the clip list screen 9 Add all the desired clips to the current clip list and press the RESET button on the right of the LCD monitor Mark indicating that the thumbnail is not the first frame You return to the clip list screen which displays thumbnails of the newly added clips added as sub clips CLIP LIST E0003 006 017 C 0 00 00 00 IC 00 00 E 11 28 m 41 23 Adding Sub Clips Using the Expand Function uonoejeg eueog y You can use the expand function see page 80 to divide a sub clip and display thumbnails of the divisions This allows you to include a section of the sub clip Proceed as follows ad 00 02 Ls 3 NEW FILE TOTAL 10 Save the contents of the current clip list on the disc 1 Inthe upper part of the scene selection screen select the sub clip for expanded display See Saving the Current Clip List to Disc on p
160. d and the message AWB OK appears The adjustment setting is automatically stored in the memory A or B that was selected in step 1 Approximate color temperature of the subject Recording Basic Operations xXoeqKe d pue e 55 yoeqhe q pue Bulpiooay g 1e deuo 56 The color temperature display that appears after white balance adjustment is calculated on the basis of the R G B signal output from the camera It may not agree with the results of measurement by commercially available color temperature meters The camcorder s color temperature display should be regarded as an approximation If the camera has a zoom lens with an automatic iris the iris may hunt D To prevent this adjust the iris gain knob indicated as IG IS or S on the lens For details refer to the lens operation manual 1 Hunting Repeated brightening and darkening of the image resulting from repeated response to automatic iris control If the automatic white balance adjustment cannot be made If the white balance adjustment cannot be completed normally an error message will appear for about 3 seconds on the viewfinder screen Error message Meaning AWB NG The white video level is too low Either LOW LEVEL open the lens iris or increase the gain AWB NG The color temperature is too high COLOR TEMP Select a suitable setting for the 5600K HIGH button AWB N
161. d press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic Menu Operations on page 129 2 Select the desired setting item and press the MENU knob You can set the following items on the SHOT DISP page Item SHOT DATE Description Selects whether or not the shot data is superimposed ON or OFF Selects the date display format One of Y M D M D Y and D M Y Selects whether or not shot time is superimposed ON or OFF DATE MODE SHOT TIME TIME MODE Switching time indications to the 12 hour or 24 hour clock SHOT ID SEL Selects whether or not the shot ID set on the SHOT ID page is superimposed To carry out superimposed recording select the SHOT ID number 1 to 4 Turn the MENU knob to select the desired setting ON OFF or value and press the MENU knob 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set all of the desired items To carry out superimposed recording To actually record the items selected for superimposed recording on the SHOT DISP page set the OUTPUT DCC switch to BARS DCC OFF The items selected for superimposed recording appear on the screen and are recorded superimposed on the color bars Display example shows case where SHOT DATE is ON Y 06 03 15 Setting the Shot ID You can set a shot ID of up to 12 alphanumeric characters spaces and symbols When the OUTPUT DCC switch is set to BARS DCC OFF this shot ID is outp
162. dent Make sure the lens is firmly locked It is recommended that the lens mount securing rubber be put on the lens locking lever as illustrated above Mounting a 2 3 inch type lens requires a 2 3 inch type lens mount adaptor 2 3 inch type lens has been mounted connect the lens cable to the LENS connector Connecting the lens cable to the LENS connector when the camcorder is powered may cause a malfunction of the camcorder or the lens Before connecting the lens cable be sure to check that the camcorder is powered off D Secure the lens cable with the cable clamps Adjusting the Flange Focal Length If the focus is not precisely correct at the telephoto and wide angle ends of zoom operations adjust the flange focal length the distance from the lens mounting flange plane to the focusing plane Once adjusted no further adjustment is required unless the lens is changed When carrying out the adjustment use the supplied flange focal length adjustment chart as the subject Flange focal length adjustment chart supplied If you use a subject with insufficient contrast or move the camera or subject during adjustment this will cause an adjustment error Carrying out the adjustment When using the VCL 719BXS Auto Focus Lens With the VCL 719BXS lens supplied with the PDW F335K zoom and focus operations automatically adjust the flange focal length Preparing the Lens suonejedejg Z jajdeup 35
163. der Screen and the LCD Monitor To delete a character In step 3 of Setting the Shot ID on page 137 move M over DEL and press the MENU knob This deletes the character under Bl in the shot ID row To cancel deleting the character move Bl over RET and press the MENU knob To cancel changing the shot ID Before executing step 5 of Setting the Shot ID on page 137 move to ESC and press the MENU knob Showing the Status Display You can confirm the settings or status of the camcorder on the screen by showing the status display Items shown in the status display F ci A T C E C C The status display allows you to confirm the following items related to camera settings FORMAT Video recording format set on this unit WHITE White balance color temperature CLIP CONT REC The on off setting of the Clip Continuous Rec function ASSIGN The settings of the ASSIGN 1 to 4 switches TIME CODE DF or NDF COMPONENT OUT Output from the VIDEO OUT connector AUDIO Audio recording format set on this unit F MIC Front microphone setting to Knob adjustment for each audio channel To show the status display Flick the MENU switch to STATUS when the menu is not displayed STATUS gt 4 gt ON OFF MENU The status display appears when the MENU switch is flicked to STATUS and disappears when the switch is released Adjustments and Settings from Me
164. desired item and press the MENU knob You can make the following settings Item Description OFF Standard setting factory default setting 1 Reduce noise by using the noise reduction circuits without lowering the sensitivity Resolution and gradations under low light are slightly lower 2 Reduce noise more than the 1 setting by lowering the sensitivity Compared to the OFF setting sensitivity is about 20 lower and the dynamic range is about 20 lower Sensitivity declines to about F8 compared to the standard F9 Assigning Functions to ASSIGN Switches You can assign the desired function to any of the ASSIGN switches How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the desired item Adjustments and Settings from Menus pue s e dsiq nua 141 sBunjes pue sAejdsiq nua S 2 142 1 Display the ASSIGNABLE page on the OPERATION menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic Menu Operations on page 129 You can assign functions by using the following items Item Description ASSIGN SW 1 Assigns the function to ASSIGN 1 switch ASSIGN SW 2 the function to ASSIGN 2 switch ASSIGN SW 3 Assigns the function to ASSIGN switch ASSIGN SW 4 Assigns the function to ASSIGN 4 switch
165. details on operation when other equipment with i LINK DV connector is connected see page 46 For details on connection with i LINK cable and necessary software refer to the operating instructions supplied with the connected device Use Sony i LINK cables Use Sony i LINK cables to connect the i LINK devices 6 pins gt 4 pins For DV dubbing 6 pins gt 6 pins For DV dubbing i LINK and are trademarks About a Memory Stick About a Memory Stick What is Memory Stick Memory Stick is a new compact portable and versatile IC Integrated Circuit recording medium with a data capacity that exceeds a floppy disk Memory Stick is specially designed for exchanging and sharing digital data among Memory Stick compatible products Because it is removable Memory Stick can also be used for external data storage Memory Stick is available in two sizes standard size and compact Memory Stick Duo size Once attached to a Memory Stick Duo adaptor Memory Stick Duo turns to the same size as standard Memory Stick and thus can be used with products compliant with standard Memory Stick Types of Memory Stick Memory Stick is available in the following four types to meet various requirements in functions Memory Stick R Stored data are not overwritten You can write data to Memory Stick R with Memory Stick R compatible products only Copyright protected data that
166. ditions FILTER selector Lighting conditions setting 1 CLEAR Indoor shooting 2 1 4 ND Cloudy or rainy outdoor shooting or to reduce the depth of field 3 1 46 ND Sunlight 4 1 64 ND To reduce the depth of field in sunlight If the setting of the FILTER selector is changed a message reporting the new setting appears for about 3 seconds in the setting change and adjustment progress message display area of the viewfinder screen Place a white test card under the same lighting conditions as for the subject to be shot and zoom up to it Alternatively any white object such as a cloth or a wall can be used The absolute minimum white area is as follows Rectangle centered on the screen The lengths of the sides are 70 of the length and width of the screen The white object must be within the rectangle and have an area of at least 10 of the screen Make sure there are not bright spots in the rectangle Adjust the lens iris Manually adjusted lens Set the iris to an appropriate setting Lens with automatic iris Set the automatic manual switch on the lens to automatic Push the AUTO W B BAL switch to WHT and then release the switch AUTO W B BAL switch The switch returns to the center position and the adjustment is executed During adjustment the message AWB EXECUTING is displayed on the viewfinder screen The white balance is adjusted in about one secon
167. djustment through COLOR TEMP is not satisfactory R GAIN lt A gt Only the value of R GAIN is changed B GAIN lt A gt Only the value of B GAIN is 2 changed B D5600K lt A gt ON OFF OFF Turns the WHITE A electronic E 5600K filter on or off COLOR TEMP lt B gt Display color 3200 Sets the color temperature of temperature WHITE B S converted 5 from amp Gain o E C TEMP BAL lt B gt 99 to 99 O Adjusts the value more precisely when the color temperature 2 adjustment through COLOR TEMP is not satisfactory R GAIN B Only the value of R GAIN is 3 changed 2 B GAIN B Only the value of B GAIN is changed D5600K lt B gt ON OFF OFF Turns the WHITE B electronic 5600K filter on or off 04 KNEE KNEE POINT 50 0 109 0 100 0 Sets the knee point level A Sc St in 0 1 steps KNEE SLOPE 0 Sets the knee slope level KNEE SAT LEVEL 99 to 99 Sets the knee saturation level WHITE CLIP LEVEL 100 0 to 108 0 Adjusts the white clipping level 109 5 in 0 1 steps 114 Menu Organization and Operation PAINT menu No Page Item Settings Default USER Description File menu page 05 DETAIL DETAIL LEVEL 0 Sets the general level of the detail A Sc St signal DTL H V RATIO Sets the level of the V detail signal
168. down the SHIFT button and press the SEL SET button to the bottom side the CLIP MENU side Thumbnail Search The CLIP menu appears see page 95 2 Use the SEL SET button or MENU knob to select SET INDEX PICTURE and then press the button konb This switches to the screen for selecting a clip for changing the index frame 3 Select the desired thumbnail and press the SEL SET button or MENU knob The frame from the clip that is currently specified as the thumbnail is displayed In this state you can use playback or search SET 0005 005 037 TCR 00 25 51 20 4 Using playback or search find the new index frame You can also turn the MENU knob for a jog operation 5 Press the SEL SET button or MENU knob This sets the selected scene as the index frame and returns to the thumbnail screen When the thumbnail is other than the first frame this is shown as follows Mark indicating that the thumbnail is not the first frame If you select a marked thumbnail and press the SEL SET button or MENU knob this does not cue up to the thumbnail position Cuing up is always to the first frame of the clip To cancel setting the index frame hold down the SHIFT button and press the SEL SET button down CLIP MENU Cuing Up a Frame by Searching for an Essence Mark Proceed as follows CHS FET 2 99 cox ua X AUDO SELECT LITHIUM BATT cH2 FRON
169. e Replace the disc The laser diode has deteriorated On the HOURS METER page of the DIAGNOSIS menu check the cumulative light output parameters of the optical head see page 125 All controls except the EJECT button are disabled There is condensation Remove the disc and wait with the power on until the condensation has evaporated Audio recording is not possible The AUDIO LEVEL CH 1 CH 2 knobs are set to the minimum level Adjust the setting of the AUDIO LEVEL knobs see page 13 Audio recording is not possible The AUDIO LEVEL knob on the front is set to the minimum level Adjust the setting of the AUDIO LEVEL knob on the front see page 19 The recorded sound is distorted The audio level is too high Adjust the setting of the AUDIO LEVEL knobs and record again see page 19 The recorded sound has a high noise level The audio level is too low Adjust the setting of the AUDIO LEVEL knobs and record again see page 19 Troubleshooting xipueddy 169 Symptoms Cause Remedy The equipment connected to the camcorder via an i LINK connection does not react as expected for example the video image does not appear on its screen It sometimes takes time for the connected equipment to recognize the operation Wait for about 15 seconds If the connected equipment still does not react do the following Check the i LI
170. e Each press of the button switches the information displayed in the following order Date and time of creation title clip name Date and time of creation The following information is displayed for each type 1 DATE Date and time of clip list creation or last modification TITLE The title of the clip list if it has one NAME The standard or user defined name of the clip list You can also use the supplied PDZ 1 Proxy Browsing Software to set clip list titles 3 Use the SEL SET button or MENU knob to select a clip list number E0001 and so on and press the button or knob You can also move the cursor with the PREV and NEXT buttons When you have a large number of clip lists you can use the following operations to move the cursor closer to the clip list that you want With the SHIFT button held down press the PREV or NEXT button Move to the first or last clip list Press the F REV or F FWD button Move to previous or next page If you select a clip list number with a NEW FILE an empty clip list is displayed as shown in the following figure 910 0 200 09 0 3 000 000 NEW FILE 4 Hold down the SHIFT button and press the SEL SET button down CLIP MENU The CLIP menu appears CLIP LIST E0006 0007000 CLIP MENU CLIF INFORMATION LOAD CLIP LIST AVE LIP LIST DELETE CLIP LISI ORT CLIP LIST BY NEW FILE 5 Use the SEL SET button or MENU knob to select ADD then press
171. e The disc cannot be used by this unit Insert another Professional Index file or file system error Exchange or format the disc the disc A recorded clip cannot be handled by this unit Exchange or format The disc cannot be used by this unit Exchange the disc The disc cannot be recorded To record exchange the disc The disc is full Exchange or format the disc The disc was not recognized Try ejecting the disc and inserting it again Or exchange the disc Message For details about the warning displays and alarm ILL Disc messages on the viewfinder see the next item Operation alarm messages ILL Index No FS An operation or alarm message is displayed in the Unknown FS operation alarm message display area see page 29 of the No Support viewfinder screen Operation alarm Meaning i message FORMAT NG INTERVAL M S Indicates the camera is in the Interval Rec mode M S Disc Damage indicates the shooting interval LOW LIGHT Appears depending on the es setting to indicate the subject illumination is inadequate DI read err HIGH TEMPERATURE Indicates that temperatures have iiie ADJ risen inside the unit Avoid continued use in this state Operation Warnings Message Meaning and action to take Message Meaning and action to take Run Salvage Salvage processing needs to be No EM Space Essen
172. e mark to the desired item 1 Display the USER FILE page of the FILE menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic Menu Operations on page 129 2 Select USER FILE LOAD and press the MENU knob The POO USER LOAD page appears POOeUSER LOAD TOP DISPLAY MODE ALL 5 06 5 06 S 0 JAN JAN 1 FEB O FEB 2 USER1 US 06 06 Turn the MENU knob until the page which contains the desired file appears then press the MENU knob 4 select the desired file number and press the MENU knob The message LOAD OK YES NO appears PODSURER LORD vESoNO OP p15PPRv ALL 001 USER1 5 06 5 06 5 06 0 06 JAN JAN 0 1 FEB O FEB 2 5 To carry out the load select YES and press the MENU knob To cancel press the MENU knob leaving pointing to NO The access indicator lights When the load is completed the message COMPLETE appears and the access indicator goes off The USER FILE page appears again If data cannot be loaded If one of the following error messages appears during or after the load operation then the data was not loaded Error message Cause Action NO MEMORY STICK flashing Insert or reinsert the Memory Stick No Memory Stick is inserted MEMORY STICK ERROR flashing Recheck and consult your Sony dealer Circuit or Memory Stick fault Error message FILE ERROR flashin
173. e indicator lights during high speed playback in the forward direction NEXT button When FIND MODE on the ESSENCE MARK page of the MAINTENANCE menu is set to R ST This jumps to the next REC START essence mark When FIND MODE on the ESSENCE MARK page of the MAINTENANCE menu is set to CLIP This jumps to the first frame of the next clip During the jump the F FWD indicator flashes If you press this together with the F FWD button the jump is to the last frame of the last recorded clip on the disc For details see Recording Shot Marks page 65 STOP button Press this to stop disc playback D PREV previous button When FIND MODE on the ESSENCE MARK page of the MAINTENANCE menu is set to R ST This jumps to the previous REC START essence mark When FIND MODE on the ESSENCE MARK page of the MAINTENANCE menu is set to CLIP This jumps to the first frame of the current clip or jumps to the first frame of the previous clip when the PREV button is pressed at the first frame of the current clip During the jump the F REV indicator flashes If you press this together with the F REV button the jump is to the start of the first recorded clip on the disc For details see Recording Shot Marks page 65 Side control panel inside the protection cover THUMBNAIL indicator THUMBNAIL button SUB CLIP indicator SEL SET button four way arrow key MONITOR CH 144 8 AAN CH 1 2 fO
174. e values between real time and the timecode Using this mode produces a difference of approximately 86 seconds per day between real time and timecode which causes problems when editing programs in units of seconds using the number of frames as a reference Non audio General term for audio signals other than linear PCM such as Dolby E and Dolby Digital AC 3 P XDCAM can record non audio as an input signal 1 Dolby is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories NTSC Abbreviation for National Television System Committee NTSC is a color TV broadcasting system adopted mainly in North American countries and in parts of Asia and Central and South America PAL Abbreviation for Phase Alternating Line PAL is a color broadcasting system developed by Telefunken GmbH of Germany This system is adopted mainly in European countries in Australia and in parts of Asia and South America Progressive scan mode A scanning method in which odd rows and even rows are read at the same time Also called full screen scanning Proxy AV data Low resolution data with a video bandwidth of 1 5 Mbps and an audio bandwidth of 64 kbps per channel This unit records proxy AV data automatically whenever high resolution MPEG HD or DVCAM data is recorded Reference video signal A video signal that contains a sync signal or sync and burst signals used as a reference for synchronization of video equipment Return video Video signals tha
175. e Cache time Picture Cache mode To record in Picture Cache mode you need to turn on Picture Cache mode and set the picture data storage time Picture Cache time using the OPERATION menu The Picture Cache time determines the number of seconds recorded from the Picture Cache counting back from the time when you press the REC START button or the VTR button on the lens to start recording However the number of seconds actually recorded from the Picture Cache may be shorter immediately after the setting of the VDR SAVE STBY switch is changed and in the special situations explained in the following notes The contents of Picture Cache memory are unstable for a short time immediately after you select Picture Cache mode or change the Picture Cache time Therefore if you put the unit into recording mode by pressing the REC START button or the VTR button on the lens immediately after such operation pictures just before such operation cannot be recorded Also a certain amount of time is required to actually start recording to a disc immediately after you insert a disc and when the VDR switch is set to SAVE In these cases the number of seconds that can actually be recorded from the Picture Cache may be fewer than the specified Picture Cache time During playback or recording review no data is saved to the Picture Cache memory Thus it is not possible to use this function to rerecord the last few seconds of material from playback or recordi
176. e MENU knob 0 5 about 0 5 stop further open 1 0 about 1 stop further open 0 standard value 0 5 about 0 5 stop further closed 0 about 1 stop further closed The changed reference value is retained until the power of the camcorder is turned off Even if the reference value is changed it reverts to the standard value every time the power is turned on If the reference value is set to other than the 0 value the following indications appear on the viewfinder screen OUOFS 6 Opening the lens iris Iris opened by 1 stop two bars a qq TFS 6 Iris opened by 0 5 stop one bar Stopping down the lens iris poe Iris stopped down by 0 5 stop one bar Iris stopped down by 1 stop two bars If you want to change the reference value during shooting You can change the reference value by MENU knob operations only without opening the menu In this case note the following points When setting the shutter speed while the shutter mode is set to ECS or SLS the setting of shutter speed takes priority see page 57 To change the reference value make sure the camcorder is not in the process of setting the shutter speed Proceed as follows How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the desired item 1 Display the CAM CONFIG page of the MAINTENANCE menu see page 120 and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic Menu
177. e Operation Restrictions on page 155 File Access Mode File Operations To eject discs from a remote computer Right click the icon representing this unit in Explorer and select Eject from the menu which appears Exiting file operations Proceed as follows Do not disconnect the cable before performing steps 1 to 3 1 Do one of the following on the E or ues icon displayed in the remote computer s taskbar Double click Right click and select one of the following commands from the menu which appears Windows 2000 Unplug or Eject Hardware Windows XP Safely Remove Hardware The Unplug or Eject Hardware dialog box Windows 2000 or Safely Remove Hardware dialog box Windows XP appears 2 Select Sony XDCAM PDW F335 IEEE 1394 SBP2 Device and click Stop The Stop a Hardware device dialog appears 3 Select Sony XDCAM PDW F335 IEEE 1394 SBP2 Device and click In Windows 2000 a confirmation message appears In Windows XP Sony XDCAM PDW F335 IEEE 1394 SBP2 Device is deleted from the list of hardware devices This unit can now resume normal operations The limitations described in Operation limitations during FAM connections on page 158 no longer apply 4 Disconnect the i LINK cable as required Reconnecting To reconnect after exiting file operations do one of the following depending on whether an i LINK cable is connected i LINK cable is not connected Connect this
178. e appears on the viewfinder screen or the LCD monitor and then connect the other camcorders When the frame frequency of this unit is 23 98P make sure that the reference unit is either recording or in the recording stopped state 2 1 MONITOR OUT gt TC OUT Cr puelle om 0 90 c Reference camcorder TC IN LESER GENLOCK IN To synchronize the timecode o E e e S e efe e8 eo 88888 ete To e 2 1 Set the PRESET REGEN CLOCK switch to PRESET 2 Set the F RUN SET R RUN switch to F RUN Press the DISPLAY EXPAND button of the LCD monitor to display TCG on the time counter display section 4 Depending on the frame frequency setting of this unit supply the reference timecode and reference video signal shown in the following table to the TC IN connector and GENLOCK IN connector respectively The input reference timecode and reference video signal must meet the phase relationship requirements of the the SMPTE timecode standard Excluding the case where the frame frequency is 23 98P 1 Input to the TC connector and set the IN OUT selector switch to IN Frame Acceptable reference Acceptable frequency of video signal frame timecode this unit frequency
179. e disc To continue deleting other clip lists After selecting OK press the SEL SET button while holding down the SHIFT button The selected clip list is deleted and you return to step 3 and can continue deleting clip lists Sorting the List of Clip Lists You can sort the list of clips lists that appears when you select LOAD CLIP LIST and similar commands Existing clip lists can be sorted in order of name or in order of date and time of creation Proceed as follows 1 Display the CLIP menu See To display the CLIP menu page 95 2 Use the SEL SET button or MENU knob to select SORT CLIP LISTS BY and then press the button or knob A screen like the one shown below appears CLIP LIST DOCUMENT O1 001 034 CLIP MENU SORT CLIP LIST BY DATE NEWE FIRS Jm 2 Te 00 08 18 08 TC 00 08 21 08 TC 00 05 43 08 572 t 00 05 28 a 13 JUN 2006 12 45 3 Use the SEL SET button or MENU knob to select NAME or DATE and then press the button or knob NAME Sort in ascending order by clip list name DATE Sort by date of creation with the newest clip list first In the LOAD CLIP LIST and similar screens the list of existing clip lists is sorted by the method you chose in step 3 Unused clip lists are excluded from the sort If you selected NAME BY NAME Sort by name CLIP LIST DOCUMENT 01 ES CLIP MENU DISP SE E LOAD CLIP LIST DATE BY NAME DOCUM 3 2006 13
180. e focusing ring Camera person tally light Stopper Microphone fixing screw Microphone holder Stereo microphone packaged with camcorder PEAKING control CONTRAST control Q TALLY indicator REC TALLY indicators TALLY REC BATT indicator GAIN UP indicator MOIAJOAQ Je deuo SHUTTER indicator Eye cup Lock ring QD Tally light Barrel BRIGHT control Viewfinder connector TALLY switch DISPLAY switch Eyepiece focusing ring Adjusts the viewfinder focus to match your eyesight see page 37 Camera person tally light Lights while the camcorder is recording To start recording with your eye off the viewfinder open the slide window This indicator flashes when the remaining battery capacity or remaining disc capacity is low Stopper Lift up when detaching the viewfinder see page 37 PEAKING control Adjusts the outline intensity of the viewfinder image see page 37 Q CONTRAST control Adjusts the contrast of the viewfinder image see page 37 TALLY tally indicator green Flashes when the camcorder is in Interval Rec mode Flashing quickens while you are shooting in Interval Rec mode For details on Interval Rec mode see Time lapse Video Recording Interval Rec Function on page 66 Q REC TALLY recording tally indicators red Function as follows Begin flashing when you press the REC button o
181. e s ejdsiq nua 1 2 104 Menu selection 1st level 2nd level 3rd level BATTERY 2 TYPE DETECTION SEGMENT No 7 SEGMENT No 6 SEGMENT No 5 SEGMENT No 4 SEGMENT No 3 SEGMENT No 2 SEGMENT No 1 GENLOCK GL H PHASE H ADVANCE LENS ZOOM SELECT ZOOM SPEED AF DETECT AREA FILE Continued USER FILE USER FILE LOAD m USER FILE SAVE FID USER PRESET CUSTOMIZE RESET ALL FILE ALL FILE LOAD ALL FILE SAVE FID ALL RESET SCENE FILE 1 5 STANDARD SCENE RECALL SCENE STORE FID LENS FILE 1 LENS FILE 2 LENS FILE RECALL LENS FILE STORE FID SOURCE LENS NO OFFSET IRIS GAIN LENS AUTO RECALL LENS INFORMATION m L ID LMF LENS M VMOD I LENS R FLARE LENS G FLARE LENS B FLARE LENS W R OFST LENS W B OFST LENS FILE SHADING CH SEL LENS R H SAW LENS LENS V SAW LENS V MEMORY STICK Continued MS FORMAT Menu Organization and Operation Menu selection 1st level DIAGNOSIS 2nd level 3rd level ADVANCED HOURS METER OPERATION OPERATION rst
182. e standard format names Assigning meaningful names to clips and clip lists can facilitate file management You can also use this unit s AUTO TITLING function to assign user defined names to clips To assign clip names on this unit The title assigned to clip becomes its clip name file name a TITLE00001 i When sub item AUTO NAMING is set to OS rreo f TITLEO0001 When sub item AUTO NAMING is set to TITLE Proceed as follows How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the desired item 1 Set TITLE on the CLIP TITLE page to ENABL see page 70 For details on menu operations see Basic Menu Operations on page 129 2 Display the FILE NAMING page of the OPERATION menu and then press the MENU knob The current setting parameters appear at the left of the screen 006eFILE NAMING NAMING FORM 3 Turn the MENU knob to select NAMING FORM and then press the MENU knob Recording Advanced Operations xXoeqKe d pue e Jaydeyo 71 yoeqhe q pue g 72 4 Tum the MENU knob to display FREE and then press the MENU knob You are now able to use clips and clip lists with user defined names Turn the MENU knob to select AUTO NAMING and then press the MENU knob C Assign standard format c
183. e units are set correctly press the SEL SET button or MENU knob This sets the start timecode for the current clip list which will be used for playback To cancel the timecode setting hold down the SHIFT button and press the SEL SET button down CLIP Editing Clip Lists MENU Alternatively press the RESET button on the right side of the LCD monitor 6 save the current clip list See Saving the Current Clip List to Disc on page 93 The DF NDF timecode setting of the current clip list is set to the current setting of the camcorder when one of the following operations is performed When you add the first sub clip When you set the start timecode See page 119 for more information about DF NDF settings Switching the Information Displayed on Thumbnails You can switch the information displayed at the bottom of thumbnails in the thumbnail screen You can also select display of sequence numbers Proceed as follows 1 Display the CLIP menu See To display the CLIP menu on page 95 2 Select CLIP INFORMATION A sub menu appears CLIP C0002 002 034 CLIP MENU 4 WCLIP INFORMATION DATE TIME CODE DURATION 00 29 49 23 barmani TCOD 27 51 08 z eee URS mia TC 00 26 06 08 X TC 00 28 22 02 TC 00 200 34 18 00 28 54 22 30 NOV 2005 13 36 DUR 0 00 07 20 Use the SEL SET button or MENU knob to select the information to display from among the following and the
184. eaker or optional earphones When the knob is turned to the minimum setting no sound can be heard Q ALARM alarm tone volume adjustment knob Controls the volume of the warning tone that is output via the built in speaker or optional earphones When the knob is turned to the minimum position no sound can be heard ALARM Minimum Maximum LCD monitor Displays camera video VDR related warnings remaining battery capacity remaining disc space audio levels time data and so on For details see Status Display on the LCD Monitor on page 16 Q MENU switch When flicking toward ON the menu is displayed When flicking toward STATUS the status of the camcorder of current settings is displayed For details see Displaying Menus on page 129 WHITE BAL white balance memory switch Controls adjustment of the white balance PRST Adjusts the color temperature to the preset value the factory default setting 3200K Use this setting when you have no time to adjust the white balance A or B Recall the white balance adjustment settings already stored in A or B Press the AUTO W B BAL switch see page 12 on the WHT side to automatically adjust the white balance and save the adjustment settings in memory A or memory B The 5600K button does not function You can use the AUTO W B BAL switch even when ATW 1 is in use B ATW When this switch is set to B and WHITE SWITCH B is set to ATW
185. ear on the LCD monitor If it appears wait until it disappears before inserting a disc Important Notes on Operation xipueddy 161 xipueddy 162 Maintenance Testing the Camcorder Before Shooting Check the functions of the camcorder before setting out for a shooting session preferably by operating the camcorder together with a color video monitor Preparations for testing 1 2 Attach a fully charged battery pack Set the POWER switch to ON and check that the HUMID indicator does not appear and that the remaining battery capacity indicator Bl shows at least five segments If the HUMID indicator appears wait until it disappears see page 161 f the remaining battery capacity indicator does not show at least five segments replace the battery pack with a fully charged one Check that there are no obstructions near the disc compartment and then press the EJECT button to open the disc compartment lid After confirming that the disc is not write protected load the disc and close the disc compartment lid Testing the Camera Set the switches and selectors as follows Iris A auto Zoom SERVO MANU VDR SAVE STBY SAVE GAIN Set as low as possible OUTPUT DCC BARS WHITE BAL A or B Maintenance Testing the viewfinder 1 2 Adjust the position of the viewfinder Check that the color bars are displayed on the viewfinder screen and adjust the BRIGHT CONTRAST and
186. eated in the root directory The directories in the root directory Clip Edit Sub and General cannot be deleted or renamed Clip directory File name Content Operations Read Partial read Write Partial write Rename Create Delete C MXF 9 Clip file created by recording Yes Yes P Yes Yes 9 Yes 9 MXF file 0001 to 9999 C MO1 XML 9 Metadata file generated Yes Yes 9 No No 9 No automatically when C MXF file is created 0001 to 9999 Other files Files other than the above No No a The C part can be changed to a user definded name b Overwriting not possible c Only files which are 2 seconds or longer in length in a format matching the format system frequency and recording format MPEG HD DVCAM and number of audio channels of the recorded sections of the disc and which can be overwritten by XDCAM d Only when the Write Inhibit tab on the disc is set to enable recording Any clip may be selected and deleted e Only files which can be written by XDCAM f When the C part of a file name is changed a C M01 XML file with the same name in the C part is also changed automatically g When a C MXF file is created a C MO1 XML file with the same name in the C part is created automatically h When a C MXF file is deleted the C M01 XML file with the same name in the C part is also deleted automatically Directo
187. ecifications VCL 719BXS Auto Focus Lens 1 supplied with PDW F335K only DXF 20W Viewfinder 1 Stereo microphone 1 Wind screen 1 Shoulder strap 1 VCT U14 Tripod Adaptor 1 Lens mount cap 1 Flange focal length adjustment test chart 1 PFD23A Professional Disc 1 PDZ 1 Proxy Browsing Software 1 Operating Instructions English version 1 Japanese version 1 CD ROM manual 1 Warranty Booklet 1 Video camera section General Imager 1 2 inch type interline transfer CCD Effective picture elements 1440 H x 1080 V Imager configuration RGB 3 CCDs Spectral system F1 4 prism system with quartz filter ND filter 1 CLEAR 2 1 4 ND 3 1 16 ND Built in filter 4 1 64 ND Lens mount Sony 2 inch type bayonet mount Sensitivity F9 standard 89 9 reflection chart 2000 Ix Minimum illumination 0 13 Ix at F1 4 48 dB gain Video S N ratio 54 dB Y typical Modulation 800 TV lines Geometric distortion None identified excluding distortion due to lens Smear 120 dB Y typical LCD Picture 8 9 cm 2 1 2 inches in opposite angle 3 5 type Pixel resolution 25 000 pixels 1120 wide x 224 high Effective picture elements more than 99 99 VCL 719BXS Auto Focus Lens supplied with the PDW F335K Focal length 6 7 mm to 127 mm Zoom Manual or motorized selectable Zoom ratio x19 Maximum aperture 1 1 6 1 2 1 Telephoto Manual or automatic selectable F1 6 to F16 or C closed Focusing Manual
188. ectly select an appropriate position When this selector is used with the menu item for filter selection display set to ON see page 135 the new setting appears on the viewfinder screen for about 3 seconds You can change a MAINTENANCE menu setting so that different white balance settings can be stored for different FILTER selector positions This allows you to automatically obtain optimum white balance for the current shooting conditions in linkage with the filter selection For details see To adjust the white balance page 54 ZEBRA button Press to display a zebra pattern diagonal stripes in the viewfinder screen The zebra pattern is factory set to indicate picture areas where the video level is approximately 70 However on the VF SETTING page of the OPERATION menu you can change the setting so that areas where the video level is 100 and above are also indicated at the same time In addition you can also change the video level for displaying the zebra pattern in the range from 30 to 107 For details see Setting the Viewfinder Screen Display on page 136 ASSIGN switches You can assign the desired functions to each of the EZ MODE 1 and ASSIGN 2 switches on the ASSIGNABLE page of the OPERATION menu The following functions are factory preset to the switches Switch Function ASSIGN 1 EZ MODE EZ mode ON OFF EZ MODE ASSIGN 2 No assignment equivalent to an OFF selection in the functi
189. ed FAM below are as follows Computer operating system Microsoft Windows 2000 Service Pack 4 or higher or Microsoft Windows XP Preparations Install the FAM driver on the remote computer To install the FAM driver Insert the supplied CD ROM PDZ 1 Proxy Browsing Software in the CD ROM drive of the computer and execute the Setup exe file then follow the installation instructions For details refer to the ReadMe file contained on the CD ROM disc Use Version 1 6 or higher of the FAM driver The FAM driver on the supplied CD ROM is Version 1 6 or higher If a FAM driver is already installed on your computer check the version To check the version click Add or Remove Programs Windows XP or Add Remove Programs Windows 2000 select ProDisc and then click Click here for support information Making FAM connections 1 Ifthere is a disc loaded in this unit put the unit into the following state Recording playback search and other disc operations Stopped THUMBNAIL indicator see page 20 Off Disc access by DELETE LAST CLIP DELETE ALL CLIPS or QUICK FORMAT on the DISC page of the OPERATION menu and so on Stopped Interval Rec function Off MENU switch OFF Unsaved current clip list Save or clear 2 Connect amp DV IN OUT S400 connector on this unit to the i LINK IEEE1394 connector on the remote computer using an i LINK cable File Access Mode File Operations uonesedo aji4
190. ed again or when the camcorder is powered on again If salvage processing is not done sections which were recorded normally can be played back but no new recording can be done on the disc Basic Procedure for Shooting 82 11 12 13 1 1 Set the POWER switch to ON 2 Set the FILTER selector and the 5600K button appropriately for the lighting conditions FILTER selector Examples of shooting setting conditions 1 CLEAR Indoor shooting 2 1 4 ND Cloudy or rainy outdoor shooting or to reduce the depth of field 1 16 ND Sunlight 4 1 64 ND To reduce the depth of field in sunlight a The range over which the subject is sharply in focus Thus reducing the depth of field means that the range is reduced as well and increasing the depth of field means that it is increasing as well Check the switch settings on the camcorder If you do not have enough time to check the settings of the unit you can turn the EZ MODE assigned switch on to use EZ mode for instant shooting EZ mode In EZ mode the settings of this unit are fixed at standard values and the lens aperture and white balance are adjusted automatically In this state it is not possible to change menu or other settings To change settings turn EZ mode off In the factory default configuration the ASSIGN 1 switch see page 13 turns EZ mode on and off Check the settings in the menu Basic Procedure for Shooti
191. ed in double quotation marks for example TITLE00001 To escape from the clip list display to the whole screen display Press the THUMBNAIL button to turn the THUMBNAIL indicator off This returns to the clip list playback state Stop the unit before using the SUB CLIP button Press the STOP button if the message STOP ONCE appears 3 Use the SEL SET button or MENU knob to select the sub clip you want to cue up 4 Tocue up the selected clip press the SEL SET button or MENU knob To start playback from the selected clip press the PLAY PAUSE button The clip list thumbnail screen always shows the first frame In point of each sub clip Locking Write Protecting Clips In the thumbnail screen you can lock them so that they cannot be deleted or altered Locking prevents the following operations on clips Deletion Renaming by FAM or FTP Changing the thumbnail image index picture Thumbnail Search 81 xXoeqKe d pue e Jaydeyo N yoeqhe q pue g 1 2 82 e Adding and deleting shot marks Locked clips are deleted along with other clips Clips cannot be locked or unlocked when the Write Inhibit tab of the disc is set to the recording disabled position 1 With the SUB CLIP indicator off press the THUMBNAIL button lighting the THUMBNAIL indicator The thumbnails of the clips on the disc appear Select the clip to lock you ca
192. ed to 40 the indications MAX 90 80 40 are displayed for three seconds in the viewfinder each time the remaining battery capacity reduces by 10 When the remaining battery capacity is less than 40 the indication is displayed all the time When the remaining battery capacity is less than 10 the indication flashes When the remaining battery capacity is reduced further the LOW flashes Clip list name Displays the name E0001 to E0099 of the currently selected clip list Q 5600 indicator Appears when the electric color temperature filter function is on Filter Indicates the currently selected filter type White balance memory Indicates the currently selected white balance automatic adjustment memory A Displayed when the WHITE BAL switch is set to A B Displayed when the WHITE BAL switch is set to B P Displayed when the WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST or when the preset button on an RM B150 has been pushed T Displayed when ATW is being used QD Gain value Indicates the gain value in dB of the video amplifier as set by the GAIN switch D Shutter speed Indicates the shutter speed or the shutter mode However if the SHUTTER switch see page 13 is set to OFF nothing is displayed For details of the displayed shutter speed see Setting the Electronic Shutter on page 57 D Operation alarm message display area For details see Operation alarm messages on page 166 Audio level
193. encoding video in compliance with the MPEG 4 Visual Standard 4 Video and or ii decoding MPEG 4 Video that was encoded by a consumer engaged in a personal and non commercial activity and or was obtained from a video provider licensed by MPEG LA to provide MPEG 4 Video No license is granted or shall be implied for any other use Additional information including that relating to promotoional internal and commercial uses and licensing may be obtained from MPEG LA LLC See http www mpegla com About i LINK This section explains the specifications and features of i LINK What is i LINK i LINK is a digital serial interface designed to integrate devices equipped with i LINK connectors i LINK allows your device to Perform two way transmission and reception of data such as digital audio and digital video signals Control other i LINK devices e Easily connect multiple devices with a single i LINK cable Your i LINK device is capable of connecting to a wide range of digital AV devices for data transfer and other operations Other advantages include the following feature When connected to multiple i LINK devices your i LINK device can perform data transfer and other operations not only with the directly connected devices but also with any of the devices that are connected to those devices Therefore you do not need to be concerned with device connection order However depending on the features a
194. f Contents 5 6 Adjustments and Settings from Menus 139 Setting Gain Values for the GAIN Switch POSItIODS 139 Selecting the Output Signals 139 Setting the Color Temperature Manually 140 Specifying an Offset for the Auto White Balance Setting use etes 140 Selecting Gamma Tables 141 Making Low Noise Settings 141 Assigning Functions to ASSIGN Switches M 141 Selecting the Lens 142 Selecting the Aspect Ratio 142 About the CCD Scan Mode 143 Chapter 6 Saving and Loading User Setting Data Saving and Loading User Files 145 Handling the Memory Stick 145 Saving USER Menu Data User File to the Memory Stick 146 Loading Saved Data from a Memory Stick osse 148 Saving and Loading Scene Files 149 Saving a Scene 149 Loading Scene Files ueste 151 Resetting the Settings of the Camcorder to the Standard Settings 152 Chapter7 File Operation OVerVIQW ieiis corium re leo dcc tee casero ecran eres 154 Directory Structure 154 File Operation Restrictions 155 File Access Mode File Operations 157 Recording Continuous Timecode over FAM Connections 159
195. f the camcorder and the audio output cable to the AUDIO IN CH 1 or CH 2 connector Set the switches as follows Preparing the Audio Input System suoneredejgd Z jejdeuj 43 suonejedejg z sajdeup 44 Setthe AUDIO IN input selection switch to MIC for the channel to which the audio output cable is connected Set the AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4 switch for the channel to which the audio output cable is connected to REAR for CH 1 CH 2 or R for CH 3 CH 4 Connecting Line Input Audio Equipment 1 Connect an audio mixer or other external audio system component to the AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 connector as shown below AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 switch Set to REAR AUDIO IN pm y FRONT y b WIRELESS xa AUDIO IN input selection switch Set to LINE Hace AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 connector to audio mixer etc 2 Set the AUDIO IN input selection switch to LINE for the channel to which the external audio equipment is connected Selection of the recording audio input Set the AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4 switch for the channel to which the audio device is connected to REAR for CH 1 CH 2 or R for CH 3 CH 4 Connecting the Remote Control Unit Connecting the Remote Control Unit Connecting the RM B150 B750 Remote Control Unit enables remote control of the principal camera and VDR functions Connecting the remote control unit to the REMOTE connector 8 pin automat
196. flashing during flange focal length adjustment see Adjusting the Flange Focal Length on page 35 Iris ring For manual iris adjustment set the IRIS switch to the M manual position then turn this ring Zoom ring For manual zoom adjustment set the ZOOM switch to the MANU position then turn this ring Focus ring Turn this ring to adjust the focus This ring can be turned endlessly in both directions The faster you turn the faster the focusing mechanism operates to minimize the amount of turning required for focusing Flange focal length adjustment button Press this to adjust the flange focal length the distance from the lens mounting flange plane to the focusing plane For details of flange focal length adjustment see Adjusting the Flange Focal Length on page 35 Location and Function of Parts 25 MeIAJOAQ 1e1deuo 26 Q Focus control connector 6 pin Connecting an optional focus servo controller allows remote control of focusing Zoom control connector 8 pin Connecting an optional zoom servo controller allows remote control of zooming ZOOM switch Select the method of zoom operation SERVO Power zoom Operate the zoom with the power zoom lever MANU manual Manual zoom Operate the zoom with the zoom ring IG iris gain control Remove the rubber cap and turn the knob inside to adjust the gain for auto iris adjustment This is setto an appropriate value when
197. for connected serial lens L MF Lens manufacturer for connected serial lens 05 LENS FILE 2 LENS 99 to 99 0 Sets lens file V SAW shading L LENS R FLARE Adjusts lens file flare R LENS G FLARE Adjusts lens file flare G LENS B FLARE Adjusts lens file flare B LENS W R OFST Compensates R value when extender and shrinker used LENS W B OFST Compensates B value when extender and shrinker used 124 Menu Organization and Operation FILE menu No Page Item Settings Default USER Description File menu page 06 LENS FILE SHADING CH SEL R G B R Selects the channel adjusted by this menu LENS R H SAW White shading correction L LENS R H PARA LENS R V SAW LENS R V PARA 07 MEMORY MS FORMAT After asking EXEC Formats Memory Stick STICK YES NO executes the function DIAGNOSIS menu DIAGNOSIS menu No Page Item Settings Default USER Description File menu page 01 HOURS OPERATION Display Shows cumulative time that this METER unit has been powered on in units of 1 hour OPERATION rst Shows cumulative time that this unit has been powered on in units of 1 hour resettable SPINDLE rst Shows cumulative total time of spindle rotation in units of 1 hour resettable LASER rst Shows cumulative light output parameters
198. g CLIP CONT REC Turn the Clip Continuous Rec function on or off a Even when the MARKER item is set to OFF on the MARKER page of the OPERATION menu the ASSIGN switches allow you to turn the display of all markers on or off b Function assignable to ASSIGN 1 and ASSIGN 2 switches only c Abbreviation for Total Level Control System A function to operate the automatic gain control AGC and electronic shutter AE to adapt to varying lighting conditions while shooting d Use when shooting a subject at which a spotlight is directed Use when shooting a backlit subject Select the desired function and press the MENU knob The function is assigned and the ASSIGNABLE page appears again Selecting the Lens File You can change the lens file according to the lens in use 1 Display the LENS FILE page of the FILE menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic Menu Operations on page 129 The LENS FILE page shows the name and the iris setting value of the lens currently selected E O4eLENS F Lens file number mm 12 2 22 Lens name and iris setting value F is B F S L I lt LE L 2 Select LENS AUTO RECALL and press the MENU knob Select ON and press the MENU knob Selecting the Aspect Ratio Switching the aspect ratio for DVCAM recording You can switch the aspect ratio for DVCAM recording
199. g Cause The Memory Stick contains data that cannot be loaded into this camcorder Action Data saved to a Memory Stick using a camcorder whose model is not the same as this camcorder cannot be loaded into this camcorder Saving and Loading Scene Files You can save various settings for shooting a particular scene as a scene file Loading the scene file you can quickly recreate setup conditions suitable for the scene You can save up to five scene files in the camcorder memory and up to 100 scene files in a Memory Stick You can also load data from the Memory Stick into the camcorder memory Data that can be saved in a scene file You can save the following data in a scene file Values adjusted using the PAINT menu Shutter speed settings made in the standard mode and ECS mode SLS mode For details of the PAINT menu see PAINT menu on page 113 Saving a Scene File To save a scene file to the Memory Stick insert the Memory Stick into the Memory Stick slot before starting the operation How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the desired item 1 Display the SCENE FILE page of the FILE menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operation see Basic Menu Operations on page 129 F04 SCENE FILE STANDARD us OSTANDARD To set a file ID for the data to be saved Set the file ID before going to ste
200. g wind noise Normally leave the switch in the OFF position PRESET REGEN regeneration CLOCK switch Selects whether to set a new timecode or to utilize the existing timecode PRESET Records a new timecode REGEN Records timecode continuous with the existing timecode recorded on the disc Regardless of the setting of the F RUN SET R RUN switch the camcorder operates in R RUN mode CLOCK Records timecode synchronized to the internal clock Regardless of the setting of the F RUN SET R RUN switch the camcorder operates in F RUN mode Left Side and Upper Section Q ASSIGN 3 4 switches Accessory fitting shoe Q Shoulder strap fitting Viewfinder front to back positioning knob Lid of the disc compartment Viewfinder left to right positioning ring Viewfinder fitting shoe Fitting for optional microphone holder LIGHT connector MIC IN connector Shoulder pad 1 Video output and timecode connectors see page 22 ASSIGN 3 4 switches You can assign the desired functions to these switches on the ASSIGNABLE page of the OPERATION menu For details see Assigning Functions to ASSIGN Switches on page 141 Large viewfinder attachment shoe Use this to mount an optional 5 inch electronic viewfinder see page 38 Location and Function of Parts 21 M9SIAJOAQ Ja deUD M Q 1 2 22 Viewfinder front to back positioning knob
201. ge is used for focusing In this case the auto focus area frame does not appear If there are a number of objects within the screen at close and far range the focus may not be on the intended subject In this case with the subject on which you want to focus in the center of the screen press the PUSH AF button After focusing with the PUSH AF button if you operate the zoom or adjust the iris the depth of field may become shallower losing crisp focus In such cases press the PUSH AF button once more If you focus at wide angle then zoom to telephoto the subject may no longer be in focus The auto focus function does not operate while using the slow shutter mode 4F or higher Note on zoom speed Depending on the shooting distance the zoom speed may fall as the lens approaches the telephoto end D RET return video button Use this to check the video If you press this while recording by the internal VDR is paused the last few seconds recorded appear in the viewfinder recording review For details see Checking the Last Two Seconds of the Recording Recording Review on page 76 Pressing this button single click during recording records a shot mark 1 and double clicking records a shot mark 2 For details see Recording Shot Marks on page 65 REC recording start button Use this to start and stop recording Press once to start recording then press once more to stop DXF 20W Viewfinder Eyepiec
202. ge of the USER menu appears In this case follow the procedure below D Press the MENU knob Then turn the MENU knob to move to the desired page number This indicates that the menu Screen can be scrolled Q Q Q 09 1 2 Press the MENU knob again The page selected in is displayed Go to step 3 When you set items on the ALL OPERATION PAINT MAINTENANCE FILE DIAGNOSIS and AVDVANCED menu move to the menu that contains the desired item in the TOP menu and then press the MENU knob 2 Tum the MENU knob until the desired page appears U01 PAINT TOP A IRIS sk Q DETAIL LEUEL Q MASTER BLOCK Q GAMMA SELECT STD MASTER _ GAMMA Q BLACK GAMMA OFF PRESET MIX SEL STD Press the MENU knob and 6 appear 00 0 0 4 Turn the MENU knob to move to the desired item and then press the MENU knob changes to and 6 changes to D Turn the MENU knob to change the setting Depending on the direction of turning the knob the setting value increases decreases switches between ON and OFF and so on If you want to cancel a change or return to the standard settings see the items below To interrupt changing the settings and To return to the factory default settings To interrupt changing the settings Flick the MENU switch to OFF By flicking the MENU switch to ON again the values that were displayed when you interrupted the setting operations wi
203. he current clip list in the lower part as a sub clip Creating Clip Lists 91 uonoejes eueog Ja deyD uonoejeg eueog y 1 2 92 Editing Clip Lists Reordering Sub Clips THUMBNAIL button SHIFT button SEL SET button o supur AUDIO LEVEL MARK SEI Gyr F SET Amo A RAUN NUAL S R X AUDIO SELECT MONITOR AUDIO IN LITHIUM BATT T FRONT F o orm e REAR 5 JS 4 FRONTMIC VIDEO QUT MENU knob Proceed as follows 1 Inthe clip list screen hold down the SHIFT button and press the SEL SET button down CLIP MENU The CLIP menu appears CLIP LIST E0006 003 010 F DELETE SORT CLIP TC PRESET ADD r TRIM DELETE 13 JUN 2006 13 30 CLIP MENU CLIP INFORM LOAD CLIP SAVE CLIP 3 TOTAL 2 Use the SEL SET button or MENU knob to select MOVE and press the button or knob This shifts to the MOVE screen 3 Use the SEL SET button four way arrow key or MENU knob to select the sub clip that you want to move and then press the button or knob To make a multiple selection hold down the SHIFT button and turn the MENU knob An I bar cursor appears indicating the movement destination Editing Clip Lists 4 5 Indicates that 2nd sub clip will be moved to position of 7th sub clip CLIP LIST
204. he range OSEC to IOSEC 4 Press the MENU knob The selection is confirmed You can also change the thumbnail image at playback time For details see Switching the Information Displayed in the Thumbnail Screen on page 77 Recording Advanced Operations Recording Advanced Operations Time lapse Video Recording Interval Rec Function The interval recording Interval Rec function is effective for shooting objects that move very slowly As shown in the following figure you need to set the recording time for one recording session NUMBER OF FRAME and the total time consisting of one recording session and the following interval INTERVAL TIME Shooting interval INTERVAL TIME m m EH RH E Recording time for one recording Session NUMBER OF FRAME A pre lighting function is available This function automatically turns on the light before recording starts which allows you to record pictures under stable light and color temperature conditions Making settings before shooting To record in Interval Rec mode you need to set the related items beforehand as follows How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the desired item 1 Set INTERVAL REC to ON on the SPECIAL EFFECTS page of the OPERATION menu For details on menu operations see Basic Menu Operations on page 129 TOP OF 30 OF gt T ON OF OF 10 WTTMATOZNVT The camcorde
205. he DVCAM format is installed Operate the computer to set up the nonlinear editing software For details see the software s manual Video edited using a nonlinear editing system cannot be recorded to disc on this camcorder via an i LINK cable DV cable When a disc with non continuous timecode recorded is subjected to video capturing on a nonlinear editing system the capturing precision may not be frame accurate Connections for Using the PDZ 1 To use the supplied PDZ 1 Proxy Browsing Software connect the computer on which PDZ 1 is installed to this unit in FAM file access mode For details of the connection see Making FAM connections on page 157 For details of PDZ 1 see Using the PDZ 1 Proxy Browsing Software on page 97 Connecting suonejedejg Z jajdeup 47 yoeqhe q pue 48 Recording and Playback chapter Handling Discs Discs Used for Recording and Playback This unit can record and play back the following Professional Disc formats PFD23 capacity 23 3 GB PFD23A capacity 23 3 GB e PFD50DLA capacity 50 0 GB 1 Professional Disc is a trademark of Sony Corporation tis not possible to use the following discs for recording or playback Blu ray Disc Professional Disc for Data PFD50DLA discs can be used only by XDCAM devices with the DL mark see the following illustration They cannot be used by XDCAM devices without t
206. he MENU knob and move the MENU switch to the ON position The TOP menu appears TOP MENU 3U U A S 5 L g M F A MENU CUSTOMIZE TION ENANCE S D DD Ur Tm CD m AA DOMZZA 22 HD mo I D Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to OPERATION then press the MENU knob The CONTENTS page of the OPERATION menu appears You can move to another page when a mark appears OeCONTENTS QD 1 2 3 4 5 5 ra 8 g 0 0000000006 WISZMIN OZS 2D cmo F 5 A D G Press the MENU knob then turn the knob to move the mark to FORMAT 4 Press the MENU knob The FORMAT page appears the MENU knob The mark beside COUNTRY changes to a 6 mark and the mark beside the setting value changes to a mark Turn the MENU knob to display the desired area of use see step 3 in the previous section DDUNDU eCOUNTRY Refer to steps 5 and 6 and select the frame frequency If NTSC J AREA NTSC AREA has been selected NTSC AREA 5 To change the area of use press and turn the MENU knob to move the mark to COUNTRY then press Item Description Setting SYSTEM Setthe frame frequency leoa b 23 9P a More precisely 59 941 b More precisely 29 97P c More precisely 23 98P If PAL AREA has been selected Item Description Set
207. he OPERATION menu 601 interlace scan mode 30P progressive scan mode 23 98P mode Pulldown method for DVCAM format recording in 23 98P mode DVCAM video signals recorded in 23 98P mode are 2 3 pulled down and recorded on a disc as 601 signals DF NDF DF Obtain an effect similar to that obtained by 23 98P shooting while maintaining interlace scan mode Purpose Notes NDF Re convert to 23 98P with nonlinear editing software NLE Select according to your NLE There will be noise on the recorded image if you change the operating mode for the internal timecode generator using the F RUN SET R RUN switch on the side control panel while recording The video and audio signal and timecode output via i LINK may not be consecutive when recording starts Notes on 2 3 pulldown When the PRESET REGEN CLOCK switch on the side control panel is set to CLOCK this unit operates in DF mode The synchronization of the timecode and the pulled down picture is disabled When drop frame timecode is input via the TC IN connector this unit operates in DF mode and synchronization of the pulled down picture and the timecode is disabled This setting will continue in effect until the timecode setting F RUN R RUN or DF NDF is changed Adjustments and Settings from Menus pejrejeq pue s e dsiq nueyy 143 sBunmes pejreyeq pue sAejdsiq nua 1 2 144
208. he REAR MIC REF setting on the AUDIO 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu factory default setting is 60 dB For more details see page 117 If the input level on this unit is not at an appropriate setting for the microphone sensitivity loud sounds may be distorted and the signal to noise ratio may be affected In order for the AUDIO IN CH 1 and CH 2 connectors on the camcorder to be able to provide a phantom 48 V power supply female XLR connectors 3 pin are fitted If the microphone cable has a female connector use an adaptor When you detach a CAC 12 Microphone Holder once you have attached to the camcorder be careful not to lose the two screws fixing the CAC 12 in step 1 After detaching the CAC 12 be sure to put the two screws back into their original places Attaching a UHF Synthesized Tuner You can record sound by using a wireless microphone system consisting of the following WRT 804 807S UHF Wireless Microphone WRT 822 824 UHF Synthesized Transmitter WRR 855 861 862 UHF Synthesized Tuner For the power source of this wireless microphone system use Sony lithium ion battery packs For details on using the wireless microphone system see the operating instructions for the microphone and tuner To attach a WRR 855 1 Open the cover of the WRR connector Set the power switch of the WRR 855 to ON and set MUTING to ON or OFF This enables the WRR 855 power to be turned on and off with the camcorder P
209. he knob to use in adjustments when recording the front microphone to channel 2 SIDE2 Adjust with the right hand AUDIO LEVEL knob on the side control panel FRONT Adjust with the AUDIO LEVEL knob on the front F S2 Allow adjustment with either of the right hand AUDIO LEVEL knob on the side control panel or the AUDIO LEVEL knob on the front The two knobs function in linkage Selects the knob to use in adjustments when recording the AUDIO IN CH1 or WIRELESS to channel 1 SIDE1 Adjust with the left hand AUDIO LEVEL knob on the side control panel FRONT Adjust with the AUDIO LEVEL knob on the front F S1 Allow adjustment with either of the left hand AUDIO LEVEL knob on the side control panel or the AUDIO LEVEL knob on the front The two knobs function in linkage File Menu Organization and Operation MAINTENANCE menu No 02 Page AUDIO 2 Item REAR2 WRR LEVEL Settings SIDE2 FRONT F S2 Default SIDE2 USER menu page Description Selects the knob to use in adjustments when recording the AUDIO IN CH2 or WIRELESS to channel 2 SIDE2 Adjust with the right hand AUDIO LEVEL knob on the side control panel FRONT Adjust with the AUDIO LEVEL knob on the front F S2 Allow adjustment with either of the right hand AUDIO LEVEL knob on the side control panel or the AUDIO LEVEL knob on the front The two knobs function in linkage File 03
210. he menu The factory settings are L 0 dB M 9 dB and 18 dB When this switch is adjusted the new setting appears on the setting change adjustment progress message display area of the viewfinder screen for about 3 seconds Location and Function of Parts For details see Setting Gain Values for the GAIN Switch Positions on page 139 VDR SAVE STBY VDR save standby switch Switches the status of the power supply to the VDR while recording is paused REC PAUSE SAVE At the start of recording an internal operating sound may be recorded There is a small delay from pressing the REC button until recording starts since the power consumption is less than in the standby state STBY When the REC button is pressed recording starts immediately Even if the switch is on the SAVE side the unit exits SAVE power saving mode and enters STBY standby mode whenever you exit REC PAUSE mode by carrying out playback to check the recorded video or by displaying the thumbnail screen page 76 To put the unit into SAVE mode again put the unit into REC PAUSE mode again after recording or power the unit off and on again An internal operating sound may be recorded at the start of recording when the VDR SAVE STBY switch is set to SAVE POWER switch Turns the main power supply on and off Q MONITOR monitor volume adjustment knob Controls the volume of the sound other than the warning tone that is output via the built in sp
211. hem Usually by flicking the MENU switch to ON the USER menu is displayed Menu Organization and Operation USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu This menu allows you to add pages to or delete pages from the USER menu to suit your needs ALL menu This menu contains all items of the OPERATION PAINT MAINTENANCE FILE DIAGNOSIS and ADVANCED menus as they are in one menu OPERATION menu This menu contains items for changing settings according to conditions related to the subject when the camcorder is being operated PAINT menu This menu contains items for making detailed image adjustments while using a waveform monitor to monitor the waveforms output by the camera Support of a video engineer is usually required to use this menu Although you can also use an external remote control unit to set the items on this menu this menu is effective when using the camcorder by itself outdoors MAINTENANCE menu This menu includes contains items for making settings for audio timecode essence marks and battery FILE menu This menu is for saving the adjusted data in the camcorder memory or in a Memory Stick The following files can be saved User file In the user file the setting items and setting data of the customized USER menu are saved Once you save the user file in a Memory Stick you can easily set the USER menu to your preference by loading the data from the Memory Stick For details on the user file see Saving
212. his mark ce Professional Disc Notes on Handling Handling The Professional Disc is housed in a cartridge and is designed to allow handling free of risk from dust or fingerprints However if the cartridge is subjected to a severe shock for example by dropping it this can result in damage or scratching of the disc If the disc is scratched it may be impossible to record video audio or to play back the content recorded on the disc The discs should be handled and stored carefully Handling Discs Do not touch the surface of the disc itself within the cartridge Deliberately opening the shutter may cause damage Do not disassemble the cartridge The supplied adhesive labels are recommended for indexing discs Apply the label in the correct position Storage Do not store discs where they may be subjected to direct sunlight or in other places where the temperature or humidity is high Do not leave cartridges where dust may be able to gain ingress Store cartridges in their cases Care of the discs Remove dust and dirt on the outside of a cartridge using a soft dry cloth f condensation forms allow ample time to dry before use Write Protecting Discs To protect the content recorded on the disc from accidental erasure move the Write Inhibit tab on the lower surface of the disc in the direction of the arrow as shown in the following figure Lower surface of the disc Write Inhibit t
213. hting conditions while shooting VBS Abbreviation for video burst sync A composite signal consisting of a video signal a burst signal and a sync signal Vertical smear A bright vertical line which appears on the screen when shooting a very bright object with a CCD camera Also called smear Video gain Amount of amplification for video signals expressed in decibels dB VITC Abbreviation for vertical interval timecode A timecode recorded on disc with video signals and inserted in the vertical blanking interval of video signals The VTR can read this timecode even in still mode White balance The balance of the levels of the red green and blue channels of a color video camera level When this balance is correctly adjusted white tones appear as a true white White shading When shooting a white subject with a color video camera if the lens characteristics are such that while the center of the image appears white the upper and lower portions suffer a color imbalance appearing magenta or green This phenomenon is called white shading Zebra pattern Striped patterns that appear in the viewfinder to indicate areas of the picture where the video level is about 70 IRE units or 490 mV Zoom To gradually change the field of view of a camera lens from wide to narrow angle zoom in or narrow to wide angle zoom out Glossary xipueddy 183 xepu 184 Index Numerics 23 98P mode
214. ically puts the camcorder into remote control mode If you disconnect the remote control unit the remote control mode is cancelled Refer to the RM B150 B750 Operation Manual for the maximum cable length for connections between the camcorder and the RM B150 B750 RM B150 B750 REMOTE connector Remote control cable Before connecting disconnecting the remote control unit to from the camcorder be sure to turn off the camcorder POWER switch Camcorder switch functions when the remote control unit is connected Connecting the remote control unit disables the following switches on the camcorder GAIN switch OUTPUT DCC switch WHITE BAL switch AUTO W B BAL switch SHUTTER switch Paint adjustment when the remote control unit is connected The settings of the paint adjustment that were in effect the last time the remote control unit was used are recalled When the monitor is connected to the remote control unit The MONITOR connector BNC type of the RM B150 B750 outputs the same signal as that from the VIDEO OUT connector on the camcorder Use the black cable supplied with the RM B150 B750 to connect the monitor to the MONITOR connector on the RM B150 B750 The camcorder does not have a function to output test signals Even when TEST is selected using the output signal selection switch button of the remote control unit the test signal is not output from the MO
215. igher Web browser Internet Explorer 6 0 Service Pack 1 or higher DirectX DirectX 8 1b or higher To install the PDZ 1 Insert the supplied CD ROM PDZ 1 Proxy Browsing Software in the CD ROM drive of the computer and execute the Setup exe file then follow the installation instructions For details refer to the ReadMe file in the CD ROM Make sure that the hard disk drive on which the work folder to store the material transferred from this unit has adequate free space The amount of proxy AV data transferred is up to a maximum of 2 8 GB per disc LP format Using the PDZ 1 Proxy Browsing Software uonoejes eueog Ja deyD 97 sBumes pue sAejdsiq nua 1 2 98 Menu Displays and Detailed Settings Chapter Menu Organization and Operation The following chart shows the organization of menus in this camcorder Note that the USER menu organization shown in the chart is as registered at the factory For details about USER MENU CUSTOMIZE see Editing the USER Menu on page 131 Menu Organization and Operation Menu selection 1st level 2nd level 3rd level TOP MENU USER PAINT A IRIS DETAIL LEVEL MASTER BLACK GAMMA SELECT MASTER GAMMA BLACK GAMMA PRESET MATRIX SEL SCENE FILE 1 5 STANDARD SCENE RECALL SCENE STORE FID I FORMAT SYSTEM REC FORMAT I
216. ind Clip and Clip List Name on page 71 Clip list You can use the scene selection function to select desired clips from the clips saved on a disc and create a cut edit list called a clip list Clip lists have numbers beginning with E for example E0001 Up to 99 clip lists can be saved on a disc Clip list number 1187 006 034 Thumbnails of selected clip list Sub clips clips in clip lists The specified clips or parts of clips in a clip list are called sub clips Sub clips are virtual edit lists specifying ranges in the original clips Clip data in the original clips is not overwritten The following figure illustrates the relation between clips and sub clips Clips on the disc Clip 1 Clip 2 C0002 Clip 3 C0003 C0001 Clip list E0001 Sub clip 1 Sub clip 2 Sub clip In the above example the whole of clip 2 has been added as sub clip 1 and the whole of clip 4 has been added as sub clip 2 Sub clip 3 is part of clip 3 Therefore when clip list E0001 is played back clip 4 is played after clip 2 and then the part of clip 3 shown in gray color is played Clip list editing current clip list To edit a clip list you need to load the clip list from the disc into the internal unit memory The clip list which is currently loaded into the unit memory is called the current clip list The current clip list is always the target of sub clip creation and ed
217. ing 62 ser file loading 148 saving 146 setting the fileID 147 USER menu editing 131 moving to another page 131 resetting 134 setting 130 USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu adding anew page 131 adding deleting replacing pages 133 Ghee a V VCL 719BXS 25 VDR operation indicators 28 VDR SAVE STBY switch 14 VF connector 12 VF DISP 1 page 112 VF DISP 2 page 112 VF SETTING page 111 Video camera section 176 Video light attaching 40 VIDEO OUT CHARACTER switch 21 VIDEO OUT connector 24 VIDEO OUT page 111 VIDEO OUT Y PB PR connector 22 Video signal from the camera outputting 15 Viewfinder 27 adjusting contrast and brightness 38 adjusting the eyepiece focus 38 adjusting the outline emphasis 38 adjusting the position 37 attaching 37 cleaning 164 detaching 37 setting 136 status display 135 status display on the screen 28 135 Viewfinder connector 28 Viewfinder fitting shoe 22 Viewfinder front to back positioning knob 22 Viewfinder left to right positioning ring 22 Volume adjustment 14 W WARNING indicator 18 Warning indicator area 18 WHITE BAL switch 15 White balance adjusting 54 ATW 56 automatic adjustment 12 memory indicator 29 offset 140 WHITE page 114 WHITE SETTING page 120 WRR connector 23 Z ZEBRA button 13 Zoom control connector 26 Zoom position indicator 28 Zoom ring 25 ZOOM switch 26 Index 187 http www sony net Sony Corporation
218. ing and turning the MENU knob you can set various menu items In the remainder of this section the LCD monitor is generally shown as an example of the menu display but a similar display also appears on the viewfinder screen To select the setting items and values on the menu Turn the MENU knob to select in the cases explained below TOeOUTPUT TOP COMPONENT QUT AUTO HD SD PLAY BACK 16 9 COCIINNN Droco4 o When blinks turn the MENU knob to switch pages To select a menu or setting item When appears turn the MENU knob to move up and down Menu Organization and Operation pejrejeq pue s e dsiq nua 129 sBumes pejreyeg pue sAejdsiq nua 2 130 To change a setting value 10eOUTPUT TOP eCOMPONENT OUT 80 0 50 ASPECT 10eOUTPUT TOP eCOMPONENT OU AUTO HD SD PLAY BACK 16 9 When blinks turn the MENU knob to change the setting ON OFF value etc To confirm the selection of a menu a setting item or a setting value Each time you press the MENU knob the menu display switches in the following sequence Example When using the OPERATION menu TOP menu CONTENTS page T OO eCONTENTS DES pongo uo gt If the menu has not been used Q Q 0 Q 0 Q 0 Q Q 1 CWUDNOVIBWN vt the menu has been used before Menu selection mode Fi OO CONTENTS COMPON
219. ing operation see Loading a Clip List from the Disc as the Current Clip List on page 96 2 With the THUMBNAIL indicator off hold down the SHIFT button and press the SEL SET button up SUB CLIP The SUB CLIP indicator lights Press the PLAY PAUSE button Playback begins from the first sub clip in the current clip list To return from clip list playback mode to normal playback mode With Clip list playback stopped hold down the SHIFT button and press the SET SEL to the top side the SUB CLIP side Depending on the length of sub clips in the clip list and their arrangement on the disc playback may freeze momentarily between sub clips Cuing up with sub clip thumbnails With the desired clip list loaded in the current clip list proceed as follows 1 Press the THUMBNAIL button lighting the THUMBNAIL indicator 2 Hold down the SHIFT button and press the SEL SET button up SUB CLIP The clip list display appears See page 88 for more information about the clip list screen Sixth frame is selected Name of loaded clip list a from a total of 34 sub clips Sub clip information date and time of creation initial timecode playback time 006 034 1 01 f m 1 TCO00 05 10 08 TC 00 05 21 08 lom Currently selected Sub clip Recording date and time of selected sub clip Total playback time of sub clips in a clip list a If the clip list has a title page 69 the title is displayed enclos
220. ing the Chapter Function A thumbnail display shows the SHOT MARKI and SHOT MARK2 recorded within the specified clip as chapter titles 1 With the THUMBNAIL indicator and SUB CLIP indicator off press the THUMBNAIL button 2 Use the SEL SET button four way arrow key or MENU knob to select the desired clip An S mark appears at the upper right of the thumbnails of clips that have short marks set S mark x Press the COUNTER CHAPTER button the right side of the LCD monitor A chapter screen is displayed The essence marks REC START SHOT MARKI SHOT MARK2 recorded within the clip appear as thumbnails Thumbnail Search xXoeqKe d pue e Jeydeyo 79 pue Bulpiooey e 80 CHAPTER 0019 il s mu 3 i T D1 01 28 25 TC 01 07 10 18 TE 01 097 i EH S TCOT 12 31 08 01 13 49 08 01 10 25 03 F Tl I TCUT 17 13 24 TCUT 17 23 18 D TCOT 17 43 01 TCUT 10 02 15 30 NOV 2005 14 14 DUR 0 00 38 29 The S1 and S2 marks displayed on thumbnails indicate frames where SHOT MARKI and SHOT MARKQ2 are set Thumbnails without one of these marks are frames where REC START essence marks are set For details of chapter settings see Recording Shot Marks page 65 Deleting shot marks You can delete a specified clip shot mark Only SHOT MARKI and SHOT MARK2 can be de
221. ing to the setting of this item INT When one of the above batteries is installed the remaining power is shown as a percentage value 96 when there is a change in the value or when the power is low AUTO The remaining power is shown as a percentage value 96 when one of the above batteries is installed Otherwise the voltage VOLT is displayed continuously VOLT The voltage VOLT is displayed continuously VF DISP 2 page Item Description DISP 5600K Displays 5600K DISP FILTER Displays types of the ND filter DISP WHITE Displays selected white balance memory DISP GAIN Displays gain value DISP SHUTTER Displays shutter speed and ECS mode DISP AUDIO Displays audio level DISP DISC Displays remaining disc capacity DISP IRIS Lens iris setting indication DISP LOW LIGHT LOW LIGHT indication when the average video level is below a certain threshold DISP INTERVAL INTERVAL TIME indication during interval recording Turn the MENU knob to select the desired setting ON OFF or value and press the MENU knob 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set all of the desired items Change Confirmation Adjustment Progress Messages The messages indicating setting changes progress and consequence of adjustments and the situations indicated by these messages are as follows Setting change confirmation adjustment progress messages Situation Message
222. internal memory or by entering the prefix directly However to choose from a prefix list you must create the list beforehand on a computer and transfer it to the unit s internal memory with a Memory Stick Setting the initial value of the serial number The initial value of the serial number can be set to 00001 the default or to any other number The number is automatically incremented by 1 each time you record a clip When it reaches 99999 it returns to 00001 for the next clip Duplicate clip titles can be generated depending on the serial number setting for example if you reset the serial number to the original value after recording several clips Care should be taken when setting the serial number To assign user defined titles automatically when clips are recorded On the CLIP TITLE page of the OPERATION menu set TITLE to ENABL For details on menu operations see Basic Menu Operations on page 129 The following items appear Clip titles will be generated automatically if you record in this state The title of the next clip to be recorded will be a combination of the prefix in the PREFIX field and the serial number in the NUMERIC field To use any alphanumeric character string see the following Recording Advanced Operations To enter a title prefix directly Proceed as follows 1 Onthe CLIP TITLE page select PREFIX and then press the MENU knob A prefix string appears J DXXXXXD
223. inued for a few seconds to record the picture in the instant of power off If you remove the battery pull out the DC cable or cut power to the AC adaptor during recording video and audio stored in memory will be lost without being recorded to the disc For this reason make sure you do not change the battery while recording Assigning User Defined Clip Titles Automatically About the Automatic Title Generation Function By default clips on each disc are assigned names in the range C0001 MXF to C0300 MXF For this reason two discs can contain clips with the same names The automatic title generation function allows you to assign titles to all of the clips on several discs which facilitates clip management For example if the titles TITLE00001 to TITLE00020 are assigned to clips CO001 MXF to C0020 MXF on disc 1 then the titles TITLE00021 to TITLE00037 are assigned to clips CO001 MXF to C0017 MXF on disc 2 Titles are made up of prefixes up to 10 characters in length and five digit serial numbers such as TITLE 00001 TITLEOO0020 TITLEO0001 Clips recorded on Disc 1 Recording Advanced Operations xXoeqKe d pue e Jaydeyo 69 yoeqhe q pue 70 f TITLE00021 Clips recorded on Disc 2 Setting the title prefix You can assign title prefixes by choosing from a prefix list stored in
224. ion 1st level 2nd level 3rd level SD DETAIL SD DETAIL SD DETAIL LEVEL SD CRISPENING SD DTL LIMIT SD LEVEL DEPEND SD DTL FREQUENCY SD DTL H V RATIO SD CROSS COLOR WHITE SHADING WHITE SHADING CH SEL VIDEO OUT SEL WHT SAW WHT H PARA R WHT V SAW WHT V PARA WHITE SAW PARA BLACK SHADING BLACK SHADING CH SEL VIDEO OUT SEL BLK SAW BLK H PARA BLK V SAW BLK V PARA BLACK SAW PARA MASTER BLACK MASTER GAIN TMP DCC D RANGE DCC DCC POINT DCC GAIN DCC DELAY TIME ND COMP ND OFFSET ADJUST CLEAR ND OFFSET TOP Menu The TOP menu consists of the following submenus TOP MENU MENU CUSTOMIZE TION 4 DCC DOnzw 00 Cc DDUrTm R R E I I L A S U RA NI NT E GN AN OSI CED When you select an item in the TOP menu this displays the most recently shown page of the corresponding submenu When the submenu is selected for the first time the CONTENTS page appears USER menu This menu allows you to add items from the OPERATION PAINT MAINTENANCE FILE DIAGNOSIS and ADVANCED menus to suit your needs By gathering frequently used items on the USER menu beforehand you can call up them quickly whenever you need t
225. ion 79 adding sub clips 91 Clip 87 assigning titles automatically 69 Assigning User Defined Clip names 71 deleting 64 83 Locking 81 recording 52 Clip Continuous 74 Clip list 87 creating 88 deleting from the disc 96 managing 95 name display 29 playback 80 Sorting 96 CLIP TITLE page 109 CLK 18 CNT 18 Color bar signal outputting 15 Color temperature setting 140 Component video signal output connector 22 Composite video signal output connector 24 Connecting controlling from a non linear editing system 47 controlling from the VTR using the editing function 47 copying digitally 46 external video monitor 46 i LINK connection settings 46 Connector section 22 CONTRAST control 27 COUNTER CHAPTER button 16 Current clip list 87 reading from the disc 96 D Date time setting 34 DC IN connector 23 DC OUT 12 V connector 24 DCC Dynamic Contrast Control 15 DETAIL page 115 DF NDF 61 DIAGNOSIS menu 125 Directory Structure 154 Disc ejecting 19 handling 48 loading and unloading 49 remaining capacity indicator 17 29 write protecting 48 DISC page 109 Display items selecting 135 DISPLAY switch 28 DISPLAY EXPAND button 15 DV OUT connector 24 E EARPHONE jack 18 ECS 57 E E 18 EJECT button 18 19 Electronic shutter 57 ESSENCE MARK page 119 Essence Marks recording 65 Expand function 80 adding sub clips 90 External synchronization indicator 17 Eyepiece focusing knob 27 Eyepiece focusing ring 27 EZ focu
226. ip shorter than 2 seconds If you stop recording within 2 seconds of starting this results in a 2 second clip If you stop recording and restart within 2 seconds of the original start this creates a single continuous clip from the original start time The maximum number of clips that can be recorded on a single disc is 300 If an attempt is made to record more than 300 clips the error message DISC FULL appears even if there is free capacity on the disc Recording Basic Operations Selecting the Recording Format Before recording select the recording format There are restrictions on the recording formats that can be combined on a single disc How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the desired item 1 Display the FORMAT page of the USER or OPERATION menu and press the MENU knob For details of menu operations see Basic Menu Operations on page 129 4 you have changed the setting of SYSTEM or COUNTRY power off the unit then power on again 5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 to set the all of the desired items HD recording bit rate settings and recording times When PFD23 PFD23A discs are used Bit rate Audio channels Recording time used HQ mode 9 4 channels More than 65 Variable bit rate minutes upper limit 35 2 channels More than 68 Mbps minutes SP mode 4 channels More than 85 Fixed
227. isc access may continue for a short time after you press the REC START button to stop recording During this time the playback control buttons are disabled as in recording mode Also if you press the REC START button or the VTR button on the lens to restart recording during this time a separate clip is recorded When you press the REC START button or the VTR button on the lens to restart recording during disc access the start point of the recorded clip may be later than the Picture Cache time especially when there are a large number of clips recorded on the disc In Picture Cache mode you should avoid stop and start recording operations in quick succession The time disc access stops after the REC START button is pressed equals the Picture Cache time However if you start recording within the Picture Cache time immediately after selecting Picture Cache mode changing the Picture Cache time or performing playback or recording review the picture data for the duration of the Picture Cache time will not be stored in memory Thus the time disc access stops after the STOP button is pressed becomes shorter than the Picture Cache time In Picture Cache mode you cannot set the F RUN SET R RUN switch to SET to make time code settings To make time code settings first exit Picture Cache mode When power is lost during recording When the power is turned off during recording the camcorder will switch itself off after disc access has cont
228. isplay is set to STATUS with the DISPLAY EXPAND button 3 98 lo om 12 EEEREEEEREEREEEREEEENEEN 1 CO PERE RRR gt NEEEBENEEEREEENEEREREEENEN Q Video format Indicates the format of video being currently played back or recorded HD HQ HQ high quality mode in the MPEG HD video format HD SP SP standard play mode in the MPEG HD video format HD LP LP long play mode in the MPEG HD video format DVCAM DVCAM format Playback indicator Appears during playback Q Camera scan mode indicator Indicates the camera scan mode of video being currently played back or recorded If NTSC AREA is selected D 601 59 94 fields per second interlace scan mode 30P 29 97 frames per second progressive scan mode 23 98P 23 98 frames per second progressive scan mode converted to 60i at 2 3 pulldown If PAL AREA is selected D 501 50 fields per second interlace scan mode 25P 25 frames per second progressive scan mode 1 Selected by COUNTRY setting on the FORMAT page of the OPERATION menu see page 106 There may be no indication displayed when this unit cannot identify the camera scan mode for example when playing back a disc recorded with other equipment Non drop frame mode indicator Appears when non drop frame timecode is selected External synchronization indicator Appears when the internal timecode generator is locked to an external signal input to the TC timecode connector
229. isplays Blank Names ALL file A character input mode up to 16 character ALL PRESET After asking EXEC Returns items in ALL file to preset YES NO values executes the function Menu Organization and Operation pue sfejdsiq nueyy 123 FILE menu No Page Item Settings Default USER Description File menu page 03 SCENE FILE 01 STANDARD See Saving and Loading User 02 Files on page 145 13 04 05 LISTANDARD SCENE RECALL Displays the EXEC SCENE FILE SCENE STORE seledtioh Screen F ID Displays Blank Sc character input mode up to 16 characters 04 LENS FILE 1 LENS FILE RECALL Displaysthe EXEC Loads lens file FILE NEN LENS FILE STORE selection Saves lens file Screen F ID Displays Blank Names lens file L Q character B input mode up to 16 a characters E SOURCE Displays number of selected lens S file LENS NO OFFSET After asking EXEC Resets the lens file to standard YES NO 3 executes the function S IRIS GAIN 99 to 99 Adjusts the response speed of the L auto iris according to the lens n 2 LENS AUTO RECALL ON OFF Selects whether to automatically read in a lens file LENS INFORMATION gt L ID Lens file name
230. iting Clip list playback also uses the current clip list After creating and editing a clip list you need to save it to disc Unit memory Current clip list Clip list playback Can be edited adding deleting thumbnail reordering sub clips display SAVE 44 LOAD C0001 Clip 1 E0001 Clip list 1 C0002 Clip 2 E0002 Clip list 2 C0003 Clip 3 E0003 Clip list 3 E0099 Clip list 99 Clip list playback Clips and clip lists are saved together on a disc Clips are played back according to clip list data Overview uonoejes eueog Ja deyD 87 Creating Clip Lists CLIP CO0D002 002 03 uonoejeg eueog y 1 2 88 Including Sub Clips in the Current Clip List Select the desired clip in the thumbnail screen to include it in the clip list as a sub clip The CLIP menu handles up to 99 clip lists Including a clip selected in the thumbnail screen in the clip list SUB CLIP indicator FRONTMC VIDEO QUT LOW CUT CHARACTER FRONT WIRELESS REAR Proceed as follows 1 With the SUB CLIP indicator off press the THUMBNAIL button to turn the THUMBNAIL indicator on If the menu screen is displayed move the MENU switch to the OFF position and press the THUMBNAIL button If you move the MENU switch to ON while thumbnails are displayed the thumbnail display disappears and the menu appears The thumbnails
231. ization and a sampling frequency of 48 kHz Depending on shooting requirements and recording time either two or four audio channels can be selected Only four channels for DVCAM recording The unit is equipped with a stereo front microphone There are two AUDIO IN connectors XLR 3 pin on the rear of the unit which can be used for line and microphone input The CA WR855 Camera Adaptor supplied separately can be used to install the WRR 855 series slot in type UHF synthesized tuner supplied separately without using any connecting cable The audio signals to be recorded on the disc can be freely selected from the audio inputs to the stereo microphone AUDIO IN connectors and the UHF synthesized tuner and assigned to any desired audio channel Input Output Features Equipped with an i LINK connector The i LINK connector on this unit supports the following two functions DV stream output AV C 1 mode connection A DV stream can be output from the i LINK connector on this unit and recorded on a DV recorder or nonlinear editor supporting DV For recording and playback in MPEG HD format a down converted DV stream can be output File access from a computer FAM 2 connection An FAM connection between this unit and a computer allows the video audio and metadata information on the disc to be read and written as files The data can be written and read as normal files on a computer With this function a nonlinear editing
232. k set A reference level for black balance adjustment CCD Abbreviation for charge coupled device A semiconductor device used in place of a camera pickup tube A semiconductor used in place of a camera tube The CCD converts light into electrical charge and outputs the electrical charge in the form of varying voltages Center marker A cross on the viewfinder screen that indicates the center of an image Clip A recording unit Clips are created every time recording starts and stops Clip list A list of locations in the material recorded on the disc arranged in any order Clips lists can be created with the scene selection function of this unit and with the supplied PDZ 1 Proxy Browsing Software Color bar signals Test signals displayed on the screen as multicolored vertical stripes Used for adjustment of hue and saturation of a video camera and video monitor Color subcarrier In a composite video signal a signal superimposed upon the picture luminance information for the purpose of conveying the associated color information Color and saturation information is conveyed by the phase and amplitude of the color subcarrier Also called subcarrier Color temperature The color quality of light expressed in Kelvin K Reddish colors have a lower color temperature and blueish colors a higher color temperature CRT Cathode Ray Tube Video camera viewfinders are equipped with a CRT image display so y
233. l see page 19 EARPHONE jack By plugging earphones you can monitor the E E sound during recording and playback sound during playback When an alarm is indicated you can hear the alarm sound through the earphones Plugging earphones into the jack automatically cuts off the sound from the built in speaker You can select monaural or stereo on the AUDIO 2 page of the MAINTENANCE menu Q EJECT button and indicator Press this button to insert a disc or eject the disc The indicator flashes while the disc is being ejected F REV fast reverse button and indicator This plays back at high speed in the reverse direction The indicator lights during high speed playback in the reverse direction Q PLAY PAUSE button and indicator Press this button to view play back video images using the viewfinder screen or a color video monitor The indicator lights during playback Press this button again during playback to pause outputting a still image At this time the indicator flashes This unit is equipped with a color search function at approximately four times normal playback speed for easy checking of recorded material To use the color search function at approximately four times normal playback speed press the F REV button or F FWD button during playback At this time the PLAY indicator and F REV or F FWD indicator light F FWD fast forward button and indicator This plays back at high speed in the forward direction Th
234. leted REC START cannot be deleted Shot mark deletion is only possible when the settings are such that shot mark recording is possible Essence marks cannot be deleted when the clip is locked page 81 1 Inthe chapter screen hold down the SHIFT button and press the SEL SET button down CLIP MENU The CLIP menu appears see page 95 2 Select DELETE SHOT MARK 3 Select the clip SHOT MARKI or SHOT MARK2 By holding down the SHIFT button and turning the MENU knob you can select more than one chapter 4 Press the SEL SET button or MENU knob A confirmation message appears D Select OK and then press the SEL SET button or MENU knob This deletes the specified shot mark Searching Using the Expand Function Using the expand function you can divide the duration of a selected clip on the thumbnail screen into 12 segments Thumbnail Search and display a new thumbnail screen showing the first frame in each segment This function allows rapid searching of the scenes within a particular clip The expand function can be applied up to three times 12 divisions 144 divisions and 1728 divisions When FIND MODE on the ESSENCE MARK page of the MAINTENANCE menu is set to CLIP this function operates in clip units When FIND MODE is set to R ST it operates in REC START essence mark units the range of a single recording operation The maximum number of blocks may be larger than 1728 when the recorded durati
235. letes a clip recorded on the disc DELETE ALL CLIPS Deletes all clips recorded on the disc QUICK FORMAT Formats the disc Any recorded content is lost 05 CLIP TITLE CLIP TITLE ENABL DSABL See Assigning User Defined Clip A DSABL Titles Automatically on page 69 TITLE EXEC SELECT PREFIX CLEAR NUMERIC LOAD PREFIX DATA PREFIX A NUMERIC 06 FILE NAMING FORM FREE C C Specify the clip and clip list name A NAMING format C Standard format FREE Enable free format AUTO NAMING TITLE C Specify the format of the file names generated when clips are recorded C Standard format TITLE Assign the same name as clip title 07 GAIN SW GAIN LOW 3dB 0dB 0dB See Setting Gain Values forthe A 3dB 6dB GAIN Switch Positions on page GAIN MID 9dB 12dB 9dB 139 GAIN HIGH 18dB 24dB 18dB 36dB GAIN TURBO A2dB 48dB 42dB 08 EZMODE TLCS MODE AGC amp AE AGC amp Selects the TLCS function in EZ A TLCS AGC AE AE mode AGC amp AE automatic gain and shutter control AGC automatic gain control only AE automatic shutter control only AGC LIMIT 0 3 6 9 12dB Sets the upper limit for AGC 12dB adjustment This function operates normal only when using the EZ mode setting value AGC CHANGE OPEN F2 F2 8 Sets the f stop for switching from POINT F2 8 F4 automatic iris adjustment to AGC F5 6 This function operates only when using the EZ mode AE LIMIT 1 100 to 1 250 Set
236. lip names automatically TITLE Assign clip titles as clip names 6 Tum the MENU knob to display TITLE and then press the MENU knob The same name will now be given to newly recorded clips When the first letter of the title setting on the CLIP TITLE menu is a space or period the clip name is the title string minus the first letter To enable clip and clip list renaming by FAM Carry out steps 2 to 6 of To assign clip names on this unit It is now possible to write transfer and rename clips and clip lists with user defined names over file access mode FAM connections see page 157 To rename a clip execute Rename on a clip with the extension MXF in the Clip folder The extension cannot be changed Clip renaming by FAM is enabled To rename a clip list execute Rename on a clip list with the extension SMI in the Edit folder The SMI extension cannot be changed Recording Advanced Operations Sakura SMI Clip list renaming by FAM is enabled To check clip names Press the THUMBNAIL button to display the thumbnail screen and select the clip whose name you want to check The name of the selected clip appears at the upper left of the screen However when the clip has a title the title is displayed instead Titles are enclosed in double quotation marks 7 See Thumbnail Search page 76 for more information about the thumbnail screen I
237. ll reappear so you can continue making settings O Press the MENU knob changes to and changes to The selection is confirmed To continue setting other items on the same page repeat steps from 4 to 6 8 the menu operation flick the MENU switch to OFF The menu disappears from the screen and the display indicating the current status of the camcorder appears along the top and bottom of the screen To return to the factory default settings The settings return to the factory default values if the MENU knob is pressed and held in step 5 of the above procedure To move to another page Page number When appears in front of the page number Turn the MENU knob to switch pages When nothing appears in front of the page number Turn the MENU knob to move to the page number and press the MENU knob Then turn the MENU knob to switch pages Editing the USER Menu The USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu allows you to configure a USER menu that consists only of pages and items that you need by adding deleting or replacing the pages To add a new page The USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu allows you to add a new page to the USER menu While the EDIT page contains factory preset items the USER 1 EDIT to USER 19 EDIT pages are all blank in their initial state You can register up to 10 items including blank lines on each of these pages How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to m
238. ll up the strap to lock the fitting 2 Fitthe other clip to the shoulder strap fitting on the other side of the grip in the same way as in step 1 Pull in the direction of the arrow while pressing here Adjusting the Shoulder Pad Position You can shift the shoulder pad backward or forward by up to 35 mm 1 7 16 inches This adjustment helps you get the best balance for shooting with the camcorder on your shoulder 7 o Bottom of the ECT camcorder T o es 2 Shoulder pad 1 Raise the lever in the center of the shoulder pad to unlock the shoulder pad 2 Slide the shoulder pad backward or forward until it is in the most convenient position 3 Bring down the lever to lock the shoulder pad in the selected position Using the Shoulder Strap Adjusting the Shoulder Pad Position 39 suonejedejg Z jajdeup suonejedejg 2 sajdeup 40 Mounting on a Tripod First fit the VCT U14 Tripod Adaptor to the tripod then mount the camcorder on the tripod adaptor VCT U14 Tripod Adaptor Slide the camcorder forward along the Model name space slot until it clicks firmly into place The camcorder cannot be mounted on a tripod adaptor with one of the following indications in the model name space as shown in the above illustration Use the appropriate tripod adaptor e VCT UI4 only e VCT U14 B e VCT U14 D To remove the tripod
239. ly for the two channels to carry it out in stereo mode or not at all In the color bar mode selects whether to output a 1 kHz test signal ON Output OFF Do not output AUTO Output the test signal only when the AUDIO SELECT CH 1 switch is set to AUTO File Menu Organization and Operation pue s e dsiq nua 117 sBumes pue sAejdsiq nua 2 118 MAINTENANCE menu No 02 Page AUDIO 2 Item Settings Default AU OUT LIMITER ON OFF ON HEADPHONE OUT STEREO MONO MONO i LINK AUDIO OUT 2CH 4CH 2CH MIC CH1 LEVEL SIDE1 FRONT FRONT 51 MIC CH2 LEVEL SIDE2 FRONT F S2 REAR1 WRR LEVEL SIDE1 SIDE1 FRONT F 51 USER menu page Description Turns the audio output limitter on or off Selects whether the earphones are monaural or stereo 2CH Output channels 1 and 2 16 bits 48 ksps 4CH Output channels 1 to 4 12 bits 32 ksps Selects the knob to use in adjustments when recording the front microphone to channel 1 SIDE1 Adjust with the left hand AUDIO LEVEL knob on the side control panel FRONT Adjust with the AUDIO LEVEL knob on the front F S1 Allow adjustment with either of the left hand AUDIO LEVEL knob on the side control panel or the AUDIO LEVEL knob on the front The two knobs function in linkage Selects t
240. matically However the light remains on continuously if the off time is less than 5 seconds When the LIGHT switch is set to MAN and the light switch is set to ON the light remains on continuously The camcorder exits Interval Rec mode whenever it is powered off However the settings of INTERVAL TIME etc are maintained You do not need to set them again the next time you use Interval Rec mode Shooting and recording in Interval Rec mode 1 Afer performing the basic procedures for shooting and recording following the instructions in Making settings before shooting on page 66 secure the camcorder so that it will not move 2 Press the REC button on the camcorder or the REC button on the lens The camcorder starts recording in Interval Rec mode When you use the pre lighting function recording starts after the light is switched on While recording in Interval Rec mode the TALLY indicator green in the viewfinder flashes 4 flashes second and INTERVAL and other characters appear on the viewfinder screen While recording the REC indicator in the viewfinder lights To interrupt interval recording Press the REC button on the camcorder or the REC button on the lens Recording in Interval Rec mode stops Press the REC button again to start recording in Interval Rec mode again To end interval recording You can exit Interval Rec mode by setting the POWER switch to OFF or setting INTERVAL REC to OFF on the
241. me When the camcorder has not been used for a long time When the camcorder is used under conditions in which the surrounding temperature has changed greatly When the GAIN switch L M H values have been changed on the GAIN SW page of the OPERATION menu Itis not usually necessary to adjust the black balance when using the camcorder after it has been off In automatic black balance mode adjustments are performed in the following order clamp level black set and black balance 2 1 Recording Basic Operations 1 Power the camcorder on and set the OUTPUT DCC switch to CAM 2 Push the AUTO W B BAL switch to BLK and release the switch The switch returns to the center position and the adjustment is executed During adjustment the following message is displayed on the viewfinder screen The messages change in the following sequence ABB EXECUTING BLACK SET BLACK SET BLACK BALANCE The black balance adjustment ends in a few seconds with the message ABB OK and the adjustment value is automatically stored in memory During the black balance adjustment the iris is automatically closed During the black balance adjustment the gain selection circuit is automatically activated so you may see flickering on the viewfinder screen but this is not a malfunction If automatic black balance adjustment cannot be made If the black balance adjustment cannot be completed normally an err
242. mount securing rubber Lens mount cap LENS connector AUTO W B BAL switch REC button Q Auto focus ranging sensor VF connector 22 Lens mount FILTER selector ZEBRA button ASSIGN switches Lens locking lever MENU knob SHUTTER switch AUDIO LEVEL knob Q Lens mount securing rubber After locking the lens in position using the lens locking lever fit this rubber over the lower of the two projections This fixes the lens mount preventing it from coming loose Lens mount cap Remove by pushing up the lens locking lever see page 13 When no lens is mounted keep this cap fitted for protection from dust LENS connector 12 pin Connect a lens cable if you are using a 2 3 inch lens or a cable type 1 2 inch lens This connector is not used for a 1 2 inch lens which is connected by a hot shoe inside the lens mount Consult your Sony dealer when you are using a lens other than VCL 719BXS supplied with the PDW F335K When mounting or removing the lens on this unit power off this unit first AUTO W B BAL automatic white black balance adjustment switch Activates the automatic white black balance adjustment functions WHT Adjusts the white balance automatically If the WHITE BAL switch see page 15 is set to A or B the white balance setting is stored in the corresponding memory If the WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST the a
243. n do this with the same operations as step 2 of Searching Using Thumbnails page 76 Clip to be locked CLIP CAMERA 006 034 m TC 00 23 00 25 TC 00122 40 07 TC 00 24 4 1 TC 00 25 08 14 rr C EA 00 27 5 g 00 28 08 09 TC 00 280 22 02 TC 00 20 34 18 TC 00 20 54 2272 I 30 NOV 2005 13 38 DUR 0 00 10 23 Hold down the SHIFT button and press the CLIP MENU button Then CLIP menu appears CLIP CAMERA 006 034 CLIP MENU CLIP INFORMATION LOAD CLIP LIST SAVE CLIP LIS T DELETE CLI LIS SORT CLIP 31 T L z EI E SET INDEX PICTURE __SHIFT RESET m4 DELETE CLI LOCK DELETE ALL CLIPS gt TC DO 28 08 08 TC 0 28 54 22 30 NOV 2005 13 38 DUR 0 00 10 23 4 Use the SEL SET button MENU knob to select LOCK UNLOCK CLIP and then press the button or knob A lock confirmation screen appears This screen displays clip names and clip titles To cancel the lock operation and return to the thumbnail screen Use the SEL SET button or MENU knob to select CANCEL and then press the button or knob Thumbnail Search Alternatively press the RESET button on the right side of the LCD monitor 5 With selected press the SEL SET button or MENU knob You return to the thumbnail screen and a lock icon appears on the thumbnail of the selected clip to show that it 1s locked Lock icon ra You cannot delete locked clip
244. n press the button or knob DATE Date of recording TIME CODE Start timecode DURATION Whole length of clip SEQUENCE NUMBER Thumbnail sequence number The factory default setting is TIME CODE The display below each thumbnail changes depending on the item selected See Switching the Information Displayed in the Thumbnail Screen page 77 for more information about SEQUENCE NUMBER Managing Clip Lists Using the CLIP menu you can save created clip lists to disc read them from the disc into this unit and delete them from the disc To display the CLIP menu In the thumbnail or clip list screen hold down the SHIFT button and press the SEL SET button down CLIP MENU The CLIP menu handles up to 99 clip lists The following table lists the CLIP menu items each of which is displayed or not on the menu screen depending on the operating state of the unit Item CLIP INFORMATION Function Select the information to be displayed below the thumbnails See pages 77 and 94 LOAD CLIP LIST Load a clip list from the disc as the current clip list see page 96 SAVE CLIP LIST Save the current clip list to the disc see page 93 DELETE CLIP LIST Delete a clip list from the disc see page 96 SORT CLIP LISTS BY You can sort the list of clip lists by name or date and time of creation see page 96 SET INDEX PICTURE 9 Change the thumbnail image of a clip see page 78
245. n the camcorder or on the lens until recording starts then stay on continuously during recording Indicate a fault see page 165 On the CAM CONFIG page of the MAINTENANCE menu you can select that the lower indicator also lights BATT battery indicator red Lights up when the remaining battery capacity is low GAIN UP indicator orange Lights up when the gain is 3 dB or more SHUTTER indicator red Lights up when the SHUTTER switch page 13 is ON Lock ring To directly view the screen turn this ring counterclockwise to align the orange marks on the lock ring and the barrel of the viewfinder and remove the eyepiece Location and Function of Parts 27 491deuS 28 Tally light When the TALLY switch is in the HIGH high intensity or LOW low intensity position this operates in the same way as the REC TALLY indicators Barrel You can rotate this for convenience The position of the image may change as a result of the earth s magnetic field BRIGHT brightness control Adjusts the brightness of the viewfinder image see page 37 D Viewfinder connector 20 pin Connect to the VF connector see page 12 TALLY switch Set to the HIGH high intensity or LOW low intensity to use the tally light DISPLAY switch Set to ON when you want to display text information on the viewfinder screen Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen The viewfinder sc
246. nd specifications of the connected devices you may need to use certain functions differently and you may not be able to transfer data or perform certain operations i LINK a nickname for IEEE 1394 proposed by Sony is a trademark supported by many companies worldwide IEEE 1394 is an international standard defined by IEEE the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Inc The camcorder can be connected to one device with the i LINK cable DV cable When you connect with a device that has two or more i LINK connectors refer to the operating instructions supplied with the connected device About data transfer speed of i LINK i LINK defines a maximum data transfer speed of approximately 100 200 and 400 Mbps that are described as 5100 S200 and S400 respectively For i LINK devices a maximum data transfer speed that the device supports is identified on Specifications page of the operating instructions supplied with the device or near its i LINK connector When connecting with the device that support different data transfer speed the actual data transfer speed may be different from those described on the i LINK connectors MPEGd License About i LINK xipueddy 173 xipueddy 174 1 What is Mbps Mega bits per second A measure of the rate at which data is transmitted per second In case of 100 Mbps 100 Mega bits of data can be transmitted per second i LINK operation with your camcorder For
247. ng 51 xXoeqKe d pue e Jeydeyo xoeg e g pue g 52 9 Check the lens settings and flange focal length adjustment see page 35 Adjust the viewfinder eyepiece focus and the contrast and brightness of the viewfinder image see page 37 Check the audio system settings Microphone connections see page 41 Settings on the VDR section see page 19 If necessary display the center marker and or safety zone marker on the viewfinder screen For details see Setting the Marker Display on page 136 Also press the ZEBRA button to display a zebra pattern on the viewfinder screen If necessary adjust the white balance and black balance see page 54 10 necessary adjust the iris and gain For details about the adjustment of iris see Iris ring on page 25 and Adjusting the Iris on page 59 For details about the adjustment of gain see GAIN switch on page 14 and Setting Gain Values for the GAIN Switch Positions on page 139 11 Turn the focus ring so that the subject is sharply in focus The EZ focus function allows you to set the aperture function to open and to easily and precisely adjust the focus before shooting Before use this function must be assigned to the ASSIGN 1 or 2 switch For details see Assigning Functions to ASSIGN Switches page 141 About the EZ focus function When you press the switch to which this function is a
248. ng review To turn Picture Cache mode on proceed as follows How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the desired item Recording Advanced Operations Display the SPECIAL EFFECTS page of the OPERATION menu see page 108 and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic Menu Operations on page 129 S F C I I N N P P C Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to PICTURE CACHE Press the MENU knob The mark on the left of PICTURE CACHE changes to a mark and the mark on the left of the setting changes to a mark Turn the MENU knob until ON appears When ON appears the camcorder is in Picture Cache mode where picture sound and time code are constantly saved in memory The TALLY indicator green is on while picture data is being stored in memory Press the MENU knob The mark changes to a gt mark and the mark changes to a mark Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to CACHE REC TIME OO woo EF EE EC NI FF ON 0S Press the MENU knob The mark on the left of CACHE REC TIME changes to a amp mark and the mark on the left of the setting changes to a mark Turn the MENU knob until the desired Picture Cache time appears As you turn the MENU knob the Picture Cache time changes in the following sequence 0 25 2 45 4 6s gt 6 85 8 10s
249. ng shoe on this unit is of the 4 inch tapped hole type If you want to replace this with a slide type shoe contact your Sony dealer To use the microphone detached from the Preparing the Audio Input camcorder You can use the supplied microphone detached from the Syste m camcorder Using the Supplied Microphone 1 Loosen the screw and open the microphone holder meet p p a ee e clamp ojh 2 D 0 Clamp of the microphone holder Connect to the MIC IN connector AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 switches Set the AUDIO IN switch for the channel on which you want to record the audio to FRONT for CH 1 CH 2 or F for CH 3 CH 4 When using the supplied microphone with an extension cable always use an external power supply type cable 2 Place the microphone in the microphone holder Using an External Microphone 9 Tighten the screw You can connect up to two external monaural microphones to the AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 connectors using a CAC 12 Close the microphone holder Microphone Holder not supplied The following is the procedure for attaching an electret condenser microphone such as the ECM 673 674 678 1 Remove the fixing screws for external microphone holder Place the microphone in the holder so that UP is at the top 3 Plug the microphone cable into the MIC IN connector then set the AUDIO
250. ng the automatic audio level adjusting functions Set both AUDIO IN CH 1 and CH 2 switches to FRONT Set both AUDIO SELECT CH 1 and CH 2 switches to AUTO Set both AUDIO IN CH 3 and CH 4 switches to F FRONT Aim the microphone connected to the MIC IN connector at a suitable sound source Check that the level indications for channels 1 to 4 correspond to the sound level respectively Testing the manual audio level adjusting functions Set both AUDIO IN CH 1 and CH 2 switches to FRONT Turn the MIC LEVEL control Check that the channel 1 and 2 audio level meters on the LCD monitor shows no segment when you fully turn the control counterclockwise as seen from the camcorder front Maintenance xipueddy 163 xipueddy 164 4 Testing the earphone and speaker 1 Turn the MONITOR knob and check that the speaker volume changes accordingly 2 Connect an earphone to the front or rear EARPHONE jack Check that the speaker sound is cut off and that you can hear the sound from the microphone in the earphone Tum the MONITOR knob and check that the earphone volume changes accordingly 5 Testing external microphones 1 Connect external microphones to the AUDIO IN CH 1 and CH 2 connectors 2 setthe input selection switches as follows If the connected microphone is of the internal power supply type set the switch to OFF If the connected microphone is of the external power su
251. nu Organization and Operation ADVANCED menu 11 No Page Item Settings ND COMP ND OFFSET ADJUST ON OFF CLEAR ND OFFSET Default USER Description File setting menu page ON Turns ND offset adjustment mode on or off This mode is for adjusting the offset for color correction by the ND filter EXEC Clears the ND filter color correction offset Displaying Menus Viewfinder LCD monitor MENU switch POWER switch MENU knob When the camcorder is powered on flick the MENU switch to the ON position to display the menu on the viewfinder screen and the LCD monitor If this is the first time the menu has been used after the camcorder has been powered on the USER menu is displayed If the menu has been used before the last accessed page appears When the menu is not displayed on the LCD monitor Press the DISPLAY EXPAND button at the lower left of the LCD monitor to select the CHAR display To clear the menu display from the screen Flick the MENU switch to OFF When the DISPLAY switch on the viewfinder is set to ON the display indicating the current status of the camcorder appears on the viewfinder screen For details see Selecting the Display Items on page 135 To display the TOP menu With no menu displayed on the screen hold down the MENU knob and flick the MENU switch to the ON position Basic Menu Operations By press
252. number of short clips or if you want to record without worrying about the limit on the number of clips maximum 300 A REC START essence mark is recorded whenever recording starts which makes it easy to find the recording start points How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the desired item 1 Set CLIP CONT REC on the SPECIAL EFFECTS page of the OPERATION menu to ON For details on menu operations see Basic Menu Operations page 129 EN 0 S F N N P P 2 select CLIP CONT REC and press the MENU knob Press the MENU knob The VDR operation indicator in the viewfinder changes to CONT and the Clip Continuous Rec function is enabled The Clip Continuous Rec ON OFF function can be assigned to the ASSIGN 1 2 3 4 switches See Assigning Functions to ASSIGN Switches page 141 for more information about the ASSIGN switches The following recording modes cannot be enabled when this function is enabled nterval Rec function Picture Cache function To stop the function Do one of the following to stop the Continuous Rec function A new clip will be generated the next time you start recording Perform a clip operation lock or delete a clip Make a network or FAM connection Eject the disc Recording Advanced Operations Change the recording format The unit responds as follows If the FIND MODE on the ESSENCE MARK page
253. nus Setting Gain Values for the GAIN Switch Positions You can set the gain values for the L M and H positions of the GAIN switch which switches the gain of the video amplifier How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the desired item 1 Display the GAIN SW page of the OPERATION menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic Menu Operations on page 129 You can set the following items on the GAIN SW page Item Description GAIN LOW Sets the gain value corresponding to the L position of the GAIN switch GAIN MID Sets the gain value corresponding to the M position of the GAIN switch GAIN HIGH Sets the gain value corresponding to the H position of the GAIN switch GAIN TURBO When assigning TURBO to the ASSIGN switch sets the gain value corresponding to the ASSIGN switch see page 141 2 Select the item corresponding to the switch position and press the MENU knob Turn the MENU knob to select the gain value and press the MENU knob You can select from 3 0 3 6 9 12 18 24 30 36 42 and 48 dB To change the gain corresponding to another switch position repeat steps 2 and 3 Selecting the Output Signals How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the desired item Adjustments and Settings from Menus pejrejeq pue shejdsiq nua
254. o 48 dB 1 Auto Tracing White balance 2 Only when the WHITE BAL switch is in the PRST position Saving and recalling settings on a Memory Stick Using a Memory Stick D supplied separately you can save menu settings adjusted to particular shooting conditions and then recall those settings as required 1 Memory Stick is a trademark of Sony Corporation Features of the Optical Disc Drive VDR Support for HD SD recording and playback formats For HD video recording format MPEG 2 MP HL compression is used and the image quality bit rate and recording time D can be selected according to the shooting Features 9 MBIAJOAC Je1deuo MSIAJOAQ 1e1deuo 10 application Recording in the DVCAM format is also supported The audio is recorded as four channels or two channels 2 uncompressed 1 The recording mode can be selected from the three modes HQ High Quality SP Standard Play and LP Long Play 2 DVCAM recording is available for four channels only Proxy AV data recording Proxy AV data is low resolution data using MPEG 4 video 1 5 Mbps audio 64 kbps per channel With this unit when recording HD or SD high resolution data low resolution Proxy AV data is automatically generated at the same time and recorded Since Proxy AV data is compact it can be transferred to a computer or network at high speed enormously reducing the storage capacity required for recording Exploiting this
255. o data has been stored this appears as NEW FILE To switch the information displayed for clip lists Press the SEL SET button to the right side Editing Clip Lists uonoejes eueog Ja deyD 93 uonoe eg eueog p jejdeuj 94 Each press switches the information displayed for clip lists in the following order Date and time of creation Title Clip list name Date and time of creation gt 3 Select the desired clip list name and press the button knob This saves the current clip list to disc To apply a desired title or name to a clip list Use the supplied PDZ 1 Proxy Browsing Software For details see the PDZ 1 online help Setting the Start Timecode for the Current Clip List By default the start timecode LTC for the current clip list is set to 00 00 00 00 To set this to a different value proceed as follows 1 Display the CLIP menu See To display the CLIP menu on page 95 2 Use the SEL SET button or MENU knob to align the cursor with TC PRESET and press the button or knob The display appears as in the following figure TC PRESET 0002 12 32 20 02 The timecode shown is the start timecode currently set for the current clip list Press the SEL SET button left and right to select the desired time unit any of HOUR MIN SEC and FRAME 4 Press the SEL SET button up or down or turn the MENU knob to display the desired value D When all tim
256. o not recharge disassemble or dispose of in fire Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer s instructions Bei der Entsorgung leerer Batterien sind die Anweisungen des Herstellers zu befolgen Service life of the lithium battery When the lithium battery s voltage falls the lithium battery low voltage warning appears on the LCD monitor see page 16 If this warning appears replace the lithium battery CR2032 within three or four days The lithium battery has an average service life of about one year Preparing a Power Supply The following power supplies are recommended for the camcorder BP GL95 GL65 L60S L80S Lithium ion Battery Pack AC power using the AC DN2B DN10 AC adaptor Using a Battery Pack When a BP GL95 GL65 L60S L80S Battery Pack is used the camcorder will operate continuously for the time shown below Model name Operating time BP GL95 Approx 160 minutes BP GL65 Approx 100 minutes BP L60S Approx 100 minutes BP L80S Approx 130 minutes The battery pack operating time depends on the frequency of use of the battery pack and the ambient temperature when used Before use charge the battery pack with a charger suitable for each battery For details on the battery charging procedure refer to the battery charger operation
257. ocessing see page 50 The recording format setting is different from that of the already recorded clips Change the disc or change the recording format see page 53 Playback does not start when you press the PLAY button The unit is stopped at the position after recording finished Press the PREV button to move to the first frame of a clip or hold down the PLAY PAUSE button and press the PREV button to move to any other position The power supply cuts while operating The battery pack is exhausted Replace the battery pack with a fully charged one see page 31 The battery goes dead very quickly The operating temperature is very low Use a BP GL95 see page 31 The battery pack is inadequately charged Recharge the battery pack see page 31 It is not possible to eject the disc The battery pack is exhausted Replace the battery pack with a fully charged one see page 31 If the battery cannot be charged or there is no replacement battery use the procedure in the next item To eject the disc when there is no power supply to eject the disc The POWER switch is set to OFF Set the POWER switch to ON The playback picture quality is poor The playback picture does not appear The playback sound does not hear The disc surface is scratched or there is dirt or dust adhering to the disc The recording surface of the disc has deteriorated over tim
258. of Part 15 of FCC Rules For the customers in the USA and Canada RECYCLING LITHIUM ION BATTERIES Lithium lon batteries are recyclable You can help preserve our environment by returning your used rechargeable batteries to the collection and recycling location nearest you For more information regarding recycling of rechargeable batteries call toll free 1 800 822 8837 or visit http www rbrc org Caution Do not handle damaged or leaking lithium ion batteries For the State of California USA only Perchlorate Material special handling may apply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate Perchlorate Material Lithium battery contains perchlorate For the customers in Europe This product with the CE marking complies with the EMC Directive issued by the Commission of the European Community Compliance with this directive implies conformity to the following European standards EN55103 1 Electromagnetic Interference Emission EN55103 2 Electromagnetic Susceptibility Immunity This product is intended for use in the following Electromagnetic Environment s E1 residential E2 commercial and light industrial E3 urban outdoors and E4 controlled EMC environment ex TV studio The manufacturer of this product is Sony Corporation 1 7 1 Konan Minato ku Tokyo Japan The Authorized Representative for EMC and product safety is Sony Deutschland GmbH Hedelfinger Strasse 61 70327 Stuttgart Germany
259. of copyright law When you use a Memory Stick that has been pre recorded be sure that the material has been recorded in accordance with copyright and other applicable laws The Memory Stick application software of the camcorder may be modified or changed by Sony without prior notice Note that there are certain restrictions on recording stage performances and other entertainment events even if they are recorded for personal use only Memory Stick wmm and MagicGate Memory Stick are trademarks of Sony Corporation Memory Stick Duo and Memory Srick Duo are trademarks of Sony Corporation Memory Stick PRO and Memory STICK PRO are trademarks of Sony Corporation Memory Stick PRO Duo and Memory Stick PRO Duo are trademarks of Sony Corporation Memory Stick ROM and Memory STICK ROM are trademarks of Sony Corporation e MagicGate Memory Stick is trademark of Sony Corporation e MagicGate and MAGIC GATE are trademarks of Sony Corporation About a Memory Stick xipueddy 175 Specifications General Power voltage 12 V DC 45 0 V 1 0 V POWER consumption 31W with 12 V DC supply when recording with the LCD monitor on Operating temperature 5 C to 40 C 23 F to 104 F Storage temperature 20 C to 60 C 4 F to 140 F Recording playback format VIDEO MPEG HD HQ35 SP25 LP18 Mbps DVCAM 25 Mbps MPEG 4 1 MPEG H
260. of optical head resettable LOADING rst Shows cumulative count of disc insertions resettable SEEK rst Shows cumulative total of optical head seek operation time in units of 1 hour resettable 02 DISC USER ID Display only Shows the user ID on the disc STATUS itself TITLE Shows the title on the disc itself REMAIN Shows the remaining disc capacity REWRITE Shows number of rewrites SALVAGE When salvage is required shows required FILE SYSTEM When the file system cannot be recognized or there is a fault shows unknown Menu Organization and Operation pue shejdsiq nua 125 sBumes pejreyeq pue sAejdsiq nua 2 126 DIAGNOSIS menu iris detected peaks and average values No Page Item Settings Default USER Description File menu page 03 CLIP CLIP NO Display only In NORMAL MODE current clip STATUS number total clip count In CLIP LIST MODE clip list number NAME In NORMAL MODE current clip name In CLIP LIST MODE clip list name TITLE In NORMAL MODE current clip title In CLIP LIST MODE clip list title RECORD DEVICE In NORMAL MODE name of device on which current clip was recorded In CLIP LIST MODE shows SERIAL In NORMAL MODE serial number
261. of the MAINTENANCE menu is set to CLIP the unit moves from the current position to the next clip If itis set to R ST the unit moves from the current position to the next REC START essence mark Power the unit off To turn the function off Set CLIP CONT REC on the SPECIAL EFFECTS page of the OPERATION menu to OFF Playback Disc playback start position Although this unit uses optical discs it is designed to offer the most convenient features of tape playback by VTRs One of these is the playback start position which works in the same way as with tape as described below After playback stop The unit stops at the position where the STOP button was pressed Press the PLAY PAUSE button to resume playback at the stop position After recording The unit stops at the position where recording ended To play back a clip press the PREV button to move to the start frame of any clip or press the PREV button with the PLAY PAUSE button held down to move to any position After disc insertion The unit stops at the position of the disc when it was most recently ejected Press the PLAY PAUSE button to resume playback at the most recent position The playback position is saved to the disc when the disc is ejected which allows playback to start at that position whenever it is loaded into any XDCAM player The playback position is not recorded to the disc if the disc is set to REC INH Normal Playback By pressing the PLA
262. of the clips on the disc appear In the following description this is referred to as the thumbnail screen Creating Clip Lists TC D0 23 00 25 I TE 00 24 45 110 Tc 00 25 08 14 25 49 23 00 28 22 10 TC 00 27 10 04 TC 00 27 51 0 m R t 00 20 06 09 00 20 22 02 TC 00 28 34 18 E TC 00 20 54 30 NOV 2005 13 36 DUR 0 00 07 20 Hold down the SHIFT button and press the SEL SET button up SUB CLIP The LOAD CLIP LIST screen of the CLIP menu appears For an already created clip list the details including the creation date appear and for an empty clip list NEW FILE appears CLIP coo02 002 034 CLIP MENU CLIP INFORMATION gt DELETE CLIP LIST gt SORT CLIP LIST BY gt SET INDEX PICTURE DELETE CLIP SHIFT RESET LOCK UNLOCK CLIP SHIFT STOP LOCK OR DELETE ALL CLIPS gt T D0r20 08 09 iTEC 00 28 22 02 0 54 30 NOV 2005 13 36 DUR 0 00 07 20 If a clip list is already loaded the LOAD CLIP LIST screen does not appear In this case proceed to step 4 Displays the type of the information Switch the displayed information by pressing the SEL SET button to the right side CLi P coao2 E0001 3 JUN E0002 JUN E0003 DEC 2005 13 E0004 MAY 2006 10 25 E0005 MAY 2006 10 25 E0006 3 JUN 2006 13 30 i E0008 E0009 z 30 NOV 2005 13 36 DUR 0 00 07 20 To switch the information displayed in clip lists Press the SEL SET button to the right sid
263. ologies fine white flecks may be generated on the screen in rare cases caused by cosmic rays etc This is related to the principle of CCD image sensors and is not a malfunction The white flecks especially tend to be seen in the following cases when operating at a high environmental temperature when you have raised the master gain sensitivity when operating in Slow Shutter mode This problem may be alleviated by automatic black balance adjustment see page 54 Vertical smear Whenan extremely bright object such as a strong spotlight or flashlight is being shot vertical tails may be produced on the screen or the image may be distorted Vertical tails shown on the image Monitor screen Bright object e g strong spotlight strong reflected light flashlight the sun Aliasing When fine patterns stripes or lines are shot they may appear jagged or flicker Condensation If you move the camcorder from a very cold place to a warm place or use it in a damp location condensation may form on the optical pickup Then if the camcorder is operated in this state recording and playback may not be performed properly Do the following to prevent this from happening When you move or operate the camcorder in an environment where condensation may form be sure to insert a disc in advance and close the disc compartment lid Whenever you turn on the POWER switch check that the HUMID indicator does not app
264. on assignment menu For details see Assigning Functions to ASSIGN Switches on page 141 Lens locking lever After inserting the lens in the lens mount rotate the lens mount ring with this lever to lock the lens in position After locking the lens be sure to use the lens mount securing rubber to prevent the lens from becoming detached MENU knob Changes the page selection or a setting within the menu For details about how to use the MENU knob see Basic Menu Operations on page 129 SHUTTER switch Set to ON to use the electronic shutter Flick to SEL to switch the shutter speed or shutter mode setting within the range previously set with the menu When this switch is operated the new setting appears on the setting change adjustment progress message display area for about 3 seconds For details about the shutter speed and shutter mode settings see Setting the Electronic Shutter on page 57 D AUDIO LEVEL knob Adjusts the input level of audio channels land 2 You can disable this knob by setting the AUDIO CH1 LEVEL and AUDIO CH2 LEVEL items on the AUDIO 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu The knob is factory preset so that it is enabled Location and Function of Parts Je1deuj 13 Right Side Near the front M Q 491deuS 14 5600K button LIGHT switch ez O GAIN switch eT d VDR SAVE STBY switch POWER swit
265. on of the clip is short In this case the frame interval of expanded thumbnails is fixed at 1 frame This allows you to view expanded thumbnails at equal intervals 1 with the THUMBNAIL indicator and SUB CLIP indicator off press the THUMBNAIL button 2 Use the SEL SET button four way arrow key or MENU knob to select the desired clip Press the DISPLAY EXPAND button on the right side of the LCD monitor Thumbnails appear for twelve equal divisions of the clip Displays the number of clip divisions 00061 0012 TC 00 30 20 03 0 30 26 25 00 30 27 1 17 I zz ma TE 00 30 20 09 TC 30 20 23 TC 00 30 30 11 EXPAND C0017 E mA E pet TC 00 30 31 TC 00 30 31 27 TC 00 30 32 21 TE 00 30 3311 0005870012 To change the expansion ratio Each time you press the DISPLAY EXPAND button changes the ratio in the sequence x12 x144 gt x1728 To change the ratio in the reverse sequence hold down the SHIFT button and press the DISPLAY EXPAND button Alternatively press the RESET button on the right side of the LCD monitor to return to the previous screen Clip List Playback You can play back clips in their order in a clip list created with the scene selection function see Chapter 4 Playing back in clip list order Proceed as follows 1 ifthe clip list that you want to play exists on the disc load it into the current clip list see page 87 For the clip list load
266. or message will appear for about 3 seconds on the viewfinder screen Error message Meaning ABB NG The lens iris did not close Check if IRIS NOT CLOSED the lens cable is connected properly ABB NG Adjustment could not be completed TIME LIMIT within the standard number of attempts ABB NG The difference between the R or G or B reference value and the current OVERFLOW value is so great that it exceeds the range If any of the above error messages is displayed retry the black balance adjustment Keep pushing the WHT BLK switch to BLK until BLACK SET appears after BLACK BALANCE appears If the error message occurs repeatedly contact your Sony dealer To adjust the white balance It is necessary to adjust the white balance each time the principal lighting source changes When this unit is operating in EZ mode the ATW function see page 56 is forced to ON 1 a 2 Set the switches and selectors as shown in the figure below FILTER selector OUTPUT DCC switch CAM WHITE BAL switch A or B 9 GAIN switch Set as low as possible White balance setting values are stored in memory B only when the WHITE SWITCH B item is set to MEM on the WHITE SETTING page of the MAINTENANCE menu Set the FILTER selector and the 5600K button to suit the lighting conditions The following table shows which FILTER selector setting you should use depending on the lighting con
267. ormat or a computer using an i LINK cable DV cable If video and audio signals are not output from the external device connected to the amp i LINK DV OUT S400 connector disconnect the i LINK cable DV cable and then reconnect it making sure that it is firmly seated When you connect the camcorder and other equipment such as a hard disk drive with an i LINK interface to a computer with i LINK connectors turn off the power of the computer the other equipment and the camcorder before connecting them using the i LINK cable DV cable If a bus powered type 1 hard disk drive or similar equipment is connected while the computer is powered on electric current flows into the camcorder because of the high voltage caused by the load shift of the computer power and this may cause a malfunction 1 Equipment that can be powered through i LINK cable DV cable Q REMOTE connector 8 pin Connect an RM B150 B750 Remote Control Unit which makes it possible to control the camcorder remotely Before connecting disconnecting the Remote Control Unit to from the camcorder be sure to turn off the camcorder POWER switch Location and Function of Parts DC OUT 12 DC power output connector 4 pin female Supplies power for a WRR 861 862 UHF Synthesized Tuner optional maximum 0 2 A Do not connect any equipment other than the UHF synthesized tuner TC timecode connector BNC type and IN OUT selector switch IN
268. ory Stick To protect saved data To prevent accidental erasure of important setup data slide the LOCK switch on the Memory Stick right to the write protect position LOCK n It is now impossible to write or delete data on the Memory Stick If you try to do so the message MEMORY STICK LOCKED appears and the data cannot be overwritten or deleted Notes on using and storing the Memory Stick To use and store the Memory Stick note the following points Avoid touching the connector of the Memory Stick or contacting it with a metal object When attaching a label to the Memory Stick use only the label supplied for the Memory Stick Do not drop bend or submit the Memory Stick to external shock Do not disassemble or modify the Memory Stick Avoid getting liquids on the Memory Stick Avoid using or storing the Memory Stick in a location subject to extremely high temperature such as the hot inside of a car or the outdoors exposed to a burning sun or a place near a heater direct sunlight When storing and carrying the Memory Stick keep it in its original case to ensure protection of important data Saving and Loading User Files Do not format the Memory Stick using a PC Format the Memory Stick on the MEMORY STICK page of the FILE menu Saving USER Menu Data User File to the Memory Stick
269. ote control unit the setting matches that of VIDEO OUT SEL VIDEO OUT SEL VBS R G VBS Selects the signal output from the B VIDEO OUT connector R WHT H SAW 99 to 99 0 H SAW white shading correction R WHT H PARA H PARA white shading correction R WHT V SAW V SAW white shading correction R WHT V PARA V PARA white shading correction WHITE SAW PARA ON OFF ON Turns white shading SAW PARA correction on or off 09 BLACK BLACK SHADING CH R G B R E Selects the channel adjusted with A SHADING SEL this menu If TEST is selected with the output signal selector switch button of a remote control unit the setting matches that of VIDEO OUT SEL VIDEO OUT SEL VBS R G VBS Selects the signal output from the B VIDEO OUT connector R BLK H SAW 99 to 99 0 H SAW black shading correction R BLK H PARA H PARA black shading correction R BLK V SAW V SAW black shading correction R BLK V PARA V PARA black shading correction BLACK SAW PARA ON OFF ON Turns black shading SAW PARA correction on or off MASTER BLACK 99 to 99 O Adjusts the master black level MASTER GAIN TMP 3 0 3 6 0dB Temporarily adjusts the master 9 12 18 24 gain value 30 36 42 dB 10 DCC DCC D RANGE 200 to 460 Sets the dynamic range applied A 460 when DCC is on DCC POINT 99 to 99 00 Adjusts the DCC minimum knee point DCC GAIN Adjusts the gain vs the DCC DCC DELAY TIME detected value Adjusts DCC reaction speed Me
270. ou can monitor what you are shooting DCC Abbreviation for dynamic contrast control To provide a larger dynamic range for a video camera the range of brightnesses of subjects that can be handled by the imaging device the knee point is automatically adjusted with variations in the incident light Drop frame mode SMPTE timecode runs at 30 frames second while the NTSC color television system runs at about 29 97 frames second Drop frame mode adjusts the running of timecode to eliminate the discrepancy between timecode value and actual time by dropping two frames from the timecode value at the beginning of each minute except every tenth minute EBU Abbreviation for European Broadcasting Union A professional broadcasting establishment in Europe E E mode Electric to Electric mode When you operate a VDR in E E mode input video and or audio signals pass through electric circuits only and then come out from the output connectors without passing through electromagnetic conversion circuits such as recording heads EFP Electronic Field Production The use of electronic equipment such as portable video cameras VTRs and sound equipment for television production outside studios ENG Electronic News Gathering The use of electronic equipment such as portable video cameras VTRs and sound equipment for the production of daily news stories and short documentaries Essence mark A type of metadata that may be se
271. ove the mark to the desired item 1 Display the TOP menu see page 129 2 Select USER MENU CUSTOMIZE and press the MENU knob If this is the first time the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu has been displayed the CONTENTS page of the menu appears Menu Organization and Operation pejrejeq pue sfejdsiq nua 131 sBumes pejreyeq pue sAejdsiq nua 2 132 ONTENTS VVV JE U U a U U U U U 7070707070707070704 WONOUIAWN mmmrmrmimmmrm COOOOCOGU 444444441 If the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu has been used before the last accessed page appears If the CONTENTS page is displayed press the MENU knob Then select one of USER 1 EDIT to USER 19 EDIT and press the MENU knob If a different page is displayed turn the MENU knob until the desired page appears then press the MENU knob Example When the USER 9 EDIT page is selected ET1OOUSER 9 EDIT gt Press the MENU knob Then select the line where you want to add an item and press the MENU knob The EDIT FUNCTION page appears EDIT FUNCTION ESC Select INSERT and press the MENU knob The following menu appears OOOOOOOOO VU OCWONDUBWN O Add the items as follows Press the MENU knob scroll the page until the desired item appears and then press the MENU knob again Menu Organization and Operation 2 Press the MENU knob again
272. own as 601 Shooting functions provide various effects This unit is equipped with many of the functions provided in a film camera allowing the operator creative control through a variety of techniques Slow shutter function A maximum of 64 frames can be accumulated using the slow shutter function In low light levels this allows clear and noiseless video to be shot and provides a fantasy video effect with ghost images Time lapse function interval recording Using this function slow moving subjects can be shot with the movement compressed in time This is convenient for many applications such as monitoring plant growth or the progress of a construction site Shooting functions to cope with different shooting conditions The ATW D and auto iris functions allow shooting with automated adjustment of the white balance and intenstity levels to cope with varying ambient lighting conditions By switching among the four levels including CLEAR of neutral density ND filter it is possible to compensate for lighting conditions and control the depth of field When shooting in daylight or other high color temperature illumination pressing the 5600K button instantly switches the color temperature setting to 5600K 2 With the GAIN switch you can adjust the gain of the video amplifier according to the lighting conditions when shooting You can vary the setting in the GAIN switch positions H M L to any values in the range 3 dB t
273. p see page 69 the title is enclosed in double quotation marks for example TITLE00001 b On how to make a thumbnail image of the specified frame see page 78 C You can select the information to be displayed see page 77 The factory default setting is display of timecode 2 Use the SEL SET button four way arrow key or MENU knob to select the desired clip You can also select clips by the following operations Press the PREV button When FIND MODE on the ESSENCE MARK page of the MAINTENANCE menu is set to R ST this moves to the previous REC START essence mark When FIND MODE is setto CLIP this moves to the start of the current clip or moves to the first frame of the previous clip if the PREV button is pressed at the first frame of the current clip Press the NEXT button When FIND MODE on the ESSENCE MARK page of the MAINTENANCE menu is set to R ST this moves to the next REC START essence mark When FIND MODE is set to CLIP this moves to the start of the next clip Press the PREV or NEXT button with the F REV or F FWD button held down Move to the first or last clip Press the F REV F FWD button Move to the previous or next page Tocue up the selected clip press the SEL SET button or the MENU knob To start playback from the selected clip press the PLAY PAUSE button The remainder of the thumbnail selection process is the same as in steps 2 and 3 above To return to the previous screen Press the THU
274. p status information ADVANCED menu This menu contains items for making advanced settings and adjustments for example settings related to auto iris and gamma correction Menu List For settings registered on a USER menu page at the factory the USER menu page colomn in the following list indicates the number of that page The USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu allows you to add and delete pages to and from the USER menu to suit your requirements When the setting range in the Settings column is surrounded by parentheses the setup value is a relative value The setting range shown on the menu screen may differ from what is shown in this manual File column The letters in the File column stand for the following A Items saved in the ALL file Sc Items saved in the scene file L Items saved in the lens file St Items whose setting is changed by the STANDARD operation Menu Organization and Operation pojrejeq pue s e dsiq nua 107 sBumes pejreyeq pue sAejdsiq nua 1 2 108 OPERATION menu OPERATION menu 01 No Page FORMAT Item SYSTEM Settings 601 23 9P PAL 501 25P Default 601 501 REC FORMAT MPEG HD DVCAM MPEG HD BIT RATE HD HQ SP LP SP AUDIO CH HD 2CH 4CH 4CH ASPECT RATIO DV 16 9 4 3 16 9 COUNTRY NTSC AREA NTSC J AREA PAL AREA
275. p 2 For details on setting the file ID see To set the file ID on page 147 2 Select SCENE STORE and press the MENU knob The SCENE STORE page appears Saving and Loading Scene Files geq 1es pue Bunes 9 Jaydeyo 149 Humes sn Buipeo pue Burnes 9 150 PO00 SCENE STORE DISPLAY MODE 3 Press the MENU knob then select the desired file number and press the MENU knob again The file to be saved is selected When no Memory Stick is inserted Select the desired memory number and press the MENU knob When the save is completed the SCENE FILE page appears again When you select a file number where data has already been saved The message OVERWRITE OK YES NO appears To cancel the overwriting press the MENU knob leaving positioning to NO Tooverwrite select YES and press the MENU knob When a Memory Stick is inserted You can use up to 20 pages from 1 to P20 to save scene files in the Memory Stick Each page can hold up to five files D Turn the MENU knob until the page which contains the desired file appears then press the MENU knob PO1 SCENE STORE ESC DISPLAaY MODE ALL FEB 05 02 2 Select the desired file number and press the MENU knob The message STORE OK YES NO appears RE YES2NO H ALL FEB 05 02 3 To carry out the storing select YES and press the MENU knob To cancel
276. play on the viewfinder screen for about one second If SHOT MARK 2 recording has been assigned to one of the ASSIGN switches you can also use that switch to record a SHOT MARK 2 Setting the Thumbnail Image at Recording Time When you record a clip you can specify which frame to use as the clip s thumbnail image see page 76 For example if all clips have the same image in their first frames you can specify a frame a few seconds after the start of the clip so that all thumbnails will not show the same image The factory default setting is to use the first frame in the clip as the thumbnail Proceed as follows How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the desired item 1 Display the ESSENCE MARK page of the MAINTENANCE menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic Menu Operations on page 129 MOAOESSENCE MARK SHOT MARK 1 SHOT MARK 2 gt INDEX PIC FIND MODE 2 Select INDEX PIC POS and press the MENU knob The mark changes to a mark and the amp mark changes to a mark MOAOESSENCE MARK SHOT MARK 1 ON SHOT MARK 2 ON e INDEX PIC POS 1255 gt R ST FIND MODE 3 Turn the MENU knob to select the desired time Recording Basic Operations xXoeqKe d pue Bulpiovey e Jaydeyo 65 xoeg e g pue g 66 You can select the time in units of 1 second over t
277. pply type set the switch to 48V Setthe AUDIO IN switches to REAR 4 Aim the microphones at a sound source 5 Check that the audio level meters in the LCD monitor and the audio level indications in the viewfinder change with the volume of the sound 6 lt Checking the user bit and timecode functions 1 setthe user bits as required For the operation see To set the user bits on page 62 2 Set the timecode For the operation see To set the timecode on page 61 3 Set the F RUN SET R RUN switch to R RUN Press the REC button and check that recording starts and that the timecode indication in the time counter display section changes D Press the REC button again and check that recording stops and that the timecode indication stops changing 6 Set the F RUN SET R RUN switch to F RUN and check that the timecode indication starts changing Maintenance again and continues to change even when you restart recording and stop recording again 7 Set the COUNTER CHAPTER button to U BIT and check that the user bits data that was set is displayed Maintenance Cleaning the viewfinder Use a dust blower to clean the CRT screen and mirror inside the viewfinder barrel Clean the lens and protecting filter with a commercially available lens cleaner Note About the Battery Terminal The battery terminal of this unit the connector for battery packs and AC adaptors is a consumable part
278. r With this camcorder you can use a Sony Memory Stick whose capacity does not exceed 128 MB and a Sony Memory Stick PRO whose capacity does not exceed 2 GB For details see About a Memory Stick on page 174 Chapter To insert a Memory Stick 1 Open the Memory Stick slot cover on the back of the camcorder 2 Insert the Memory Stick with its label side facing the Memory Stick logo on the camcorder Label side of Memory Stick If it does not fit into the slot properly or if there is some resistance when you insert it the Memory Stick may be turned around or upside down Do not force the Memory Stick into the slot Confirm the direction of the notch and arrow on the Memory Stick before inserting the Memory Stick and then try inserting it again To remove the Memory Stick 1 Check that the access indicator is not lit then gently press in the Memory Stick once and release The Memory Stick pops out Saving and Loading User Files Bumes sn pue 9 145 sn Buipeo pue 9 146 Check that the access indicator is not lit Gently press in and release 2 Pull the Memory Stick towards you to withdraw it from the slot Do not remove the Memory Stick while the access indicator is lit You may lose data or damage the Mem
279. r is put in Interval Rec mode The TALLY indicator green in the viewfinder flashes one flash second while the camcorder is in this mode 2 Select INTERVAL TIME and press the MENU knob 3 Turn the MENU knob to set the interval time You can select the value of interval time from ISEC to 10SEC 15SEC 20SEC 30SEC 40SEC 50SEC 1MIN to 10MIN 15MIN 20MIN 30MIN 40MIN 50MIN 1H to 4H 6H 12H and 24H Here SEC means seconds MIN means minutes and means hours 4 select NUMBER OF FRAME and press the MENU knob D Turn the MENU knob to select the length of time of one recording session in units of frames and press the MENU knob You can select from 1F and 6F 6 select NUMBER OF TIMES and press the MENU knob Tum the MENU knob to select the number of recording sessions and press the MENU knob You can select from CONT continuous 50 100 200 300 500 800 and 1000 8 if you want the light to automatically turn on before you start recording select PRE LIGHTING and press the MENU knob 9 Turn the MENU knob to specify the time in units of second how long before the start of recording the light should turn on automatically and press the MENU knob You can select from OFF 2SEC 5SEC and 10SEC Set the LIGHT switch on the camcorder to AUTO to turn on the light before recording The light switch must also be set to ON With these settings the light turns on and off auto
280. r may not operate correctly Make sure that the viewfinder connector is pushed fully into the VF connector on the unit If the connector is not firmly connected the image may break up or the tally light may not operate properly For details contact your Sony dealer Adjusting the Viewfinder Position To adjust the viewfinder left to right position loosen the left to right positioning ring and to adjust the front to back position loosen the front to back positioning knob Viewfinder left to right positioning ring Viewfinder front to back positioning knob When the viewfinder is attached do not leave the camera or the camcorder with the eyepiece facing the sun Direct sunlight can enter through the eyepiece be focused in the viewfinder and cause fire Adjusting the Eyepiece Focus and the Screen Brightness Contrast and Outline Emphasis BRIGHT control Eyepiece focusing ring CONTRAST control OUTPUT DCC switch Adjusting the Viewfinder suonejedejg Z jajdeup 37 suonejedejg z Jeideuj 38 To adjust the eyepiece focus First focus the image with the lens then adjust the eyepiece focusing knob or eyepiece focusing ring to get the clearest viewfinder image for your eyesight The visual adjustment range is 3 5D to 0 4D You can change the adjustment range by installing an exchange part The adjustment range after the exchange is 3 6D to 0 8D or 2 8D to 2 0D Contact
281. r power zoom to set the lens to telephoto Point the camera at the chart by turning the focus ring and focus on the chart Set the zoom ring to wide angle Turn the F f or ring until the chart is in focus being careful not to disturb the focus ring Repeat steps 4 to 7 until the chart stays in focus ring Tighten the F f or F B ring fixing screws Adjusting the Viewfinder Depending on the eyesight of the operator whether longsighted or shortsighted the optimal position of the viewfinder image varies Adjusting brightness contrast and so on improves the visibility of the viewfinder screen Although these adjustments may make the viewfinder image clearer they have no effect on the output video signal from the camcorder Detaching the Viewfinder Remove any microphone from the viewfinder beforehand 1 Power off this unit then unplug the viewfinder connector from the VF connector 2 Loosen the viewfinder left to right positioning ring CD and with the stopper raised 2 detach the viewfinder 3 Stopper Viewfinder left to right positioning ring To attach the viewfinder Reverse the detaching procedure Note that it is not necessary to raise the stopper Note the following points when mounting the viewfinder Be sure to power off this unit before plugging the viewfinder connector into the VF connector on this unit If the connector is plugged in while the power is on the viewfinde
282. reen displays not only the video picture but also characters and messages indicating the camcorder settings and operating status a center marker a safety zone marker etc When the menu screen is not displayed and the DISPLAY switch is set to ON the items for which an ON setting was made on the VF DISP 1 or VF DISP 2 page of the OPERATION menu or with related switches are displayed at the top and bottom of the screen The messages that give details of the settings and adjustment progress and results can also be made to appear for about 3 seconds while settings are being changed during adjustment and after adjustment For details about the display item selection see Selecting the Display Items on page 135 For details about setting change and adjustment progress messages see Change Confirmation Adjustment Progress Messages on page 135 For details about marker display see Setting the Marker Display on page 136 Location and Function of Parts Layout of the status display on the viewfinder screen All items that can be displayed on the viewfinder screen are shown below VDR operation indicators VDR operation is displayed as follows REC During recording PLAY During playback CONT lit Continuous recording to extend the previous clip is possible CONT flashing CLIP CONT REC is ON and a new clip will be created and recorded Il During pause of recording playback gt gt
283. ries cannot be created in the Clip directory When the following operations are carried out on a disc then it becomes impossible for version 1 4 and lower XDCAM devices P to record new clips or delete existing Overview uoneJedo aji4 Z Ja deuD 155 uonejedo aji4 156 clips on that disc The only possible operations are playback and disc formatting Writing of clips with user defined names Deletion of clips except the last recorded clip Locking of clips f you attempt to write a C MXF file which does not meet the conditions specified in remark c to this table via a FAM connection a Windows error message appears to the effect that the file or directory is corrupt and cannot be read 1 PDW F350 F330 PDW 530 510 PDW F70 F30 PDW 1500 PDW R1 PDW V1 PDW D1 and PDW 70MD Edit directory File name Content Operations Read Partial read Write Partial write Rename Create Delete E E01 SMI 9 Clip list file Yes Yes 0 Yes Yes 9 Yes 9 0001 to 0099 E MO1 XML 2 Metadata file generated Yes Yes P No9 No No 9 automatically when E EO1 SMI file is created 0001 to 0099 Other files Files other than the above No No a The E part can be changed to a user defined name b Only files which can be written by XDCAM Partial writing is not possible c Only files which can be written by XDCAM d Only when the Write Inhibit tab on the disc
284. riginal material 00 00 00 Copied material Generation number 1 byte random number 2 bytes Distinguishing between copied material Using the Extended UMID You have to enter a country code organization code and user code Set the country code referring to the ISO 3166 table and set the organization code and user code independently Material source ID the original materialand detecting material Metadata pack that identifies the source of material unit by defining the when where and who of the material unit with which it is associated For details see Additional information related to the UMID on page 172 Functions of UMID data The UMID data enables the following Using UMID Data xipueddy 171 xipueddy 172 Add a globally unique ID to every shot of audio visual material The unique ID is used to detect the material source and to link it with the original source material Distinguishing between original material and copied material 00 is added to the Instance Number for original material The UTC is used when recording the UMID This enables uniform control of source material recorded all over the world based on the universal timecode Calculating the date difference among source materials The source material is recorded based on the MJD Modified Julian Date which enables easy calculation of date difference among source materials UMID menu setup Set the following items required to u
285. rror message STORED DATA NG flashes on the viewfinder screen when the camcorder is turned on the white balance memory contents have been lost Adjust the white balance again Contact your Sony dealer if this message continues to appear even after the white balance has been adjusted again Using the ATW auto tracking white balance function By using the ATW function the white balance is adjusted automatically when the lighting conditions change Depending on the shooting conditions the white balance may not always be correctly adjusted automatically To get a precise white balance it is recommended to use the WHITE BAL switch Turning the ATW function on using the WHITE BAL switch 1 On the WHITE SETTING page of the MAINTENANCE menu set WHITE SWITCH B to ATW 2 Setthe WHITE BAL switch to the B ATW position This turns the ATW function on and the white balance is now adjusted automatically to respond to changes in the lighting conditions Turning the ATW function on using an ASSIGN switch 1 On the ASSIGNABLE page of the USER or OPERATION menu see page 141 set one of ASSIGN 1 to ASSIGN 4 to ATW 2 Press the A TW assigned switch This turns the ATW function on and the white balance is now adjusted automatically to respond to changes in the lighting conditions Setting the Electronic Shutter This section describes the shutter modes that can be used with the electronic shutter of the camcorder
286. s If you press the MENU knob again while Bl is displayed the operation is cancelled and the camcorder returns to the settings before STANDARD was selected Saving and Loading Scene Files geq 1es pue Bunes 9 Jaydeyo 153 uoneJedo aji4 Ja deup 154 File Operation Overview A remote computer can be connected to this unit and used to operate on recorded data which has been saved in data files such as video and audio data files To connect a remote computer use FAM file access mode for the computer connection Directory Structure The following figure shows the directory structure of discs visible to a remote computer This structure is not the same as the actual structure recorded on the disc Overview Chapter root INDEX XML ALIAS XML P DISCMETA XML MEDIAPRO XML T Clip C0001 MXF C0001M01 XML C0002 MXF C0002M01 XML 0003 C0003M01 XML Edit 0001 01 5 E0001M01 XML E0002E01 SMI E0002M01 XML A Sub C0001S01 MXF C0002S01 MXF C0003801 MXF LE General a Root director
287. s rename them set their thumbnails and so on Unlock the clip if you want to perform any of these operations To lock clips with a shortcut operation You can lock clips without using the CLIP menu After carrying out step 2 in the procedure press the STOP button with the SHIFT button held down shortcut operation To unlock clips Carry out step 2 of Locking Write Protecting Clips to select a locked clip one with the lock icon displayed on its thumbnail Then do one of the following Carry out steps 3 and 4 of Locking Write Protecting Clips Press the STOP button with the SHIFT button held down shortcut operation To lock all clips 1 Carry out steps 1 and 3 of Locking Write Protecting Clips to display the CLIP menu 2 Use the SEL SET button or MENU knob to select LOCK OR DELETE ALL CLIPS and then press the button or knob A submenu screen appears Select LOCK ALL CLIPS and then press the SEL SET button or MENU knob A confirmation screen appears 4 With selected press the SEL SET button or MENU knob clips are locked To unlock all clips Carry out the procedure in lock all clips selecting UNLOCK ALL CLIPS in step 3 Deleting Clips You can delete clips while checking their contents Clips cannot be deleted when the Write Inhibit tab of the disc is set to the recording disabled position Locked clips cannot be deleted Ifthe dele
288. s 52 142 EZ mode 51 142 EZ MODE TLCS page 109 F FFWD button 19 F REV button 19 FAM connections 157 Features 9 File access mode FAM 157 FILE menu 123 File operation 154 restrictions 155 Filter indicator 29 FILTER selector 12 Fitting for optional microphone holder 22 Flange focal length adjustment button 25 Flange focal length adjusting 35 using a non auto focus lens 36 using the VCL 719BXS auto focus lens 35 Flicker 54 Focus control connector 26 Focus indicator 28 Focus ring 25 FOCUS switch 25 FORMAT page 108 Four way arrow key 20 Frame frequency setting 32 FRONT MIC LOW CUT switch 21 F RUN SET R RUN switch 21 G Gain setting values for the GAIN selector positions 139 value 29 GAIN SW page 109 GAIN switch 14 GAIN UP indicator 27 Gamma Tables 141 GENLOCK IN connector 22 Glossary 181 H Memory Stick handling 145 Hold indicator 17 i LINK data transfer speed 173 overview 173 settings required for connection 46 i LINK connector 24 TEEE1394 connector 24 IG control 26 Internal timecode generator selecting operating mode 21 Interval Rec 66 settings before shooting 66 shooting 67 IRIS button 26 Iris gain control 26 Iris ring 25 Iris setting auto iris override indicator 29 IRIS switch 26 Iris adjusting 59 K KNEE page 114 L Large viewfinder attachment shoe 21 LCD monitor 15 operating buttons 15 status display 16 135 LCD page 112 Lens 25 mounting 35
289. s added to the current clip list in the lower part as a sub clip The section from the selected thumbnail to the next thumbnail is included as a sub clip Adding Sub Clips Using the Chapter Function You can use the chapter function see page 79 to display thumbnails of shot marks in clips on the disc and include sections of those clips in clip lists Proceed as follows 1 In the scene selection screen select the clip for chapter display An S mark appears in the upper right of clips where shot marks are set Press the COUNTER CHAPTER button on the right of the LCD monitor Thumbnails of the chapters in the specified clip appear in the upper part of the scene selection screen CLIP LISTC ADD CHAPTER 008 0005 0015 B TCU1 12 31 00 TCU1 13 40 08 LE TC 01 16 25 03 T oe TCUT 17 13 24 01 17 23 18 T 117 18 02 15 SCENE SELECTION TOTAL Using the SEL SET button or MENU knob from the positions of the essence marks recorded within this clip select the chapter for the part you want to include in the clip list To select two or more chapters hold down the SHIFT button and operate the MENU knob The section from the selected thumbnail to the next thumbnail is included as a sub clip Even if more than one chapter is selected the addition to the current clip list is linked to a single sub clip Press the SEL SET button or MENU knob The clip selected in the upper part is added to t
290. s recorded on the disc when the disc is loaded in this unit Therefore processing takes longer than for a quick salvage about 30 seconds although it depends on the state of the disc Before using another XDCAM device P to perform a full salvage of a disc that was recorded successfully on the PDW F75 75MD F355 F335 check that the version of the other device is version 1 7 or higher Salvage cannot be completed successfully on version 1 6 or lower devices 1 PDW F350 F330 PDW 530 510 PDW F70 F30 PDW 1500 PDW R1 PDW V1 PDW D1 and PDW 70MD Proceed as follows to perform a full salvage 1 Insert the disc on which recording did not end normally The following salvage message appears SALVAGE TO RECORD ON THE DISC IT IS NECESSARY S TO EXECUTE SALVAGE SALVAGE OK YES NO 2 Select YES and press the MENU knob Salvage processing starts and the message EXECUTING appears A results message appears when the processing finishes If the salvage succeeded the message COMPLETED appears If the salvage failed the message INCOMPLETED appears Clips for which recording did not end normally are lost To exit without salvaging Select NO in step 2 to exit without performing salvage processing However the status of the disc does not change Salvage is still required to recover the clips for which recording did not end normally The salvage message will appear again when that disc is insert
291. s the upper limit for shutter 1 250 adjustment This function operates only when using the EZ mode AE CHANGE POINT F5 6 F8 F16 Sets the f stop for switching from F11 F16 automatic iris adjustment to AE normal This function operates only when setting value using the EZ mode Menu Organization and Operation poejrejeq pue shejdsiq nua 109 sBunmes pejreyeg pue sAejdsiq nua 1 2 110 OPERATION menu No Page Item Settings Default USER Description File menu page 09 OFFSET OFFSET WHITE lt A gt ON OFF OFF See Specifying an Offset forthe WHITE WARM COOL lt A gt Display color 3200 Auto White Balance Setting on temperature page 140 converted from R B Gain COLOR FINE lt A gt 99 to 99 0 OFFSET WHITE lt B gt ON OFF OFF WARM COOL lt B gt Display color 3200 temperature converted from R B Gain COLOR FINE lt B gt 99 to 99 O 10 OUTPUT COMPONENT OUT AUTO AUTO 07 Selects the output from the BNC A HD YPbPr connector on the side panel of this SD YPbPr unit AUTO Switch between HD YPbPr and SD YPbPr according to the recording format For both recording and playback HD YPbPr Regardless of the recording format output HD YPbPr when recording Output SD YPbPr only when playing back DVCAM format SD YPbPr Regardless of the recording format output SD
292. se UMID data on the UMID SET page of the OPERATION menu Item Description COUNTRY CODE Sets the country code ORGANIZATION Sets the organization code USER CODE Sets the user code TIME ZONE Sets the time difference from UTC For details of the setting operation see Basic Menu Operations on page 129 Additional information related to the UMID COUNTRY CODE When you select this item the COUNTRY CODE window appears Enter an abbreviated alphanumeric string 4 byte alphanumeric strings according to the values defined in ISO 3166 1 There are about 240 country codes Find your own country code on the following home page Refer to ISO 3166 1 http www din de gremien nas nabd iso3 166ma codistpl en listpl html When the country code is less than 4 bytes the active part of the code will occupy the first part of the 4 bytes and the remainder must be filled with the space character 20h Example In the case of Japan For Japan if the country code is JP it is 2 bytes if JPN it is 3 bytes Thus enter the following JP Or JPN where represents a space ORGANIZATION organization code When you select this item the ORGANIZATION window appears Using UMID Data Enter an abbreviated 4 byte alphanumeric string for the organization code There are no problems in recording or playing back audio video signals if ORGANIZATION is not set Organization codes must be acquired by applying
293. search the entire disc TRIM SCO002 DUR 00 03 44 03 Carry out playback or search to find the scene to be the new In point or Out point of the selected sub clip You can also turn the MENU knob for a jog operation Use the SEL SET button or MENU knob to select IN or on the screen and press the button or knob The set timecode value appears as IN or To reset an In point or Out point Select IN or OUT on the screen and then press the RESET button on the right side of the LCD monitor The In or Out point returns to the value it had before you entered the trim screen To cue up the In or Out point Do one of the following to cue up the In point With the SHIFT button held down press the PREV button With the SEL SET button pressed to the left press the PREV or NEXT button Do one of the following to cue up the Out point With the SHIFT button held down press the NEXT button With the SEL SET button pressed to the right press the PREV or NEXT button When you are finished setting the In or Out point select OK The background of turns to yellow Press the SEL SET button or MENU knob The trim is executed To continue trimming sub clips With the SHIFT button held down press the SEL SET button or the MENU knob After the trim is executed you return to the screen of step 3 instead of the CLIP menu This allows you to continue trimming To c
294. sed for the display of the LCD monitor in the same way Selecting the Display Items To select the items to be displayed on the viewfinder screen with the viewfinder DISPLAY switch set to ON and the LCD monitor use the VF DISP 1 and VF DISP 2 pages of the OPERATION menu How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the desired item 1 Display the VF DISP 1 or VF DISP 2 page of the OPERATION menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic Menu Operations on page 129 2 Select the desired setting item and press the MENU knob On the VF DISP 1 and VF DISP 2 pages you can select any of the following items to turn its display on or off VF DISP 1 page Item Description DISP REC Displays the recording format FORMAT DISP BIT RATE Indication of HQ SP or LP recording DISP SYSTEM System frequency DISP 16 9 Aspect ratio indication when recording SD signals DISP ZOOM Zoom position indication DISP FOCUS 1 Focus setting DISP BATT Displays the battery voltage or REMAIN 2 battery remaining capacity DISP REC TALLY REC PLAY F REV and F FWD indications DISP TIM CODE Displays the timecode 1 This item may not appear depending on the mounted lens 2 When an Anton Bauer battery system or a BP GL65 GL95 battery pack is installed the remaining battery power is shown as a percentage value 96 accord
295. select the desired item and then press the MENU knob once more The USER 9 EDIT page appears again displaying the newly added item Repeat steps 4 to 6 to add the remaining items You can add up to 10 items on one page To delete items on a page 1 2 4 To 1 2 To 3 Follow steps 1 to 3 in To add a new page on page 131 Press the MENU knob Then select the item that you want to delete and press the MENU knob The EDIT FUNCTION page appears Select DELETE and press the MENU knob The previously displayed page appears again and the message DELETE OK YES NO appears at the upper right To delete select YES and press the MENU knob replace items on a page Follow steps 1 to 3 in add a new page on page 131 Press the MENU knob Then select the item that you want to replace and press the MENU knob The EDIT FUNCTION page appears Select MOVE and press the MENU knob The previously displayed page appears again Select the position to which you want to move the item and press the MENU knob The item selected in step 2 moves to the position that you selected in step 4 insert a blank line Follow steps 1 to 3 in add a new page on page 131 Press the MENU knob Then select the item above which you want to insert a blank line and press the MENU knob The EDIT FUNCTION page appears Select BLANK and press the MENU knob The previously displayed
296. selecting the desired thumbnail with the cursor press the button centrally to confirm This button is used for scene selection and other operations For details of clip list playback operations see page 80 For details of the CLIP menu see Managing Clip Lists page 95 For details of scene selection see page 85 Q AUDIO LEVEL CH 1 CH 2 audio channel 1 2 recording level knobs Adjusts the audio levels to be recorded on channels 1 and 2 when the AUDIO SELECT CH 1 CH 2 switches are set to MANUAL Q AUDIO SELECT CH 1 CH 2 audio channel 1 2 adjustment method selection switches Select the audio level adjustment method for each of audio channels 1 and 2 AUTO Automatic adjustment MANUAL Manual adjustment AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4 audio channel 1 2 3 4 input selection switches AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 switches Select the audio input signals to be recorded on audio channels 1 and 2 FRONT Input signals from the microphone connected to the MIC IN connector WIRELESS Audio input signals from the CA WR855 Camera Adaptor supplied separately if a WRR 855 series UHF synthesized tuner supplied separately is installed using the CA WR855 REAR Audio input signals from an audio device connected to the AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 connectors AUDIO IN CH 3 CH 4 switches Select the audio input signals to be recorded on audio channels 3 and 4 F FRONT Input signals from a microphone connected to the MIC IN conne
297. ssigned the ASSIGN 1 or 2 switch the function is turned on and EZ FOCUS appears in the viewfinder screen and the LCD monitor To turn the function off press the switch again Even if you do not press the switch the function goes off automatically after 10 seconds The EZ focus function goes off automatically if it is on when you press the REC button on this unit or the lens Recording starts immediately thereafter Basic Procedure for Shooting 12s up the VDR section according to your shooting objects then start recording by pressing the REC button During recording the REC TALLY indicator in the viewfinder lights and REC appears on the viewfinder screen You can use the AUDIO LEVEL knob on the front of the camcorder to manually adjust the channel 1 audio level To do this you must first set up the VDR section to enable manual adjustment of the audio recording level see page 60 13To pause recording press the REC button again The REC TALLY indicator in the viewfinder goes off The material recorded from step 12 to step 13 is saved as a single clip To play back the recorded clip Press the PREV button then press the PLAY PAUSE button to play from the beginning of the clip 1 4 Repeat steps 12 and 13 as required to continue shooting Successive clips are recorded on the disc Clip 1 Clip 2 Clip 3 REC REC REC REC REC REC START STOP START STOP START STOP tis not possible to record a cl
298. stored the mechanism will again function normally 170 Troubleshooting Using UMID Data To perform operations from interviewing to editing effectively and to detect audio visual materials easily when reusing them metadata that provides additional information is recorded along with audio visual data on a disc As one of application of metadata the UMID Unique Material Identifier is internationally standardized What is a UMID The UMID Unique Material Identifier is a unique identifier for audio visual material defined by the SMPTE330M 2003 standard The UMID may be used either as the 32 byte Basic UMID or as the Extended UMID which includes an additional 32 bytes of Source Pack to make a total 64 bytes For details refer to SMPTE 330M Extended UMID 64 bytes Basic UMID 32 bytes Source pack 32 bytes Globally unique ID is automatically recorded every shooting Universal label L Instance Material Number Time Date Spatial Country Org User No Coordinates 12 bytes 1 Sbytes 16 bytes 8 bytes 12 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes The Extended UMID is metadata that provides additional information such as location time date company and so on The UMID is applied as follows Instance No shooting Material No ID generated when Same as the above Source Pack Shooting information when where and who Same as the above O
299. t are sent back from a VTR to a camera or from a control console to a camera so that a camera operator can verify the recorded selected video signals Sampling frequency A method used to sample an analog signal so that it can be represented digitally The higher the sampling frequency is the more accurately the high frequency analog signal can be represented SDSDI signal Standard Definition Serial Digital Interface An interface standardized as SMPTE 259M which enables the transmission of an uncompressed digital component stream Shot data Data recorded while shooting in the color bars the user bits data of VITC and so forth Includes the model name serial number date time shot number and ID1 to ID4 Shutter speed The time that the shutter is open Slow shutter speeds give bright images but motion resolution is lower SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers a professional association established in the U S A mainly for the purpose of setting forth motion picture and television engineering standards S N Signal to Noise ratio The relation of the strength of the desired signal to the accompanying electronic interference the noise If S N is high sounds are reproduced with less noise and pictures are reproduced clearly without snow Sub clip One of the sections which make up a clip list A sub clip may be part of a clip or an entire clip Superimpose A procedure you use to
300. t for a specified frame EXT TC External timecode A timecode input from external equipment together with audio data It corresponds to the conventional timecode recorded on tape based media Instead the EXT TC is usually used to record timecodes and audio signals that are played back by equipment that is not synchronized with the reference video signal Ff See Flange focal length Flange focal length The distance from the plane of lens mounting flange to the image focal plane Abbreviated to Ff Flare Dark or colored flashes caused by signal overload through extreme light reflections of polished objects or very bright lights Flicker Repeated changes in screen brightness caused by an interference Glossary xipueddy 181 xipueddy 182 between the camera s scanning and the lighting conditions GENLOCK A state in which devices are locked to a signal output by a sync generator Genlock allows multiple devices to operate in synchronization HDSDI signal Abbreviation for High Definition Serial Digital Interface This is an uncompressed digital component video signal as specified by SMPTE 292M Horizontal resolution The horizontal resolution of the screen which is expressed as the number of vertical lines distinguishable when shooting a test chart Hunting Repeated brightening and darkening of an image resulting from repeated response to automatic iris control i LINK Another n
301. t when the POWER switch is set to OFF and when battery exhaustion is detected because the unit does not become powered off until after the end of recording processing Do not disconnect the battery pack or power cord until recording processing has finished and the ACCESS indicator has gone out This function salvages as much recorded material as possible after an unforeseen accident but 100 restoration cannot be guaranteed Even when this function is used it is not possible to recover data from immediately before the interruption of recording The amount of data lost is as follows Handling Discs Quick salvage From 2 to 4 seconds of data before the interruption of recording Full salvage From 4 to 6 seconds of data before the interruption of recording More data may be lost when the unit is subject to vibrations when you switch frequently between recording and paused and when you use functions such as Interval Rec Quick salvage When the unit is powered on again after a recording interruption due to a power interruption with the disc still loaded in the unit clips are reconstructed on the basis of backup data stored in nonvolatile memory and markers recorded on the disc Processing time is about 5 seconds Full salvage When recording on an XDCAM device is interrupted because of a power interruption and a disc is manually ejected from that device with the power off clips are reconstructed on the basis of marker
302. te balance color A SETTING temperature temperature setting converted form R B Gain C TEMP BAL P 99 to 99 O Finer setting when the desired color could not be obtained with the COLOR TEMP lt P gt color temperature setting WHITE SWITCH lt B gt ATW MEM Selects mode when the WHITE BAL switch is in the B position ATW auto tracking white balance MEM auto white balance ATW SPEED 1 2 3 4 5 4 Switches the ATW transition speed SHOCKLESS WHITE OFF 1 2 8 1 Selects whether to enable the function that smooths out the white gain variation as the WHITE BAL switch is switched and sets the transition rate 1 represents the fastest AWB FIXED AREA ON OFF OFF Increases the AWB speed WHT FILTER INH ON Turns on and off the function which inhibits independent white balance memory for each filter position 06 CAM COLOR BAR SEL MULTI 75 MULTI Selects color bar type A CONFIG 100 REC TALLY UPPER UPPER BOTH SLOW MOTION NORMAL NORMAL EXPAND SHT DISP MODE SEC DE SEC IRIS OVER RIDE ON OFF ON LOW NOISE MODE OFF 1 2 OFF Selects whether to light the upper REC TALLY indicator only or both upper and lower indicators NORMAL Allows you to select the frame rate over the limited range 4P to 30P and 60P or 4P to 25P and 50P EXPAND Allows you to select the frame rate over the full range 4P to 60P without limitation or 4P to 60P without limitation or
303. tems in the upper left of the screen are displayed in the following order of priority Title gt user assigned clip name gt standard clip name Therefore the display changes as follows depending on whether a clip has a title The title is displayed for clips recorded on this unit which have titles The user assigned or standard clip name is displayed for clips which do not have titles On XDCAM devices with firmware earlier than version 1 4 clips with user defined names are displayed as C5000 to C9999 in the order of recording Clip names and clip list names are converted as follows for display in the thumbnail screen and the CLIP menu If the clip name is longer than 15 characters then the first 9 characters and the last 5 characters are displayed Other characters are converted into 1 symbols Lowercase characters are converted to uppercase Kanji and other multibyte characters and some symbols are converted into 0 symbols Sequences of symbols are converted into a single O symbol The following 21 symbols can be displayed 2 amp 2 90 1 PDW F350 F330 PDW 530 510 PDW F70 F30 PDW 1500 PDW R1 PDW V1 PDW D1 and PDW 70MD Display example JumpingDolphin No103 JUMPINGDO L1 NO103 To check clip information name title etc by using a menu See Basic Menu Operations page 129 for more information about menu operations Display the CLIP STATUS page of the DIAG
304. tep 6 select ESC at the top right of the screen and press the MENU knob The EDIT PAGE screen appears again To delete items on a page 1 Follow steps 1 to 3 in To add a page 2 Press the MENU knob Then select the page that you want to delete and press the MENU knob The EDIT FUNCTION page appears Select DELETE and press the MENU knob The previously displayed page appears again and the message DELETE OK YES NO appears at the upper right 4 select YES and press the MENU knob To replace a page 1 Follow steps 1 to 3 in To add a page 2 Press the MENU knob Then select the page that you want to move and press the MENU knob The EDIT FUNCTION page appears Select MOVE and press the MENU knob The previous screen appears again Select the position to which you want to move the page selected in step 2 and press the MENU knob The page is moved to the position selected in step 4 Resetting USER Menu Settings to the Standard Settings You can return all settings in the USER menu to standard settings How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the desired item 1 Display the USER FILE page of the FILE menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic Menu Operations on page 129 Menu Organization and Operation pejrejeq pue s e dsiq nua 133 TOP YES3NO F TIOUSER FIL
305. the button or knob A screen as shown below appears In the following description this whole screen is referred to as the scene selection screen CLIP LIST ADD TA a ro TC 00 25 08 14 EX C 00 29 40 23 TC 00 28 22 10 f Tt 00 27 18 04 f TC 00 27 51 08 TOTAL GHEE SCENE SELECTIO To return to the CLIP menu Press the RESET button on the right side of the LCD monitor Use the SEL SET button four way arrow key or MENU knob to select the clip you want to include in the clip list press the button or knob To make a multiple selection hold down the SHIFT button and turn the MENU knob An I bar cursor appears in a window in the lower part of the screen to show the insertion position If you press the RESET button at this point you return to the state at the beginning of step 6 Press the SEL SET button or MENU knob The clip selected in the upper part is added to the current clip list in the lower part as a sub clip The screen returns to the CLIP menu see step 4 uonoejes eueog Ja deyD To continue working without returning to the CLIP menu With the SHIFT button held down press the SEL SET button or the MENU knob You return directly to the scene selection screen of step 5 Repeat steps 5 to 7 until all desired clips have been added to the current clip list You can add the same clip as a sub clip any number of times Creating Clip Lists 89 Total duration of sub clips in the
306. the unit Care of the unit Remove dust and dirt from the surfaces of the lenses or optical filters using a blower If the body of the unit is dirty clean it with a soft dry cloth In extreme cases use a cloth steeped in a little neutral detergent then wipe dry Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol or thinners as these may cause discoloration or other damage to the finish of the unit In the event of operating problems If you should experience problems with the unit contact your Sony dealer Use and storage locations Store in a level ventilated place Avoid using or storing the unit in the following places Important Notes on Operation In excessive heat or cold operating temperature range 0 C to 40 C 32 F to 104 F Remember that in summer in warm climates the temperature inside a car with the windows closed can easily exceed 50 C 122 F In damp or dusty locations Locations where the unit may be exposed to rain Locations subject to violent vibration Near strong magnetic fields Close to radio or TV transmitters producing strong electromagnetic fields In direct sunlight or close to heaters for extended periods To prevent electromagnetic interference from portable communications devices The use of portable telephones and other communications devices near this unit can result in malfunctions and interference with audio and video signals It is recommended that the portable communications devices ne
307. the unit is shipped It does not normally require any adjustment IRIS button When the IRIS switch is in the M position for manual adjustment press this button for an instantaneous auto adjustment The iris is automatically adjusted while the button is held down IRIS switch Select the method of iris adjustment A auto Auto mode The iris is adjusted automatically M manual Manual mode Adjust the iris with the iris ring Power zoom lever This is enabled when the ZOOM switch is in the SERVO position Press the W end for wide angle and the T end for telephoto Press the lever harder for a faster zoom action Notes on auto focus When an auto focus lens is mounted in the auto focus mode a frame appears in the center of the viewfinder screen indicating the auto focus area Place the subject on which you want to focus within this frame In the following cases it may be difficult to focus on the subject If this does happen use manual focusing If the subject has no contrast If the subject is moving rapidly When shooting point light sources under street lighting or at night When there are very bright objects close to the subject When shooting through a glass window On the LENS page of the MAINTENANCE menu by changing the AF DETECT AREA setting from Location and Function of Parts CENTER to FULL instead of focusing only on the center portion of the screen the whole screen ima
308. tick see About a Memory Stick on page 174 Do not remove a Memory Stick while the Memory Stick access indicator is lit Doing so may cause a loss of data DCIN DC power input connector XLR type 4 pin male To operate the camcorder using an AC power supply connect an AC 550 AC Adaptor with the DC output cable supplied with the adaptor Location and Function of Parts 23 MeIAJOAQ 1e1deuo 24 AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 audio input channel 1 2 connectors XLR type 3 pin female and input selection switches Connect other audio equipment or external microphone Set the input selection switches as shown below according to the microphone or equipment LINE left position For connecting an external audio signal source such as a stereo amplifier MIC center position For connecting any microphone other than 48 V microphone MIC 48 ON right position For connecting a 48 V microphone Signals input to the AUDIO IN CH 1 connector can be recorded on audio channels 1 and 3 Similarly signals input to the AUDIO IN CH 2 connector can be recorded on audio channels 2 and 4 1 1 When the AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4 switches on the side control panel are set to REAR or If MIC 48 ON is selected for a microphone other than 48 V microphone the microphone may be damaged amp LINK DV OUT S400 connector 6 pin IEEE 1394 compliant Connect to a device supporting the DV f
309. ting SYSTEM Setthe frame frequency 501 25P Refer to steps 5 and 6 and set the recording format and other items as required Item Description Setting REC Set the recording format MPEG HD FORMAT DVCAM BIT RATE Set the recording mode if HQ high MPEG HD has been quality E SP standard play LP long play ASPECT Setthe aspect ratio if 16 9 RATIO DVCAM has been selected o AUDIO CH Set the number of audio 2CH d recording channels if MPEG HD has been 3 selected D S 8 9 Set the POWER switch to OFF then once again to ON v Setting the Area of Use and the Frame Frequency 33 suonejedejg 2 sajdeup 34 Setting the Date and Time of the Internal Clock You can set the date and time of the internal clock The date and time set here are reflected in timecode How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the desired item 1 Display the TIME DATE page of the OPERATION menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic Menu Operations on page 129 020eTIME DATE 2 ADJUST 2 Select ADJUST and press the MENU knob The TIME ADJUST screen appears select a desired setting item and press the MENU knob You can set the following items in the TIME ADJUST screen Item Description HOUR Sets the hour value MIN Sets the minutes value
310. tion target clip is referenced by clip lists on the disc all of those clip lists are deleted as well If the deletion target clip is referenced in the current clip list all of the referenced sub clips and only those sub clips are deleted at the same time as the deletion target clip You can use the DISC page of the OPERATION menu to delete the last clip or all clips For details see page 64 1 With the SUB CLIP indicator off press the THUMBNAIL button turning it on The thumbnails of the clips on the disc appear 2 Select the clip to delete you can do this with the same operations as step 2 of Searching Using Thumbnails page 76 Clip to be deleted 015 034 TEDI Lem 34 108 122 TC 00 30 25 11 30 NOV 2005 13 42 54 1 1 1 44 1 TC Dl 9 43 14 DUR 0 00 05 13 3 Press the CLIP MENU button with the SHIFT button held down The CLIP menu appears see page 95 4 Use the SEL SET button or MENU knob to select DELETE CLIP and then press the button or knob A deletion confirmation screen appears and then thumbnails of four frames the first frame intermediate frame 1 intermediate frame 2 and the last frame in the target clip appear At the same time the clip name title date and time of creation and duration appear One of the following messages appears depending on whether the target clip is referenced in a clip list When the target clip is not referenced
311. to which you are trying Upper limit hours to record Exchange or format the FAN Stopped The main unit or drive fan has disc DR FAN Stop stopped Avoid use under high F z temperatures turn off the power File System There is an unsupported file system on the disc to which you and contact your Sony dealer are trying to record Exchange or a REC INHI appears if you attempt to start recording format the disc KEY INHI Disc operations are not possible Alarm messages during thumbnail search connected and the CA 755 is scene selection and clip list operations being used Alarm messages may appear in the LCD monitor during ILL PLAY ma Y S thumbnail search scene selection and clip list operations g In this case take the action indicated in the following table Lid Closed The lid of the disc compartment does not open Check the lid Message Meaning and action to take Lid Open The lid of the disc compartment is CANNOT EXPAND The clip cannot be expanded into not closed Close it securely CLIP ANY FURTHER more blocks No Clip There are no clips recorded on the This appears when the EXPAND disc Exchange for a recorded button is pressed when the disc number of block is maximum or when the duration of an expanded No Disc There is no disc loaded Insert a thumbnail is 1 frame disc and try the operation again SELECTED ESSENCE The selected essence mark does
312. ts settings during timecode synchronization When the timecode is synchronized only the time data is synchronized with the external timecode value Therefore the user bits can have their own settings for each camcorder To release the timecode synchronization First disconnect the external timecode then set the F RUN SET R RUN switch to R RUN To change the power supply from the battery pack to an external power supply during timecode synchronization To maintain a continuous power supply connect the external power supply to the DC IN connector before removing the battery pack You may lose timecode synchronization if you remove the battery pack first Camera synchronization during timecode synchronization During timecode synchronization the camera is genlocked to the reference video signal input from the GENLOCK IN connector Setting for Special Shooting Cases Depending on the shooting conditions set the camcorder appropriately referring to the following table Recording Basic Operations 63 yoeqhe q pue g 64 Shooting conditions Setting and effect When adjusting for skin detail or tone Example When shooting to hide skin details Setting See To correct skin detail on page 64 Effect This adjusts the skin detail or tone to a designated active area The 3200K preset white balance makes the picture reddish Setting Change the setting of the
313. ts the value more precisely when the color temperature adjustment through COLOR TEMP is not satisfactory R GAIN A Changes only the value of R GAIN B GAIN lt A gt Changes only the value of B GAIN 1 40 Adjustments and Settings from Menus Item Description D5600K lt A gt Sets the color temperature to approximately 5600K The above table shows the adjustment of the white balance of channel A Items followed by lt B gt are used to adjust the white balance of channel B 3 Turn the MENU knob to select the desired setting and press the MENU knob 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until you have set all of the desired items Specifying an Offset for the Auto White Balance Setting By setting an offset for the value of auto white balance you can make the picture warmer or colder How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the desired item 1 Display the OFFSET WHITE page of the OPERATION menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic Menu Operations on page 129 2 Select the desired setting item and press the MENU knob You can set the following items in the OFFSET WHITE page Item Description OFFSET WHITE When this item is set to ON the A offset adjusted on this page is added to the white balance for channel A WARM COOL A When OFFSET WHITE A is ON sets the offset for the white balance
314. unit Switch between monaural and stereo using the menus Other Features User friendly interface functions ASSIGN assignable switches The unit is provided with four ASSIGN switches two on the front and the others on the top of the grip You can assign various functions to these switches By assigning frequently used functions to the switches you can call up the desired functions instantly for example during shooting operations The functions that can be assigned are as follows Lens zoom control telephoto wide angle Easy focus function Turbo gain function 3 5 inch color LCD monitor The LCD monitor on the side of the unit can be switched to show the following images and data Status information including audio level meters for four channels and timecode List of thumbnails of the video recorded on the Professional Disc A playback image of the video recorded on the Professional Disc The camera image The image in the LCD monitor has about 4 cropped from each of the four edges of the actually captured video image For accurate framing always use the viewfinder When the area of use is set to PAL AREA frame frequency 501 or 25P the image in the LCD monitor may be reduced in quality with jaggies on diagonal lines but this is not a malfunction Features MSIAJOAQ Je1deuS 11 M Q 491deuoS 12 Location and Function of Parts Front 8 Q Lens
315. unit and a remote computer with an i LINK cable i LINK cable is connected Disconnect the i LINK cable from either this unit or the remote computer wait for at least 10 seconds and then reconnect the disconnected cable The unit is powered off and an i LINK cable is connected Power the unit on Recording Continuous Timecode over FAM Connections For clips created over a FAM connection you can record so that the timecode is continuous with the timecode of the last frame of the last clip recorded on the disc To record continuous timecode Before you start recording set the PRESET REGEN CLOCK switch on the side control panel inside the protection cover to REGEN Then write clip files to this unit from a connected computer or other device Recording Continuous Timecode over FAM Connections uoneJedo aji4 Z Ja deuD 159 xipueddy 160 Appendix Important Notes on Operation Use and Storage Do not subject the unit to severe shocks The internal mechanism may be damaged or the body warped Do not cover the unit while operating Putting a cloth for example over the unit can cause excessive internal heat build up After use Always turn off the POWER switch Before storing the camcorder for a long period Remove the battery pack Shipping Remove the disc before transporting the unit f sending the unit by truck ship air or other transportation service pack it in the shipping carton of
316. ure Playback xXoegqKe d pue e 75 A frozen picture appears The time code is displayed in the time counter display section and the PLAY PAUSE indicator changes from constant lighting to flashing one flash second To restart playback press the PLAY PAUSE button once again When remotely controlling the camcorder from an RM B150 B750 Remote Control Unit You can perform the same operation from the RM B150 B750 yoeghe q pue say deyo 76 Checking the Last Two Seconds of the Recording Recording Review If you press the RET button on the lens while recording is paused the last two seconds of the recording are played back on the viewfinder screen and the LCD monitor Use this function to check whether recording went smoothly If you hold down the RET button on the lens playback begins from the beginning of the clip After playback the camcorder is ready to start recording again When the LENS RET function is assigned to one of the ASSIGN 1 2 3 4 switches you can use that switch in the same way as the lens RET button When the Clip Continuous Rec function is enabled the review returns to the recording start point Checking the Recording on a Color Video Monitor Connect a color video monitor to the VIDEO OUT connector or SDI OUT connector of the camcorder By pressing the PLAY PAUSE button you can view the recorded picture On how to conne
317. ut with the color bar signal Four shot IDs are available ID 1 to ID 4 and you can select the shot ID to be recorded superimposed on the color bars When the menu is displayed the shot ID is not displayed even if the color bar signal is output How to select an item in the menu screen Turn the MENU knob to move the mark to the desired item 1 Display the SHOT ID page of the OPERATION menu and press the MENU knob For details on menu operations see Basic Menu Operations on page 129 SHOT ID TOP TN 000000000000 000000000000 000000000000 2 Select the ID one of ID 1 to ID 4 you want to set and press the MENU knob Bl appears over the first character position in the string and characters can now be input TOP 000000 000000 000000 7012345678 OO ID 4 O00000 LESAR Okt g ABCDEFGH I JKLMNOP BRSTUUUXYZIYlabcdefshiJk Imnorarstuvwxyz INS DEL RET ESC END Enter or change the characters When you are entering the shot ID for the first time go to step Setting the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen and the LCD Monitor pejrejeq pue shejdsiq nua 137 sBunjes pue s ejdsigq nua 2 138 D Turn the MENU knob to move to the character which you want to change then press the MENU knob OSHOT ID E OOOOOOO0000 OOOOO000000 oo
318. utomatic white balance adjustment function does not operate BLK Adjusts the black set and black balance automatically Location and Function of Parts Q REC recording start button Press to start recording Press it again to stop recording The effect is the same as that of the REC button on the supplied lens When the REC SWITCH function is assigned to an ASSIGN switch on the ASSIGNABLE page of the OPERATION menu you can use the switch as the REC button Auto focus ranging sensor When an VCL 719BXS supplied with the PDW F335K auto focus lens is mounted this measures the distance to the subject and automatically focuses the lens This sensor is provided as an auxiliary function for improving the automatic focusing speed Even if this sensor is blocked the focusing precision will not be affected VF viewfinder connector 20 pin Connect the supplied viewfinder Lens mount special bayonet mount Attach the lens FILTER selector Selects from the four neutral density ND filters built into this unit Position ND filter number 1 CLEAR 2 1 4 ND attenuates light to approximately 1 4 3 1 16 ND attenuates light to approximately 1 16 4 1 64 ND attenuates light to approximately 1 64 Normally set this to 1 CLEAR For shooting with the lens iris wide open for reduced depth of field or when the subject is too brightly lit and the auto iris function does not operate corr
319. va Laserl hd n teho 135 mW sykehuipun maks 65 mW jatkuvan aallon maks This label is located inside the outside panel of the unit For US A CAUTION Laser radiation when open and interlock defeated DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM Denna etikett finns apparatens ovansida For EUROPE UTION CLASS 2 LASER RADIATION DEFEATED NTERLOCKS Denne meerkat sidder pa DO NOT STARE INTO THE BEAM apparatets verste panel ATTENTION RADIATIONS LASER DE CLASSE 2 EN CAS D OUVERTURE ET DE DESACTIVATION DES VERROUS NE PAS REGARDER LE FAISCEAU kyltti sijaitsee laitteen VORSICHT yl pinnalla KLASSE 2 LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN GEOFFNET UND SPERREN AUSSER FUNKTION NICHT IN DEN STRAHL SEHEN ADVARSEL LASERSTR LING AF KLASSE 2 VED ABNING OG OMGAELSE AF LASEANORDNINGER STIR IKKE IND LYSSTR LEN Dette merket er plassert pa oversiden av produktet ADVARSEL LASERSTRALING KLASSE 2 NAR DEKSELET ER APENT OG LASENE UTE AV FUNKSJON IKKE STIRR INN STRALEN RNING KLASS 2 LASERSTRALNING NAR DENNA DEL AR OPPNAD OCH SPARRMEKANISMER AR FRIGJORDA TITTA INTE IN LASERSTRALEN RO LUOKAN 2 LASERSATEILYA AVATTUNA JA SISAISET LUKITUKSET POISTETTUINA ALA KATSO SATEESEEN ane RET JEU SS E CAUTION The use of optical instruments with this product will increase eye hazard CAUTION Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those spe
320. vity after replacing the lens The optimum position for the iris sensitivity trimmer varies depending on the lens For more information refer to the operating instructions of the lens or contact the lens manufacturer Adjusting the Audio Level Setting the AUDIO SELECT CH 1 CH 2 switches to AUTO automatically adjusts the input levels of the audio signal to be recorded in audio channels 1 and 2 Recording Basic Operations To manually adjust the levels of the audio inputs from the AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 connectors Proceed as follows to adjust the levels of the audio inputs from the AUDIO IN CH 1 CH 2 connectors which are to be recorded in audio channels 1 and 2 AUTO F MANUAL AUDIO SELECT CH 2 2 1 select the audio channel that you want to record in For details see Selection of the recording audio input on page 44 2 Setthe AUDIO SELECT CH 1 CH 2 switch es corresponding to the audio channel s selected in step 1 to MANUAL with the AUDIO LEVEL knob on the side control panel and the AUDIO LEVEL knob on the front adjust so that the audio level meter shows up to 20 dB for a normal input volume When the AUDIO IN switch is in the FRONT position the input level of audio channel 1 and 2 is the value of the AUDIO LEVEL knob on the front panel of the unit When the AUDIO IN s
321. witch is in the REAR or WIRELESS position the level is the value of the AUDIO LEVEL knob on the rear panel of the unit You can select the knobs used in adjustments by changing the settings of MIC CH1 LEVEL MIC CH2 LEVEL REAR1 WRR LEVEL and REAR2 WRR LEVEL on the AUDIO 2 page of the MAINTENANCE menu When the top bar 0 dB turns on the audio level is too high There is no problem if the second bar from the top turns on OVER 0 00000000 All bars turn on TTT I b T T T These bars turn on Normal input level Excessive input level To adjust manually the level of audio channel 1 without using the AUDIO LEVEL knob on the front of the camcorder Set AUDIO CH1 LEVEL to SIDEI on the AUDIO 1 page of the MAINTENANCE menu The setting of the AUDIO LEVEL knob on the front of the camcorder is disabled Setting the Time Data To set the timecode The timecode setting range is from 00 00 00 00 to 23 59 59 29 hours minutes seconds frames When the frame frequency is 23 98P from 00 00 00 00 to 23 59 59 23 Viii ENS aie CLIP MENU e SEUSET 4 6 6 PRESET F RUN 5 REGEN SET CLOCK R RUN 1 Press the DISPLAY EXPAND button of the LCD monitor so that the status display appears 2 Press the COUNTER CHAPTER button of the LCD monitor to display TCG on the time counter display section Set the PR
322. y b Only when sub item NAMING FORM on the FILE NAMING page of the OPERATION menu is set to FREE File Operation Restrictions This section explains which operations are possible on files stored in each directory When required the following operation tables distinguish reading and writing from partial reading and writing Root directory Read Read data sequentially from the start to the end of the file Partial read Read only a part of the data in the file Write Write data sequentially from the start to the end of the file Partial write Write data to a part of the file only File name Content Operations INDEX XML Contains data for management Yes of the material on the disc Read Partial read Write Partial write Rename Create Delete No No No No Contains conversion tables for Yes assigning user defined names to clips and clip lists ALIAS XML 9 No No No No DISCMETA XML Contains metadata to indicate Yes the disc properties Yes b No No No MEDIAPRO XML Contains a list of material on Yes the disc basic properties related information and information about access methods No No No No Other files Files other than the above No No a Only when sub item NAMING FORM on the FILE NAMING page of the OPERATION menu is set to FREE b Only files which can be written by XDCAM Directories cannot be cr

2 - Audio Services Corporation (Canada) Ltd.

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents